TOXICS RELEASE INVENTORY
ENVIRONMENTAL INDICATORS METHODOLOGY
                Prepared for:

    TRI Environmental Indicators Work Group
     Office of Pollution Prevention and Toxics
      U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
               401:;^ St, SW
            Washington, D.C 20460
                Prepared by:

             Abt Associates, Inc.
            4800 Montgomery Lane
             Bethesda, MD 20814
             September 23,1992
              DRAFT REPORT

-------
                                 DISCLAIMER

      This is a draft report; it should not be cited or quoted. This document has not been
reviewed and approved  for publication by the Office  of Toxic Substances, Office  of
Pesticides and Toxic Substances, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. The use of trade
names or commercial products does not constitute Agency endorsement or recommendation
for use.

-------
               UNITED STATES ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
                          WASHINGTON. D.C. 20460
                                                             OFFICE OF
                                                        PREVENTION. PESTICIDES AND
                                                           TOXIC SUBSTANCES
                                          March 29, 1993
Dear Colleague:

     Please  find attaqhed a copy of  the draft report  Toxics
Release Inventory Environmental Indicators Methodology.   Earlier
I had indicated  to you that you would not be sent a copy  of  the
draft as the final version was to be completed in the near
future.  Due to  unforseen circumstances it has not been possible
to complete  the  final version in the time frame originally
envisioned.   Therefore, I am sending you a copy of the draft as
many of you  expressed an interest in applying the methodology to
issues currently at hand.

     I hope  you  find the report useful.  If any assistance  is
required in  its  interpretation please feel free to contact me at
202-260-1567,  or by writing to the address above, including  the
mail stop TS-779.  If you feel a final copy would be needed  in
the future you may request a copy.
                               Sincerely,
                               Nicolaas Bouwes, PhD
                               Economist
                               Regulatory Impacts Branch
                               Economics, Exposure & Technology
                                  Division (TS-779)
                                                        Recycled/Recyclable
                                                        Printed with Soy/Canola Ink on paper that
                                                        contains at least 50% recycled fiber

-------
                            TABLE OF CONTENTS

 EXECUTIVE SUMMARY

 I.     INTRODUCTION	  1

 II.    GENERAL  DESCRIPTION  OF  THE   TRI  ENVIRONMENTAL
       INDICATORS	  2
       Human Health Chronic Indicator  	  3
       Ecological Chronic Indicator	  3

 III.   SELECTION OF CHEMICALS AND FACILITIES TO INCLUDE IN THE
       INDICATORS	  4
       Selection of Chemicals	  4
       Inclusion of Facilities  	  16

 IV.    METHODS  FOR ADJUSTING  EMISSIONS  FOR  TOXXCITY  AND
       EXPOSURE 	  18

       Toxicitv Weights — Human  	  20
            Quantitative Data Used in Human Toxicitv Weighting	  20
            Qualitative Data Used in Hvman Toricity Weighting	  23
            Genep*! Formal for Combining ^^irilt of Evidence and Potency ....  28
            Weights Applied to the Categories	  28
            The Hupian JHfefllth Toxicitv Matrices 	  33
                  Carcinogens 	  33
                  Noncarcinogens	  36
            Selecting |he Final Human Health Toxicitv Weight far a Chemical ...  36
       Toxicitv Weights - Ecological  	  38
            Data Used in Aquatic Toxtcjty Wejghtinj  	  38
            The Aquatic Toxicitv  Wefoh^ng Matrix,	  39
       Exposure Weights — Human  	  40
            Quantitative Data Used in Exposure Potential Weighting	  40
            Qualitative Data Used in Exposure Ppfentf al Weighting	  43
            The Human Exposure Potential ^tJ8ht^ng Matrix	  43
       Exposure Weights — Ecological  	  45
       Population Size Weights 	  45
            Quantitative Data Used in Population Weyriftpng	  46
            Qualitative Considerations iii Evaluating Exoosed Peculation Size      46
            ^fJQ^f^ffQf^^J^^^ggfffBj^Bjf^^^Jjg^g^^^f^^^^^JgiJgfg^'JjI^^JgQJf^fjg^gJ^^^^glJJ^^f^^Jf^^^f^SSSm • • •  ~W
       Integrating Toxicitv Data. Exposure  Data, and Population Data to Obtain
            Fflcilitv-Cheniical-Mcdiiim lndicn*ftr^CPlBntS	  47
            Hnm^p Health Chronic Indicator	  47
            Ecological ^Tirpp'C Indicator	  47

 V.     MECHANICS OF ESTIMATING EXPOSURE	  48
       Treatment of Emissions Range Reporting	  51
DP AFT HEPORT - DO NOT CITE OR QUOTE

-------
                              Acknowledgements
      This draft report was prepared by Abt Associates under the guidance of the TRI
Environmental Indicators Work Group.  Work Group members include:

Nicolaas Bouwes (Work Group Chair)
Nancy Beach
Daniel Bushman
LorenHall
Karen Hammerstrom
Steven Hassur
Sondra HoUister
John Leitzke
Patrick Miller
Nestor Tirado
Sylvon Vonderpool

The Abt Associates project staff include the following:

Susan Egan Keane (project manager)
Brad Firlie (deputy project manager)
Lisa Akeson
Kathy Cunningham
Jonathan Kleinman
Alexandra Varlay
Carol Wagett
Richard Wells
Michael Conti (technical reviewer)
DRAFT REPORT - DO NOT CITE OR QUOTE

-------
        Stack and Fugitive Air Releases ..................................   51
        Direct Surface Water Releases ...................................   52
        Qn.Site Land Releases .........................................   56
        Releases To POTWs ...........................................   61
        Off-Site Transfers ............................................   65

  VI.   COMPUTATION OF THE INDICATORS  ..........................   69
        Indicators Computation ........................................   71
                             Comonent Scores;  .......................   71
             Simple Sum Normalised to a Base Yean ......................  71
             Other Methods of Calculation Considered .....................  72
        Normalizing the Indicators  .....................................  72

  VII.   ABIOTIC INDICATORS .......................................  73
        Global Wanning .............................................  73
        Acid Rain ..................................................  75
        Stratospheric  Ozone Denletion ...................................  76
        Tropospheric  Ozone ...........................................  77
        Particle Deposition  ...........................................  ' 78

  VIII.  PROPOSED COMPUTER ALGORITHM FOR CALCULATING THE TRI
        INDICATORS ...............................................  78
        General Data Input ...........................................  79
        Modeling Process .............................................  85
        Indicators Summation Process ...................................  93
  IX.   ISSUES FOR FUTURE CONSIDERATION ........................ .  93

  X.    CONCLUSION ..............................................  95

  XI.   REFERENCES  ..............................................  96

  Appendix A. Survey of Ranking and Scoring Systems  ....................... A-l

  Appendix B. Options for a TRI Indicator Ranking/Scoring System ............. B-l

  Appendix C Available Toxirity Data for TRI Chemicals ..................... C-l

  Appendix D. Review of Data Sources ................................... D-l

  Appendix E. Waste Volumes by Industry ................................ E-l

  Appendix F. Options for Indicator Computation and Normalization  ............ F-l

  Appendix G.  Understanding the TRI Indicator Modelling Approach  ........... G-l
r»T» * r*r T»T«iV»t»T  r»O VOT r'l'I'L1 OO OT'OTF

-------
                             EXECUTIVE SUMMARY

       In 1989, the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) initiated an effort to focus
 resources on regulatory or other programs that have  the greatest potential to achieve
 reductions in health or environmental risks.  As pan of this effort, the Agency began to
 explore ways to evaluate  its successes in reducing risks, an effort which  includes the
 development of indicators of environmental progress.

       The Office of Pollution Prevention and Toxics (OPFT) is in the process of developing
 indicators of the impacts of chemical emissions on human health and the environment over
 time.  The indicators being developed by OPFT are based on existing data sources that
 reflect multimedia trends in environmental contaminant releases, and designed to be flexible
 enough to incorporate additional chemicals and sources as more information becomes
 available.

       The database selected as the basis for OPPTs environmental indicators is the Toxics
 Release  Inventory (TRI), which contains  annual reports documenting multimedia
 environmental  releases and off-site transfers for over 300 toxic chemicals from  U.S.
 manufacturing  facilities and which are of concern to the Agency1.  Although the TRI
 database does not capture  all chemicals or industry sectors of concern to both OPPT and
 the Agency as  a whole, the database is the  Agency's single  best source  of consistently
 reported emissions data

       The TRI Environmental Indicators may eventually consist of a set of four indicators,
 chronic and acute human health impacts, and chronic and acute ecological impacts.  The
 focus of this report is the development of indicators of chronic effects to human health and
 to aquatic life.  The development of corresponding acute effects indicators is not feasible
 now, since key data to support such indicators are not available. To appropriately evaluate
potential acute effects, one would need to know the distribution of releases over time (peak
release data), and these data are not currently reported to TRL
      The ultimate goal of the indicator effort is to devise a .measure that reflects the
impacts of chemical releases and transfers, which can be used to assess progress in reducing
these impacts over time.  The indicator methodology should be comprehensible, replicable,
and easily adaptable to a computer program. The methodology should also be sufficiently
flexible  to facilitate separate analyses of the relative contribution of indicator components,
such as release media, industry sectors, chemicals, and geographic areas. The methodology
should also have provisions that either provide for uncertainty or provide alternatives when
    'The TRI is mandated by the Superfund Amendment Reauthorization Act (SARA) Title
III Section 313.

-------
data are unavailable. The method should be sufficiently flexible to permit updates as new
chemicals/industries are added to TRI. Finally, all assumptions on which the indicator is
based should be easily identifiable and understood.

      This report explains how the proposed TRI Environmental Indicators are constructed,
and includes discussions of the conceptual methodology, data sources, and computational
approach.   The proposed indicators  are based on risk-related  scores, and the report
discusses the similarities and distinctions between the risk-based approach of the indicators
and conventional risk assessments.

      In developing the proposed indicators, many approaches to assessing and ranking the
potential risk of chemicals were reviewed.   Numerous techniques to score the relative
significance  of TRI chemicals and facilities have been and continue to be developed. One
objective of this report is to explain the indicator to a variety of agencies and  groups that
may wish to use it or to  adapt the indicators or the methodologies to their own needs.  A
related  objective is to describe the benefits of the proposed approach to the indicator in
terms of flexibility, power as an analytic tool, and usefulness as a policy tool

GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF THE TRI ENVIRONMENTAL INDICATORS

      The objective of the indicator methodology presented in this report is to construct
a unitless value that is related to the overall impacts of releases and transfers of all included
TRI chemicals by all facilities to each environmental medium at a given point in time. The
indicators are planned to be calculated each year based on the most current TRI data, and
compared to previous years' indicator values.  One of the early years of TRI reporting, e.g.
1989 , would be selected as a "base year" and later years' indicator values compared to it
For the  base year, the unitless score would be normalized to a round number such as 10,000;
subsequent years' data would  be normalized by the same factor to provide a relative
comparison. This will allow assessment of the changes in estimated impacts of TRI releases
and transfers from year to year.

      Four  components are generally used to compute each indicator (e.g. for human
health chronic impacts). These are:

      •     the quantity of a  chemical released or transferred,
      •     a tooticity weight,
      •     a weight reflecting the size of the potentially exposed population, and
      •     an exposure potential weight.

      Separate assessments are made for each unique combination of a chemical, facility,
and release  medium.  For each of these releases or transfers, one develops an indicator
"element": a unitless value proportional to the potential impact of each specific release or
transfer. The value for each TRI indicator is simply the sum of all the indicator elements.
                                        11
       Y»T'TV"»T»TI  T»/"» MOT /TI'Ii* f\J> OTTO "IT

-------
        It must be emphasized that the TRI Environmental Indicator methodology is not
  intended to be a quantitative risk assessment and does not calculate risk estimates.  The
  proposed methodology utilizes some of the tools often applied in quantitative assessments,
  but in a relative way.  The TRI indicator is by its nature only intended to reflect the
  direction and the general magnitude of the change in releases over time, scaled by factors
  (toxicity, exposure potential, receptor population size) that relate to potential risk. As such,
  this indicator value has only relative rather than absolute meaning; it can only be used in
  comparisons to other values at different points in time, or in identifying the relative size of
  contributing factors.

  Human Health Chronic Indicator

        Each element of the Human Health Chronic Indicator (which is facility-chemical*
  medium-specific) consists of three components:  toxicity, exposure (which includes release
  size), ?n<* the sigf of the exposed population.  Components are multiplied to calculate the
  element value. It must be reiterated that an element value is not an absolutely meaningful
  measure of risk associated with the facility. These values are useful as an approximate
  measure that is comparable to approximate measures for other facilities calculated using the
  same methods, to identify relative significance.

        The current proposal is focused on general populations: individuals, particularly
  highly exposed individuals, are not the focus of the ir*^n*tor. Additional indicators based
  upon nighty exposed or sensitive subpopulations may be developed in the future.

  Ecological Chronic Indicator

        For the Ecological (aquatic life) Chrome Indicator, the elements are developed by
  combining aquatic toxicity and exposure components for each facility, each chemical, and
  each mgHmm. AS with the human health chronic faHigatnr each component contributes
  multiplicativery to the overall magnitude of the element value. For the Ecological Chronic
  indicator, the population component is not utilized, sine? the f**y of the exposed population
  is typically not known, and because of the difficulty in relating impacts to ecological systems
  with many exposed populations of organisms.

  SELECTION OF CHEMICALS TO INCLUDE IN THE INDICATORS
        in order to be as inclusive as possible nnt^ still ™»fa*gfa computational tractability,
  a large subset of TRI chemicals should be included in the indicator. Factors considered for
  determining whether to include a  chemical include the availability of necessary data to
  compute elements , fln^ the magnitude of emissions. The following criteria are proposed
  to exclude TRI chf-nvfk from the indicator:
              Exclude chemicals with no reports in 1989 (56 chemicals) or only reports
              listing zero releases and transfers (17 chemicals, for a total of 73);
                                         111
DRAFT REPORT - DO NOT CITE OR QUOTE

-------
             Exclude chemicals with no readily available EPA-reviewed toxicity data (the
             number of chemicals is not currently known, as toxicity data reviews have not
             been completed).
             Possibly exclude chemicals with total releases to each medium below some
             threshold, e.g. 1000 Ib  (about  14 chemicals).  The initial list of chemicals
             meeting this criterion is being reviewed to identify (and delete) ones which
             may exhibit toxic effects at low concentrations.
METHODS FOR ADJUSTING EMISSIONS FOR TOXICITY AND EXPOSURE

       To construct indicator elements that are related to risk, the emissions must be
adjusted in a manner that reflects the risks associated with each media-specific release or
transfer of each chemical. The risk potentially posed by a chemical emission depends on
the inherent toxicity of the chemical, the environmental fate and transport of the chemical
in the medium to which it is released, the  degree of contact between the contaminated
medium and the human or ecological receptors, and the size of exposed populations.
Differences in toxicity among chemicals, as well as differences in environmental fate and in
the size and  characteristics of populations potentially exposed influence the  relative
contribution each emission makes to each indicator.  Transfers to ofiEtite locations such as
sewage treatment plants (POTWs) require an additional estimate of the impact of treatment
technology on the emissions.

       In order to incorporate all of these factors into comparable indicator elements, each
element's value is based on the release data, adjusted by weights reflecting the chemical's
toxicity relative to other chemicals, the potential exposure caused by the emission, and the
size of the potential exposed population.  There are different equations for the human
health and the ecological indicators, because each has different types of data available and
different requirements for comparing the effect of releases of TRI chemicals. Both human
and ecological indicator elements incorporate estimates of the uncertainties associated with
component weights. By using toxicity, exposure potential, and population size adjustments
to the emission, the changes in the indicators over time should be more closely related to
changes in risk than changes in emission quantities alone.

       The toxicity and exposure factors that are used to adjust the releases are referred to
as weights.  Briefly, the weights used to construct the TRI Environmental Indicators are
derived by classifying a release in terms  of ranges of toxicity, exposure, and  population
exposed, and a«igning a weight value to each range. The weight assigned to  each range
increases proportionally as toxicity or exposure increase.  The methodology for  deriving
weights is discussed in more detail below.  It must be reiterated that while the resulting
indicators are intended to relate to risk by  considering toxicity, exposure and  population
factors, the indicators do not provide actual risk estimates.
                                        IV
       •oT-T»r»t>T _ r»n VOT t "rrfc* OP OTYVTF

-------
  Toxicity Weights - Human

        For both carcinogenic and noncardnogenic chronic effects, the proposed methodology
  for developing human health toxicity weights is based on scoring systems that include both
  qualitative and quantitative elements.  There is uncertainty inherent in determining the
  potency of chemicals in causing human health effects, thus any quantitative potency data
  must be considered in the context of a qualitative classification of the uncertainty associated
  with that data. Therefore, the toxicity of each chemical is classified both quantitatively using
  potency data and qualitatively using weight-of-evidence (WOE).  Both kinds  of data are
  considered when deriving the score, and so both kinds of data must be generated for the
  TRI chemicals.

        For human health, a number of quantitative measures of potency can  be used for
  toxicity weighting.  Commonly used quantitative measures include the Oj", which describes
  cancer  potency; reference  doses (RfDs) for non-carcinogens; and reportable quantities
  (RQs).  The q,"s, and RfDs are toxicity measures that have been developed for EPA risk
  evaluation purposes.  RQs have been developed using similar toxicity data reviews to
  mandate reporting of releases to EPA at various release volumes.  One or more of these
  values are available for 247 TRI chemicals. There are some TRI chemicals for  which there
  are currently no formal EPA toxicity evaluations; for these chemicals, potential toxicity will
  be evaluated based on toxicity data available from other data sources, as well as quantitative
  structure  activity relationship methods, to supplement the formal available EPA toxicity
  values.  For certain chemicals of extraordinary interest, special resources may have to be
  made available to perform an adequate toxicity evaluation. Chemicals for which little if any
  toxicity data exist, nn^ thus no evaluation of toxicity is possible, will be excluded from the
        The second giemgnt of the h"«tian health toxicity weighting is the qualitative weight-
 of-evidence (WOE) classification schemes. There is an exception to this method, however.
 For chemicals with RfDs, WOE is considered in the development of an RfD; thus,
 consideration of WOE is already imbedded in the RfD value. Therefore, WOE is not used
 in  this methodology for  ««ignmg  toxicity weights for chemicals  with RfDs.  WOE
 information must be generated for carcinogens and for noncarcinogens without RfDs. The
 WOE schemes proposed in this report have been adopted from several sources. For cancer,
 the EPA Cancer Risk Assessment Guidelines2 and the TSCA Chemical Scoring System3
     'U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1986a. GnidgKqfff fey ^prcinoeen Risk
 Assessment.  51 Federal Register 33992 (September 24, 1986), currently being revised.
     'O'Bryan, T.R. and RJL Ross. 1988. Chemical Scoring System for Pyflird flad Exposure
 Identification. Journal of Toxicology and Environmental Health, 1:119-134.
DRAFT REPORT - DO NOT CITE OR QUOTE

-------
WOE schemes are used.  Non-carcinogenic WOE guidelines from the TSCA Chemical
Scoring System and from various EPA noncancer risk assessment guidelines are proposed
for use for non-carcinogens without RfDs.

       Using the quantitative toxicity data and qualitative weight of evidence information,
chemicals are assigned to toxitity ranges  and WOE categories.  A matrix, with WOE
categories on one axis and toxicity ranges on the other, are used to assign weights to each
chemical Separate matrices for carcinogens and noncardnogens are used for human health
toxicity.  Proportional weights - reflecting the magnitude of differences in toxicity between
chemicals — are assigned to the matrix cells. Weights increase by an order of magnitude for
each order of magnitude increase in toxicity and for each increase in WOE category.  For
a chemical that causes multiple toxic effects, the TRI indicator will weight a chemical based
on the endpoint associated with the lowest dose at which an effect occurs, but will not apply
additional weights for severity relative to other health effects or for the number of effects
caused.

Toxicity Weights - Ecological

       For ecological effects, the Indicator will focus on aquatic life impacts.  Very little
data are available for  most chemicals on effects to terrestrial or avian species, and the
human health indicator will provide some predictor of these.  For aquatic effects, WOE
qualifications of potency data are not used because direct quantitative evidence of toxicity
is  available  in the form  of  ambient water quality criteria (AWQQ, LC^s (lethal
concentration, SO percent), no observable adverse effect levels (NOAELs), and aquatic RQs.
Direct measures of bioaccumulation potential may be available in the form of laboratory-
derived bioconcentration factors (BCFs) or  bioaccumulation factors  (BAFs).   Where
laboratory data are unavailable, one of two indicators of bioaociTgnn*nt*CTifi potential ran be
used: either a measure of the potential for organic chemicals to partition between organic
material and water, or the water solubility of the chemical.

       For aquatic effects, two matrices will be used to develop separate weights for toxicity
and  bioaccumulation.  Weights from each matrix are then multiplied for a final weight.
Both matrices assign weights that increase by increments of an  order of magnitude as
toxicity ?nd hiftmTM*1111*0**"" potential increase.
Exposure Weights — Human

      For human exposure weighting, as with toxicity weighting, both quantitative and
qualitative (uncertainty) elements are considered when weighting exposure potential. Three
steps are involved in deriving the human exposure weight  The first step is to categorize
some measure of exposure potential into numerical ranges. The second step is to categorize
the levels of uncertainty associated with the measures of exposure potential The final step
uses' a matrix,  with numerical exposure potential ranges arrayed along one  axis and
                                        VI
  A TT vrrowT . no VOT PITT OP OTTOTir

-------
  uncertainty categories arrayed along the other, to assign increasing weights to higher-
  certainty/higher exposure potential releases.

        For the first step of this process, quantitative measures of exposure potential must
  be estimated.  To do so, several existing scoring systems take the approach of ordinally
  ranking the volume of each release by the some physical measure of the chemical's ability
  to move through the environmental medium into which it is released.  However, because
  the exposure potential  rankings would have different  physical meanings  for different
  pathways, comparisons among releases to different media would be difficult, and weighted
  releases from different pathways could not be added to obtain a single indicator value.

        In  this methodology, comparisons across media can be made because a common
  quantitative exposure measure for each medium is derived: an estimate of "surrogate dose" •
  . a measure related to the amount of chemical contacted by an individual per kg body
  weight per day. Although limited facility-specific data and the use of generic models
  (described below) prevent the calculation of an actual dose, the surrogate dose measure
  developed from the available data and from generic modeling is designed to be, in concept,
  comparable for all media.

        To estimate the magnitude of exposure potential from TRI releases, the methodology
  uses generic environmental fate and transport models. A separate exposure evaluation is
  conducted for  each release  pathway (e.&,  air, land,  surface water).  The  exposure
  evaluations combine data on media-specific g™«n«n volumes, physicochemical properties,
  and where available, site characteristics with generic exposure models to determine an
  estimate of the magnitude of the ambient concentration of iwitamtfiant jn the medium into
  which the chemical is released. (Again, the use of submitter-estimated TRI emission data
  and generic models with many default assumptions make this only a surrogate related to
  actual concentration). For the tni™«"» health indicator, the ambient tn*Hia concentrations
  are then combined with standard H"»*M»" exposure •«BmiptimiK to es**"10** the magnitude
  of the surrogate dose.

        It must  be emphasized that  while this methodology uses the EPA exposure
  assessment paradigm to evaluate exposure potential, the results should not be construed as
  an actual  absolute numerical  estimate of dose resulting from TRI releases.  Instead, the
  purpose is to obtain an order of magnitude estimate of surrogate dose resulting from release
  of TRI chemicals relative to the surrogate dose resulting pom other releases included in the
  indicator, so that these releases can be weighted appropriately in the indicator.

        The modeling approach proposed by this methodology to obtain surrogate ambient
  concentrations and surrogate dose measures for each pathway is summarized below.
              Stack aiflfl Fugitive Air Emissions! The Gaussian dispersion algorithm from
              the Industrial Source Complex Long Term (ISCLT) model, with assumed
              stack height, Stability Array (STAR) weather data, and specified distances
                                          v
TVT» ATTP T»Trnr»l>T  T»r> *M"»T / 'I'l'l1 r»t> OTTOTT7

-------
from the source is used to estimate the surrogate ambient concentrations of
contaminants. For human exposure, the surrogate dose measure is estimated
by combining population-weighted average air concentration with standard
assumptions for inhalation rate and body weight

Direct Surface Water Releases: Stream flow data from the GAGE database
is combined with release data and chemical  half-lives  to derive surrogate
concentrations of chemicals  in surface water.  For human exposure, the
concentration is combined with data on populations served by drinking water
utilities  with downstream intakes,  bioconcentration factors,  standard water
ingestion rates, fish ingestion rates, and body weight assumptions to derive the
surrogate dose.
        Tand Releases*   Volatilization and groundwater pathways were
considered in deriving the indices. Volatilization release data are reported
by the facilities with other air release data and are thus modeled with other
fugitive air releases from the facility. Groundwater contamination is modeled
only for disposal of TRI chemicals  to onsite nonhazardous  solid waste
management units. (Chemicals contained in solid waste streams classified as
hazardous are subject to additional disposal provisions which are assumed to
significantly limit potential for groundwater release and human exposure).
Leachate from landfills is modeled as a function of estimated concentration
of contaminant in the landfill, the soil/water partition coefficient, and the bulk
density of landfill material  The magnitude of dilution and attenuation of
contammants as  they  move toward  drinking  water  wells are  estimated
according to  Mating EPA dilution and attenuation factors (DAFs). The
surrogate dose measure is estimated for the population of well-water drinkers
within a Specified dfctange of the landfill site.

Transfers to POTWs:  The fate of chemicals entering POTWs is determined
according to  existing estimates of POTW removal efficiencies and within-
POTW partitioning rates (Le., the amount of contaminant that biodegrades,
volatilizes, or is adsorbed to sewage sludge).  Hie exposure to chemicals that
are not removed by the POTW are modeled according to the methodology for
direct surface water releases, while volatilized chemicals are modeled as area-
source air releases.
Other Off-Site Tnipsfe"'- For off-site transfers, methodologies for modeling
exposure are available for two disposal technologies: waste incineration and
landfiiling. Air releases from incineration are modeled in the same manner
as other air releases, using removal efficiencies for nonhazardous  waste
incinerators. For landfills, groundwater exposures are modeled in the same
planner as on-site disposal faculties. Unlike volatilisation emissions  from
onsite facilities,  volatilization emissions from  off-site facilities  arc net
                           viu
                       OTTOT1?

-------
             reported, and must be estimated, then modeled for exposure potential.  Once
             estimated, volatile emissions are then modeled in the same way as other air
             releases.

       Investigations are continuing to examine methods for assessing underground injection,
 both on- and off-site, as well as other treatment methods used for off-site transfers. For the
 initial calculations  of the TRI Environmental Indicators, these pathways will likely be
 considered as contributing negligible amounts to the exposure weight

       For the  second step of the exposure weighting process, uncertainty categories are
 created by considering the relative uncertainties associated with modeling different exposure
 pathways, each of which will have a different level of modeling precision and dependability
 of site-specific  data associated with it. This method uses three qualitative categories of
 increasing uncertainty to weight exposure estimates. The more uncertainty associated with
 an  estimate, the less weight given the exposure  estimate, with an order of magnitude
 difference between the categories with the highest and lowest estimates. (Hie middle
 uncertainty category is given a weight twice that of the category with the most uncertainty.)
Exposure Weights - Ecological

       For aquatic tife exposure to TRI chemicals, a weight is •««jgMH to each one of
several categories  of exposure,  with order  of •Mprftmte  ranges of ambient water
concentrations of the chemical resulting from a release used to define potential exposure.
The weights assigned to the ranges increase by an order of magnitude with each mer*»$ii}g
range of contaminant concentrations.

       Aquatic exposure weights for categories of increasing estimated water concentration
do not need to reflect exposure relative uncertainty, since all estimates are derived using the
same methodology.   The weights simply  increase by an order of magnitude for each
category.

Population Size Weight!

       This methodology proposes several rules for the use of population size data in the
exposure evaluation. First, a minimum population vahie is assumed to all releases to avoid
undervaluing sparsely distributed or rural populations. Second, both qualitative data (on the
uncertainty of the population size estimate) and quantitative data are used when evaluating
the SITP of the population potentially exposed to TRI releas
      To reflect the uncertainty associated with the size of exposed human populations,
population sizes are assigned to one of three qualitative categories of uncertainty, and are
reduced by an order of magnitude for each level of uncertainty. All population sizes are
rounded up to the nearest 1,000 persons, thus creating a minimum exposed population.
                                        IX

-------
        Because of the major difficulties in estimating sizes of the populations of ecological
  receptors, the TRI Ecological  Indicator does not include a population weight In effect, this
  approach assumes that all aquatic emissions occur to equally vulnerable locations.

  COMPUTATION OF THE  INDICATORS

        Each indicator's value is generated by a computer algorithm which links input files
  of releases and other input data required to mathematical models of media-specific pathway
  releases, which are then linked to toxicity and  exposure weighting factors to produce
  indicator elements.  The program generates up to 500,000 such elements , which are
  summed to produce the values for each of the four indicators.

        The elements  can also be  combined and evaluated in other ways than  annual
  comparisons.  The  detailed calculations used to create elements allow computation of
  subindicators for individual chemicals, geographic regions, industry sectors, facilities, or
  exposure pathways.  These subindicators, like the overall indicator, cannot be compared to
  some absolute level of concern, but could help identify the relative contribution to various
  components to the overall estimate of emission impacts.

  ISSUES FOR FUTURE CONSIDERATION

        There are two general types of issues: specific methodological questions for the
  indicators developed to date, and development of additional indicators. The methodological
  questions associated with the indicators developed to date that still need to be resolved
  include the following:

        •     How to address additions/deletions to the TRI chemical list, and whether to
              create new indicators when significant changes are made;

        •     How to include deposition of TRI chemicals into underground injection wells
              in the indicators;

        •     For noncarcinogenic  chemicals without RfDs, what specific WOE systems
              should be used for neurotoxicity, reproductive toxicity, and other chronic
              toxicity endpoints;

        •     For ofErite  transfers, how  to better  match TRI transfers to particular
              treatment practices (e.g., which TRI chemicals  are sent  to hazardous or
              nonhazardous waste management facilities; "***- of specific treatment practices
              at POTWs; and how to estimate the potential impact of non-landfill, non-
              incineration treatment types); and

        •     Using initial results of indicator computations, »«»tniti» the impact of various
              exposure weights and their WOE modifiers.
TIP A FT PFPOWT - DO NOT CITE OR QUOTE

-------
        The possible development of indicators for acute human health effects and acute
  aquatic effects depends on improved toricity and other data.  In addition, EPA considered
  expanding the TRI Environmental Indicators to reflect indirect health and environmental
  risks from TRI chemicals, such as global climate change, acid deposition, stratospheric ozone
  depletion, tropospheric ozone formation, and paniculate deposition.  While many of these
  impacts have health-related effects, the complexity and uncertainty in modeling them may
  make it impossible to incorporate them into the present set of indicators.

  CONCLUSION

        As an indication of improvements in environmental quality over time, the Human
  Health and Ecological indicators provide the EPA with a valuable tool to measure general
  trends related to impacts of TRI chemicals. They do not capture all environmental releases
  of concern, and thus changes in these indicators over time cannot be used to evaluate
  changes in other sources of environmental pollution.  These indicators do, however,
  generally relate changes in releases to relative changes in chronic human health and
  ecological risks from  a large number  of toxic  chemicals  of concern to  the Agency.
  Importantly, the indicators also provide an ability  to analyze the relative contribution of
  source categories to important changes.
DRAFT REPORT - DO NOT CITE OR QUOTE

-------
  I.     INTRODUCTION

        In 1989, EPA Administrator  William Reilly outlined the goals and processes for
  establishing a strategic planning and accountability process at the Agency. Underlying this
  approach is the Agency's desire to set priorities and shift resources to areas with the greatest
  opportunity to achieve health risk and environmental risk reductions.  As pan of this
  initiative, the Administrator set forth a plan to develop indicators of environmental progress
  in achieving the Agency's goals. Tracking this progress will allow the Agency to measure
  its successes in implementing environmental protection and pollution prevention programs,
  and to formulate strategic plans for improving the course of future environmental progress.

        Within  the  Office  of  Pollution Prevention and Toxics (OPPT),  environmental
  indicators were identified as a  component of the Toxic Substances Program Strategy 1992 -
  1995. The strategy described an indicator that would reflect environmental exposures as the
  Dow Jones Average reflects, the behavior of the New York Stock Exchange. The strategy
  envisioned that the indicator will provide an estimate of emissions reductions across media,
  including reductions that are voluntary on the part of industry and those that are a result
  of government actions.

        In general terms, such an indicator will allow EPA to track changes in human health
  and environmental impacts from emissions over *i*"g As such, the Agency will need to take
  advantage  of  y*fcrinp  flats sources that reflect ***"ititn*Hip trends in  environmental
  contaminant releases. One such database, the Toxic Release Inventory (TRI), is the OPPTs
  most relevant source of data for developing an annual indicator of environmental progress.
  TRI is ma-nAttt^A foy the  Supexfund  AmMiflmem Reauthorization Act (SARA) Title m
  Section 313 and reouires that U.S. ^nam^t^ftnTmo facilities file annual reports documenting
  multimedia environmental releases and off-site transfers for over 300 chemicals which are
  of concern to the Agency. Therefore, any indicator built from TRI data will be primarily
  an indicator for the manufacturing sector. However, despite the fact that the TRI database
  does not capture all chemicals, industrial sectors, or releases of concern to both OPPT and
  the  Agency as a whole, the database is the Agency's single best source  of  consistently
  reported release data. Moreover, SARA Section 313 explicitly provides for the expansion
  of TRI to  cover additional chemicals and industries, and a major effort is currently
  underway to add key chemicals and industries to TRL Furthermore, other program offices
  in the Agency are in the  process of  developing indicators that will complement the TRI
  indicator.

        The TRI "indicator" may eventually consist of a set of four indicators. The focus of
  this report is the development of indicators of chronic human health impacts and  aquatic
  life impacts. The development of corresponding acute effects indicators is not feasible now,
  since the data to support such indicators are not available.  To appropriately evaluate
  potential acute effects, one would  need to know the distribution of releases over time (peak
  release data), and these data are not currently reported to TRL However, possible changes
TIP AUT PFPOPT - DO NOT < TIT OP OTTOTF

-------
in reporting requirements may allow for the development of separate acute indicators for
human and ecological effects.

      The ultimate goal of the indicator effort is to devise a measure that reflects the
impacts of chemical releases and transfers, which can be used to assess progress in reducing
these impacts over time. Hie indicator methodology should be comprehensible, replicable,
and easily adaptable to a computer program.  The methodology should also be sufficiently
flexible to facilitate separate analyses of indicator components, including specific media,
industrial sectors, chemicals, and geographic areas.  The methodology should  also have
provisions that either provide for uncertainty or provide alternatives when data  are
unavailable.   The method  should be  sufficiently flexible to  permit updates  as  new
chemicals/industries are added to TRI.  Finally, all assumptions on which the indicators are
based should be easily identifiable and understood.

      This report explains how the proposed TRI Environmental Indicators are constructed,
and includes discussions of the conceptual methodology, data sources,  and computational
approach.  The proposed indicators are based on  risk-related scores, and the report
discusses the similarities and distinctions between the risk-based approach of the  indicators
and conventional risk assessments.
      In developing the proposed indicators, many approaches to "«*«"*c ***& ranking the
potential impact of chemicals were reviewed. Numerous techniques to score the relative
significance of TRI chemicals and facilities have been and continue to be developed. One
objective of this report is to explain the indicators to a variety of agencies and groups that
may wish to use or adapt the indicators or the methodologies to their own needs. A related
objective is to describe the benefits of the proposed approach to the indicators in terms of
flexibility, power as an analytical tool, and usefulness as a policy tool
II.    GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF THE TRI ENVIRONMENTAL INDICATORS

      The objective of the indicator methodology presented in this report is to construct
a unitless vahie related to the overall impacts of releases and transfers of all included TRI
chemicals by all facilities to each environmental medium at a given point in time. The
indicators are planned to be calculated each year based on the most current TRI data, and
compared to previous years' indicator values. One of the early years of TRI reporting, e.g.
1989, would be selected as  a "base year" and later years' indicator values  compared to it.
For the base year, the unitless score would be normalized to a round number such as 10,000;
subsequent years' data would  be normalized  by the  same factor to provide a relative
comparison. This will allow assessment of the changes in estimated impacts of TRI releases
and transfers from year to year.

-------
       Four components are generally used to compute each indicator (e.g. for human
 health chronic impacts).  These are:

       •     the quantity of a chemical released or transferred,
       •     a toxicity adjustment,
       •     an adjustment reflecting the size of the potentially exposed population, and
       •     an exposure potential adjustment

       Separate assessments are made for each unique combination of a chemical, facility,
 and release medium.  For each of these releases or transfers, one develops an indicator
 "element": a unitless value proportional to the potential impact of each specific release or
 transfer. The value for each TRI indicator is simply the sum of all the indicator elements.

       It must be emphasized that the TRI Environmental Indicator methodology is not
 intended to be  a quantitative risk assessment and does not calculate risk estimates. The
 proposed methodology utilizes some of the tools often applied in quantitative assessments,
 but in a relative way. Hie TRI Environmental Indicators are by their nature only intended
 to reflect the direction and the general magnitude of the  change in releases over time,
 scaled by factors (toxicity, exposure  potential, receptor population size) that relate to
 potential risk.  As such, an indicator value has only relative  rather than absolute
it  can only be used in comparisons to other values at different points  in time, or in
identifying the relative size of contributing factors.

Human Health Chronic Indicator

       Each element of the Human Health Chronic Indicator (each of which is facility-
chemical-medhim-specific) consists of three components: tenacity, exposure (which includes
release size), and  the size  of the  exposed population.  Components are multiplied to
calculate the element It must be  reiterated that an element value is not an absolutely
meaningful measure of  risk associated with the facility. These values are useful as an
approximate measure that is comparable to  apnrmrimate measures  Cor  other facilities
calculated using the same methods, to identity relative significance.

       The current proposal is focused on general populations: individuals, particularly
highly exposed individuals, are not the focus of the indicator.  Additional indicators based
upon highly exposed or sensitive subpopulations may be developed in the future.

Ecological Chronic Indicator

       For the Ecological (aquatic life) Chronic Indicator, the elements are developed by
combining aquatic toxicity and exposure components for each faculty, each chemical, and
each medium. As with the Human Health Chronic Indicator,  each component contributes
multiplicativety to the overall magnitude of the element value. For the Ecological Chronic
Indicator, the population component is not utilized, since the size of the exposed population

-------
is typically not known, and because of the difficulty in relating impacts to ecological systems
with many exposed populations of organisms.

      There are several factors that must be considered in constructing the indicators: these
include selecting chemicals for inclusion, designing a mechanism for adjusting ^missions to
reflect exposure and toritiry, and developing algorithms for calculating these adjustments.
The following sections describe the elements of the proposed TRI indicators.  A conceptual
flow chan of the proposed TRI Environmental Indicator methodology is presented in Figure
1.

III.   SELECTION  OF CHEMICALS AND FACILITIES TO  INCLUDE IN  THE
      INDICATORS

Selection of Chemicals

      In order to be as inclusive as possible and still «M»«*«fa computational tractability,
a large subset of TRI chemicals should be included in the indicators.  However, several
factors must be considered when determining whether to include a chemical in the
indicators calculation. The number of chemicals included in the indicators could be limited
by the availability of data characterizing the chcrnifal or the magnitude of emissions.
      The TRI Environmental ^nrT|'n>t^r Work Group initially identified the following list
of criteria for selecting chemicals to exclude from the TRI indicators;

      •     Criterion lr Exclude che*"icajswift_norcPQr^HE_or_2pro reporting, For 1989
            TRI data,  these criteria alone would exclude 73 chemicals and over 2000
            fayjii^tfft from flfMMJdgrafiqn^ leaving 244 rfuMiifoaiy and over 20.000 faculties
            included in. the TRI indicators nna*yfffc  The chemicals  excluded  by these
            criteria are listed in Table  1.  These criteria would allow the Agency to
            concentrate resources (such as the research on toxicity and environmental fate
            data) on thostf c^yn^ic?** that could actually ^rosf & potential impact* One
            problem with this approach is that the potential future increase of emissions
            of these chemicals could contribute to health and  environmental impacts.
            However, reporting of increased emissions of chemicals could result in their
            addition to the indicators. This issue is covered in a later discussion of the
            normalization of the indicators. Because it is possible that some facilities may
           : incorrectly report zero releases, this criterion could be limited to excluding
            chemicals with no reporting.  In this case, the criterion would exclude 53
            ghemiryic fmm the indicators analysis, but no faculties, y*np<> if chemicals have
            no reports, presumably no facility in the database would  have only these
            chemicals on its form R.

-------
       Figure 1
       Methodology for Calculating Human Health TRI Indicator
o
1
s
§
offsite transfers
{POTW transfers

1

ofTslte
Incineration
direct air
emissions
.»
POTW sludge
r iitiiaaaitlnii
IIPUIPC1 •Uvu

^
1

fugitive air
emissions
1
Air *-

i

onslte land disposal;
Includes
underground Injection

•i Volatilisation
i
^
'i
|
i
1
i

Ground
Water

offciU
andergroi
offsite transfers
POTW transfers
>land
;lncludc9
ind Injection

POTW sludge
land disposal


direct water
discharges
1
Sur
i

Exposure Evaluation
i
c
face Water *~

POTW
transfers
•OTW
ffluenl

               population data
                 toxicity data
                                                              Exposure Weight
Population Weight
 Toxldty Weight
                                        1
                                 Air
                                 Index
                                        ftcDhr,
                                        chemical
 Groundwater
 Index  fae|m
                                        1
Surface Water

Inde*  heUHr,
       chemical
                                                    Sum over all facilities and chemicals
                                                                TRI Indicator

-------
            Table 1
            Chemicals With No Reports or No Reported Releases (73 Total)
            Shaded Chemicals Were Reported but With,No Releases (20 Total)
            Total number of chemicals(73) and facilities (>2000)
            1989 Toxics Release Inventory Data

                       CAS     Chemical
                      S1752     NITROGEN MUSTARD
                      53963     ACETYLAMINOFLUORENE4
                      55185     NITROSODIETHYLAMINE.N
                      51125     CYANIDE
                      57578     PROPIOLACTONEJETA
                      59892     NTTROSOMORPHOLINE.N	
                      60093
                      60117
                      60355
                      62759
                      81889
                      92671
                      95954
                      96128
                      97563
                      99592
                     100754
                     119904
AMJNOAZOBENZENE.4
DIMETHYLAMINOAZOBENZENE.4
ACETAMIDE
NTTROSODIMETHYLAMtNEJI
                      68768     TRIAZIQUONE
                      75274 .    DICHLOROBROMOMETHANE
                      79447     DIMETHYLCARBAMYL CHLORIDE
CJ. FOOD RED 15
J
                      82280     1-AMIN02-ME1HYL-ANTHRAQUINONE
                      91598     NAPHTHYLAMINE.BETA	
AMINODSPUENYL.4
J
                      92875     BENZIDINE
                      92933     NITROBIPHENYM
TRICOLORO/PHENOL, 2,4,5 -
DIBROMOCHLOROPROPANE (DBCB)
CJ. SOLVENT YELLOW3
NTTROOANISIDmE.5
NTTROSOPIPERIDINEJf
101804
104949
107302
114261
115531
117793
DlAMtHODtPHEtrrLEIOBR. 4.4
AMSW1NEJ'
CHLOROMETHYL METHYL ETHER
PROPOXUR
DICOFOL
AMINOANTHRAQUINONEJ
DIMETHOXYBENZID1NE, 3,3
J
                     119937     DIMETHYLBENZIDINE,33
                     122667     DIPHENYLHYDRAZINE, U
                     126727     TRIS(2,3DIBROMOPROPYL)PHOSPHATC
                     128665     CL VAT YELLOW 4
                     134292     ANISIDINEHYDROCHLORIDE.O
                     135206     CUPFERRON
                     139651     TfflODIANILINE,4,4
                     309002     ALDRIN
                     334883     DIAZOMETIIANE
                     492808     AURAMINE
DRAFT REPORT - DO NOT CITE OR QUOTE

-------
Table 1
Chemicals With No Reports or No Reported Releases (73 Total)
Shaded Chemicals Were Reported but With No Releases (20 Total)
Total number of chemicals(73) and facilities (>2000)
1989 Toxics Release Inventory Data
CAS
505602
510156
532274
542881
615054
621647
636215
680319
684935
759739
842079
924163
989388
1120714
1335871
1464535
1836755
1937377
2234131
2303164
2602462
2832408
3118976
3761533
4549400
4680788
7440280
8001352
16071866
. 16543558
20816120
39156417
Chemical
MUSTARD GAS
CHLOROBENZELATE
CHLOROACETOPHENONE
BISfCHLOROMETVYL)ETHER
DIAMINOAN1SOLEA4
NirROSODInPROPYLAMINEJ*
TOLUIDINE HYDROCHLORIOE
HEXAMETHYLPHOSPHORAMIDE
NITROSONMEIHYLUREAJt
NTTROSONETHYLUREA.N
CJ. SOLVENT YELLOW 14
NTTROSODInBUTYLAMINEJ*
CJ. BASIC RED 1
PROPANE SULTONE
HEXACHLORONAPHTHALENE
DffiPOXYBUTANE
NTTROFEN
CJ. DIRECT BLACK 38
OCTACHLORONAPHTAHLENE
D1ALLATE
CJ. DIRECT BLUE 6
CJ. DISPERSE YELLOWS
CJ. SOLVENT ORANGE 7
.CJ. FOOD RED 5
NrTROSOMETHYLVINYLAMINEJ*
CJ. ACID GREEN 3
THALLIUM
TOXAPHENE
CJ. DIRECT BROWN 95
NITROSONORNICOTINEjr
OSMIUM TETROXIDE
DIAMINOANISOLESULFATB. 2.4
  T»TIIV"»I>T  T»O TWIT f'I't'V OP OTTOTF

-------
Criterion 2: Exclude chemicals with relatively low reporting (between 1 and
1.000 Ibs to each medium: air, water, land, off-site transfers, transfers to
POTWg).  Excluding these chemicals would allow us to focus the indicators
on chemicals causing the greatest impacts. The danger of this criterion is the
possibility of excluding a high-toxicity but low-volume release that  may
contribute  substantially to health and environmental  impacts.  Another
problem with this approach is the potential future increase of emissions of
these chemicals that could contribute to risk. This criterion would exclude 12
chemicals but fewer than 5 faculties from consideration. Those chemicals that
would be excluded by this criterion are found in Table 2.  Some Work Group
members suggested increasing the cutoff for off-site transfers to 25,000 Ibs,
since such transfers may undergo treatment before release to the environment.
Increasing the exclusion criterion for offsite transfers to less than 25,000 Ibs.
would exclude 19 chemicals and about 10 facilities.

Criterion 3: Exclude chffnNCTiif with relatively low reporting fbeywycfl 1 pnd
1.000 Ib to all media combined! air, ^flter. lftnd. off-site transfer* transfers to
POTWsi.  Similar to the previous criterion, this would allow us to concentrate
on chemicals causing the greatest impacts, but may exclude high toxicity,'low
volume releases  and  encourage  future emission  increases that would
contribute to environmental impacts. This criteria would exclude 7 chemicals
but fewer **""* 5 facilities from consideration. Those chemicals excluded by
this criterion are found in Table 3.

Criterion 4: Exclude chemicals having BP tpricitv data.  As discussed briefly
above, the TRI Environmental Indicators will require incorporation of data
on the relative toxirity of chemicals.  Chemicals must be scored based on
available toxicity data  If there is insufficient information upon which to
evaluate the toxicity of a chemical, the chemical would be excluded from the
indicators.  It should be emphasized that exclusion from the indicators would
be a last resort, used only after all available mechanisms for closing data gaps
(including  structure activity relationship methods and best professional
judgment) are exhausted. While *Hi« criterion presents a danger of excluding
risky but poorly studied chemicals, the risk-related nature of the indicators
does not allow for inclusion of these chemicals. Table 4 presents the TRI
chemicals for which formal EPA toxicity  data  are not available in the
Integrated  Risk  Information  System  (IRIS)  or in the  Health  Effects
Assessment Summary Tables, and for which specific health-based (chronic,
carcinogenic)  Reportable Quantities  have not  been  developed  under
CERCLA.  As shown in this table, there are 70 chemicals that have no readily
available toxicity data.  Thirty-three of these 70 have zero or no reported
releases. Excluding these 70 chemicals would exclude about 250 facilities.
This table will be circulated among other OPPT divisions and other Agency
offices (such as the Pesticides office) to solicit additional available toxicity


                            8

-------
      Table 2
      Chemicals With TRI Releases Less Than 1,000 Pounds in Each Media
      (Air, Water, Land, Off-site Transfers, Transfers to POTWs)
      Total Number of Chemicals is 12 and Number of Facilities is Less than 5
      1989 Toxics Release Inventory Data

            CAS CHEMICAL

           55210 BENZAMIDE
           60344 METHYL HYDRAZINE
           7243S METHOXYCHLOR
           7SSS8 PROPYLENEIMINE
           88891 PICRIC ACID (2,4,6TRINITROPHENOL)
           94S97 SAFROLE
           96093 STYRENE OXIDE
          134327 NAPHTHYLAMINE, ALPHA
          156105 NITROSODIPHENYLAMINE,P
          593602 VINYL BROMIDE
        10034932 HYDRAZINE SULFATE
        12122677 ZINEB
VOt AFT REPORT - DO NOT CITE OR QUOTE

-------
Table 3
Chemicals With TRI Releases Between 1 and 1,000 Pounds Across All Media
(Air, Water, Land, Off-site Transfers, Transfers to POTWs)
Total Number of Chemicals is 7 and Number of Facilities is Less Than S
1989 Toxics Release Inventory Data

      CAS CHEMICAL

     60344 METHYL HYDRAZINE
     75558 PROPYLENEIMINE
     88891 PICRIC ACID (2.4.6TRINITROPHENOL)
     94597 SAFROLE
    134327 NAPHTHYLAMINE. ALPHA
    156105 NTTROSODIPHENYLAMINE, P
   10034932 HYDRAZINE SULFATE
                             10

-------
Table 4
C    sals With No Widely Available EPA Toricity Data (IRIS, HEAST. human health RQs)
TL   uumber of chemicals (70) and facilities (about 250)
Shaded chemicals have zero or no reported releases (31)
CAS
20075
SS210
55630
59892
60093
60355
64675
67630
68768
748S1
78842
81889
82280
87627
88891
90040
90948
91087
92671
92933
94360
9S636
96093
97S63
99S92
101688
101779
101804
104949
111422
115071
117793
120718
120809
123386
1237281
Chemical
COBALT COMPOUNDS
BENZAMIDE
NITROOLYCERIN
NITROSOMORPHOUNEJf
AMINOAZOBENZENE. 4
ACBTAMIDE
DIETHYL SULFATE
ISOPROPYL ALCOHOL FOR STRONG ACID PURPOSES
TRIAZIQUONB
ETHYLENE
ISOBUTYRALDEHYDE
C.I. FOOD RED 15
1-AMINO 2-METHYL-ANTHRAQUINONE
XYUDINEA6
PICRIC ACID (2.4.6TRINrrROPHENOL)
ANISIDINE.O
MICHLERS KETONE
TOLUENE2.6DIISOCYANATE
AMINODIPHENYL.4
NITROBIPHENYI,4
BENZOYL PEROXIDE
TRIMETHYLBENZENE. 10,4
STYRENE OXIDE
C.L SOLVENT YELLOW 3
NITROOANISIDINE. 5
METHYLENEBIS(PHENYLISOCYANATE)
METHYLENEDIANILJNE.4,4
DIAMDfODIPHENYLETBER. 4.4
ANISIDINEiP
DIETHANOLAMDfE
PROPYLENE (PROPENE)
AMINOANTHRAQUINOKEO
CRESIDINEJ
CATECHOL (IJ. DIHYDROXYBENZENE)
PROPIONALDEHYDE
BUTYRALDEHYDE
Comment
re: potential data
teratogen


NTP carcinogen





NTP eareinof en
potential carcinogen


potential carcinogen


potential carcinogen




potential carcinogen
              . DO NOT CITE OR QUOTE
                                             11

-------
Table 4
Chemicals With No Widely Available EPA Toxicity Data (IRIS, HEAST, human health RQs)
Total number of chemicals (70) and facilities (about 250)
Shaded chemicals have zero or no reported releases (31)
CAS
128665
132649
134292
135206
139139
139651
141322
156105
1S6627
334883
463S81
541413
969642
615054
680319
842079
989388
1313275
1314201
1335871
1836755
2234131
2832408

3118976
3761533
4680788
6484522
7440484
7664939
7783202
10049044
16543558
39156417
Chemical
C.I. VAT YELLOW 4
DIBENZOFURAN
ANISID1NE HYDROCHLORIDE.O
CUPFERRON
NITRILOTRIACETIC ACID
THIODIANILINE.4.4
BUTYL ACRYLATE
NITROSODIPHENYLAMINE. P
CALCIUM CYANAMIDE
DIAZOMETHANE
CARBONYL SULFIDE
ETHYL CHLOROFORMATE
C.L BASIC OREEN 4
DIAMINOANISOLEA4
HEXAMETHYLPROSPHORAMIDE
C.L SOLVENT YELLOW 14
CJ. BASIC RED 1
MOLYBDENUM TRIOXIDE
THORIUM DIOXIDE
HEXACHLORONAPHTHALENE
NFTROFEN
OCTACHLORONAPHTAHLENE
C.L DISPERSE YELLOW 3
C.I. SOLVENT ORANGE 7
C.L FOOD RED 5
C.L ACID OREEN 3
AMMONIUM NITRATE
COBALT
SULFURICACID
AMMONIUM SULFATE
CHLORINE DIOXIDE
NITROSONORNICOTINEJi
DIAMINOANISOLE SULFATE. 2.4
Comment
re: potential data



CAA Section 111


CAA - Sectioa 111 and TSCA 8a
CAA - Scetioa 111 and pettieide

CAA - Section 112















                                              12

-------
          data.  For several of these chemicals (indicated in the comment column in
          Table 4), toxicity data are likely to be available within OPTS.  Remaining
          data  gaps could  be filled with additional  research and  application  of
          professional judgment.  Again, chemicals would be excluded based on this
          criterion only after all means to fill data gaps had been exhausted. If new
          toxicity data became available, the chemical could later be added to the
          indicators (see Section VI for a discussion of normalizing the indicators with
          the addition of new chemicals).


          chemicals with low toxicity relative to other TRI chemicals allows us to focus
          on thoroughly evaluating those chemicals with the  highest potential for
          contribution to the indicators. Criteria would be defined for "relatively low
          toxicity," based on specific toxicity threshold values.  This criterion may
          exclude certain chemicals that have relatively low toxicity but have very high
          volume releases. Table 5 lists chemicals that would be excluded if low human
          health toxicity were defined as follows: (a) smallest reportable quantity equals
          5,000 pounds; (b)  oral and inhalation reference doses are greater than 0.1
          mg/kg-day; or (c) oral and inhalation cancer potencies are less than 0.01 kg-
          day/mg. These criteria would exclude 37 chemicals nT|^ about 3000 faculties
          from consideration.

          Exclude chemicals ^feting two, or rpore of these criteria. A combination  of
          the previous criteria would remove those chemicals with both relatively low
          toxicities and low releases, thus avoiding the loopholes discussed, above.
          Possible combinations  include: yh»™«iiy with low reporting to each media
          and low toxicity (Criterion 6); chemicals with low releases to  all media
          combined and low toxicity (Criterion 7); and chemicals with no reports  or
          zero releases and low toxicity (Criterion 8). This  step would exclude  those
          chemicals of ™™»i*i concern; these chemicals would be subject to addition
          in later years, if their reported releases increase above the established criteria.
          Based on 1989 TRI data, however, no chemicals would be eliminated using
          Criteria 6 and 7.   Criterion 8 would exclude one chemical but no facilities
          from consideration.
          Possibly exchide "non-TSCA* yhgffyyflls   OPPT may wish to  focus its
          indicators on those chemicals over which it has direct regulatory authority,
          e.g., those chemicals listed on the TSCA inventory (40 CFR §372.65).  By
          doing so, the indicators could track OPPT program effectiveness; changes in
          TSCA chemical releases would not be masked by increases in releases of
          chemicals over which OPPT has no regulatory control  For example, there
          are a number of pesticides on the TRI roster (listed in Table 6), which may
          exclusively have uses that are not included on the TSCA inventory. This
          criterion would exchide few chemicals, since almost all chemicals in TRI are
                                      13
A «r tf-FonoT . no NOT CITE OR QUOTE

-------
 Table 5
 Chemicals With Low Toricity
 Total number of chemicals(37) and facilities (about 3000)

            CAS   Chemical
           67561   METHANOL
           67641   ACETONE
           71363   BUTYL ALCOHOL, N
           75003   CHLOROETHANE (ETHYL CHLORIDE)
           75070   ACETALDEHYDE
           75252   BROMOFORM (TRIBROMOMETHANE)
           75274   DICHLOROBROMOMETHANE
           75569   PROPYLENE OXIDE
           78875   DICHLOROPROPANE, 1,2
           78922   BUTYL ALCOHOL, SEC
           79061   ACRYLAMIDE
           79107   ACRYLIC ACID
           84662   DIETHYL PHTHALATE
           85449   PHTHALIC ANHYDRIDE
           85687   BUTYL BENZYL PHTHALATE
           86306   NITROSODIPHENYLAMINEJf
           90437   PHENYLPHENOL.2
                  CUMENE
                  BENZAL CHLORIDE
          100425    STYRENE
          103231    BIS(2ETHYLHEXYL)ADIPATE
          106898    EPICHLOROHYDRIN
          107211    ETHYLENE GLYCOL
          108101    METHYL ISOBUTYL KETONE
          108316    MALEIC ANHYDRIDE
          108883    TOLUENE
          108952    PHENOL
          120127    ANTHRACENE
          131113    DIMETHYL PH1HALATE
          133062    CAFTAN
          140885    ETHYL ACRYLATE
         1582098    TRIFLURAUN
         7440508    COPPER
         7440666    ZINC
         7647010    HYDROCHLORIC ACID
         7664382    PHOSPHORIC ACID
         7782505    CHLORINE
Note: This list includes only t
                                   that have EPA tozidty data.
                               14
TWATT TfVDfMfT . T»T» VOT
                            OT'OTP

-------
Table 6
Pesticides Listed in TRI (that may have uses not covered
under TSCA)
CAS

000052-68-6
000056-38-2
000057-74-9
000058-89-9
000062-73-7
000063-25-2
000072-43-5
000076-44-8
000082-68-8
000087-86-5
000088-06-2
000094-75-7
000095-95-4
000096-12-8
000106-93-4
000114-26-1
000115-32-2
000133-06-2
000133-90-4
000309—00—2
000510-15-6
000961-11-5
001582-09-8
001836-75-5
001897-45-6
002164-17-2
002303-16-4
008001-35-2
012122-67-7
012427-38-2
                              TRICHLOROFON
                              PARATfflON
                              CHLORDANE
                              UNDANE
                              DICHLORVOS
                              CARBARYL
                              METHOXYCHLOR
                              HEPTACHLOR
                              QUINTOZENE
                              PENTACHLOROPHENOL
                              TR1CHLOROPHENOL (2,4,6-)
                              2,4-D
                              2.4.5-TRICHLOROPHENOL
                              DIBROMO-3-CHLOROPROPANE (U-)
                              DIBROMOETHANE (1,2-)
                              PROPOXUR
                              DICOFOL
                              CAPTAN
                              CHLORAMBEN
                              ALDRIN
                              CHLOROBENZILATE
                              TETRACHLORVINPHOS
                              TRUFLURAUN
                              NTTROFEN
                              CHLOROTHALONIL
                              FLUOMETURON
                              DIALLATE
                              TOXAPHENE
                              ZINEB
                              MANEB
                         15
TVO A r«r
                no WOT
                  OP OTTOTF

-------
             subject (at least  theoretically)  to TSCA authority.   Exclusion of these
             chemicals could also diminish the usefulness of the  indicators outside of
             OPPT if this criterion leads to  the exclusion of a chemical of concern to
             another office.

      Table 7 summarizes the number of chemicals and the number of faculties included
and excluded by Criteria 1 through 8, discussed above. The Work Group also considered
the idea of a selecting a random sample of the TRI chemicals for inclusion in the indicators.
However, it was determined that a large percentage of the TRI roster (over 200 chemicals
out of 317) would have to be selected in order to obtain an adequate representative sample
with a sufficiently moderate coefficient of variation. Therefore, the Work Group concluded
that  randomly selecting chemicals would not be a fruitful exercise at this point.  If, in the
future, the TRI reporting system is expanded to contain a much larger number of chemicals,
this option may be revisited.

      In consideration of these criteria, this method proposes the exclusion of the following
chemicals from the TRI indicators calculation:

      •      chemicals with either no reports, or only reports listing zero releases and
             transfers;

      •      chemicals with no available, EPA-reviewed toxicity data (but flag these); and
       •      possibly exclude chemicals with total releases to each ir*^"1*" below some
             threshold (e.g^ 1000 pounds).

       Note that chemicals of special interest to various offices in the Agency (such as
chemicals undergoing regulatory activity) may inadvertently be excluded from the indicators
based on one or more of these criteria. Once the final list of excluded chemicals is created,
it can  be examined to ensure that chemicals of special concern to the Agency are not
excluded.  In addition, other offices will be asked if there are chrmicfilif that we have
included that should in fact be excluded, such as pesticides that have not been nor will be
reregistered for use in the U.S.

Inclusion of Facilities
                  certain chemicals from the indicators will eliminate some facilities that
release these chemicals from the indicators.  There may be additional reasons to exclude
certain facilities from the indicators. For example, the reliability of reporting from certain
facilities may be questionable.  There may also be concerns about the resource and
computing requirements for including all facilities in the  indicators. For these reasons, the
Work Group considered options where a subset of faculties would be selected for inclusion
in the indicators.  Several statistical methods for selecting representative facilities were
considered.  Ultimately, the Work Group decided to include all (acuities emitting the

                                        16

-------
Table 7
J
i
j
j
*
5
j
ni> OTTriTF





• • VBW^^VWV* -**m m »«*• mmm • «*• m^tummmm ummmm »••• K ^* ••**••• •*»*• H>
Criteria
1 Chemicals with no or zero
reporting of TRI releases

2 Chemicals with TRI releases less
than 1,000 pounds in each media
3 Chemicab with TRI releases less
than 1,000 pounds across all media
4 Chemicals with no EPA toxicity data
5 Chemicals classified with low
toxicity
6 Chemicab meeting Criteria 2 and 5
7 Chemicab meeting Criteria 3 and 5
8 Chemicab meeting Criteria 1 and 5
Number of
Chemicab
Excluded
73

12
7
70
37
0
0
1
Number of
Chemicab
Remaining
244

305
247
243
280
317
317
316
Number of
Facilities
Excluded
~2200

<5
<5
~250
-3000
0
0
0
Number of
Facilities
Remaining
P
-20.300

-22,500
-22.500
-22.250
- 19.500
-22,500
-22,500
-22,500
                                                  17

-------
    chemicals included in the indicators. This approach avoids questions of representativeness
    of a selected subset of facilities. The Work Group also judged the inclusion of all facilities
    to be feasible within the resource constraints given the proposed approach described below.
    IV.    METHODS FOR ADJUSTING EMISSIONS FOR TOXICITY AND EXPOSURE

          To construct indicator elements that are related to risk, TRI emissions must be
    adjusted in a manner that relates to the risks associated with each media-specific release or
    transfer of each chemical The risk potentially posed by a chemical emission depends on
    the inherent toxicity of the chemical, the environmental fate and transport of the chemical
    in the medium to which  it is released, the degree of contact between the contaminated
    medium and the human or ecological receptors,  and the size of exposed populations.
    Differences in toxicity among chemicals, as well as differences in environmental fate and in
    the size and  characteristics of populations  potentially  exposed influence the relative
    contribution each emission makes to each indicator. Transfers to ofisite locations such as
    sewage treatment plants (POTWs) require an additional estimate of the impact of treatment
    technology on the emissions.

          In order to incorporate all of these factors into comparable indicator elements, each
    element's value is based on the release data, adjusted to reflect the chemical's toxicity
    relative to other chemicals, the potential exposure caused by the emission, and the size of
    the potential exposed population. There are different equations for the human health and
    the ecological indicators, because each has different types of data available and different
    requirements for comparing the effect of releases of TRI chemicals. Both human and
    ecological indicator elements incorporate estimates of the uncertainties associated with
    component weights.  By using toxicity, exposure potential, and population size adjustments
    to the emission, the changes in the indicators over time should be more closely related to
   changes in risk than changes in emission quantities alone.  It must be reiterated that while
   the resulting indicators are intended to relate to risk by considering toxicity, exposure and
   population factors, the indicators do not provide actual risk estimates.

         The toxicity and exposure factors that are used to adjust the releases are referred to
   as weights. Briefly, the weights used to construct the TRI Environmental Indicators are
   derived by classifying a release in terms of ranges of toxicity, exposure, and  population
   exposed, and assigning a weight value  to each  range. The weight assigned to  each range
   increases as toxicity or exposure increase. The methodology for deriving weights is discussed
   in more detail below.

         Several offices within the EPA and organizations outside the Agency have developed
   systems for scoring or weighting chemicals based on potential toxicity and exposure.  The
   usual  purpose  of such exercises is to prioritize chemicals for further study  or for closer
   regulatory scrutiny. A review of chemical scoring and ranking procedures used by offices
   within the Agency and by organizations outside the Agency is found in Appendix A


                                           18


ra> A ITT PFPOPT . no WIT OTE OR OIIOTE

-------
       Previous scoring systems have used a variety of methods to weight chemicals.  The
 actual numerical weights applied to chemicals can 'be qualitative, ordinal, weighted or
 calculated, or some combination of these approaches. The relative severity of the effects
 posed by chemicals can also be included, as can considerations of the quality of the toxicity
 data and the exposure estimates. Based on our review of these scoring systems, several
 options for a chemical evaluation methodology emerged.  Alternative methods, and their
 advantages and disadvantages, were considered by the TRI Indicator Work Group and are
 summarized in Appendix B. The following section presents a proposed methodology based
 on the research described in Appendices A and B and based on Work Group deliberations.
 While the method described below contains elements of the options described in Appendix
 B, the draft methodology combines these elements  in a manner that is not presented
 explicitly in the appendix.

 General Format of the Weighting Scheme

       Each TRI chemical will fall into one range of values for parameters of interest and
 will receive the corresponding weight based upon its characteristics.  The methodology
 follows this categorization approach for both toxicity weighting and exposure weighting. A
 chemical may cause toxic effects to more than one health endpoint; thus, different weights
 could be assigned, depending on the endpoint considered. For this method, a chemical's
 final toxicity weight will be the highest weight it receives among all endpoints considered
 (Le., based on its most sensitive endpoint).

       Using categorical  weights for toxicity and exposure has several advantages when
 compared to calrn^at^tiP  specific, mrignft numerical weights for fn^miqyi releases.  First,
 unique weights would imply that we know the toxicity and exposure potential of the release
 with enough precision to  distinguish among relatively «**M»IJ differences in these values. In
 fact, there are  significant uncertainties associated with both the toxicity data  and the
 methods used to evaluate exposure potential Weighting a release based on the broad
 categories of toxicity and exposure potential into which it falls avoids the impression of
precision where such precision does not exist Second,  chemicals are likely to remain in the
broad toxicity category to which they are  originally a«igng^t unless significant new and
different toxicity data become available. Thus, the weights applied to these chemicals are
not likely to be revised frequently, lending stability to the  indicators over
      The following sections describe the methods used for toxicity and exposure weighting
in both the  human health and ecological TRI indicator calculations.  The penultimate
section describes rules for using the size of the exposed population in the TRI human health
indicator calculation.  The final section  proposes a method for integrating the exposure,
toxicity, and, where appropriate, population values in the TRI indicators calculations.
                                        19

-------
Tmricity Weights - Human

       For both carcinogenic and noncarcinogenic chronic effects, the proposed methodology
for developing human health toxitity weights is based on scoring systems that include both
qualitative and quantitative elements.  There is uncertainty inherent in determining the
potency of chemicals in causing human health effects, thus any quantitative potency data
must be considered in the context of a qualitative classification of the uncertainty associated
with that data. Therefore, the toxicity of each chemical is classified both quantitatively using
potency data and qualitatively using weight-of-evidence (WOE).  Both kinds of data are
considered when deriving the score, and so both kinds of data must be generated for the
TRI chemicals.

       The Section 313 criteria list several human toxicity parameters that EPA must
consider when evaluating a chemical for addition to TRI, including carcinogenicity, chronic
toxicity, acute toxicity, reproductive toxicity, heritable gene and chromosomal mutations,
developmental toxicity, and neurotoxicity. These parameters are defined in Table 8.  A
release could be weighted based upon the number of these effects that it causes, the relative
severity of the effects it causes, and/or the potency of the ghemkn1,  Some chemicals have
toxicity data for only one effect, while others will have evidence of effects for several ''of
these toxicity categories. The following describes how available data on the toxicity of TRI
chemicals will be used to weight releases.

       Quantitative Data Used in Human ToxJc
       Quantitative data on the relative potencies of chemicals are needed for .toxicity
weighting. For cancer risk assessment, EPA has developed standard methods for predicting
the incremental lifetime risk of cancer per  dose of a chemical.  EPA generally uses a
linearized multistage model of carcinogenesis to quantitatively model the dose»response
function of a carcinogen. The upper bound of the linear term of this model is called the
Oj". This  slope factor is a measure of cancer potency1.

       For noncarcinogenic risks, data on dose-response are more limited; generally, the
assessor evaluates dose compared to a Reference Dose.  A Reference Dose is defined as
"an estimate (with uncertainty spanning perhaps an order of magnitude) of a dairy exposure
to the human population (including sensitive subgroups) that is likely to be without an
appreciable risk of deleterious effects during a lifetime"  (EPA, 1987c).  By definition,
exposures below this value are unlikely to produce an adverse effect; above this value, an
exposed individual may be at risk for the effect, but the probability of the effect is not
    1 Although the level of conservatism inherent in these potency factors varies by chemical,
q,*s nonetheless are the best readily available values that allow us to compare the relative
potency of chemicals.

                                        20

-------
                                               TABLE 8. Toxlclty Endpoints
3
i
Endpolnt


Hnitahfa fhnelie and
Chromosomal Mutation


Developmental Toxicily


Reproductive Toxicily
Acute Toxicily
Chronic Toxicily
Neurotoxicity
Definition

I oia coxictijr concerns me aoiiiiy 01 a chemical 10 produce cancer in animals or
humans.
^fuMiticate Vuffitch afflinrft Ihia encliminl ran ciuim til Iftintl Ihnm Brnarata* iw^ta*it nf
failure to transmit genetic information: gain or loss of whole chromosomes

addition or deletion of a small number of base pairs (mutagenesis).
Any detrimental effect produced by exposures to developing organisms during
structural abnormalities, altered growth, and functional deficits (reduced

This eodpoint concerns the development of normal reproductive capacity.
Chemicals can effect gonadal function, the estrous cycle, mating behavior.
conception, parturition, lactation, and weaning.
Acute loxidty indicates the potential for a short-term exposure (typically noun
or days) by inhalation, oral, or dermal routes to cause acute health effect or
death.
Chronic toxicity indicate! the potential for any advene effects other than cancer
observed in humans or animals resulting from long-term exposure (typically
months or yean) to e chemical.
This eodpoint concerns the eentnl and/or peripheral nervous system. Changes
to the system may be morphological (biochemical changes in the system or
neurological diseases) or functional (behavioral, electrophysiological. or
neurochemical effects).

-------
known, nor is the severity of the effect known.  For our purposes, we will assume that
noncancer risk varies as the ratio of the estimated dose to the Reference Dose.

       We have compiled human health effects data on the TRI chemicals from a number
of EPA sources.  Appendix  C contains tables  of available toxicity data for the TRI
chemicals. The primary source of these toxicity data was the Integrated Risk Information
System (IRIS). This computerized data source includes information on EPA evaluations of
chemical toxicity for both carcinogens and noncarcinogens. IRIS provides both background
information on the studies used to develop the toxicity evaluations and the numerical toxicity
values used by EPA to characterize risks from these chemicals. These values include upper-
bound cancer potency estimates (q,*) and Reference Doses (RfDs) for noncarcinogens and
some carcinogens. Data contained in IRIS have been peer-reviewed and represent accepted
Agency policy. It should  be noted that this table contains health effects data  for certain
classes of metal compounds. These data represent the health effects data for the parent
element, or, where appropriate, the health data of the most potent compound included in
that category.  To be conservative, the releases associated with these compound categories
will be weighted based on these health effects data,

       Another source of  toxicity data is the Health Effects Assgssmgnt Summary Tables.
These tables are constructed for use in both the Supcrfund program and in the RCRA
Program but do not represent Agency consensus. However, these tables are publicly
available  in the Superfund  docket.   They *!«** include  potency  estimates,  WOE
categorizations for carcinogens, and Reference Doses for noncarcinogens.

       The Superfund program also develops reportable quantities that quantify the relative
toxicity of chemicals. The Reportable Quantity (RQ) of a chemical is the minimum quantity
of a release that requires  fr"*"*Hiat* notification to the National Response Center by any
person operating a vessel or facility.   Separate reportable quantities are developed for
several toxicity measures,  including carcinogenicity, acute human toxicity,  chronic human
toxicity, and aquatic toxicity. RQs are also developed based on ignitabflity and reactivity.
The regulatory RQ is then the lowest among these RQ values. For cancer, the reportable
quantity value is assigned based on a combination of potency and WOE considerations. For
the purposes of deriving the RQ, potency is characterized by the chemical's ED,0 value for
cancer. The ED10 is the dose that increases a response 10 percent above the control group
(in this case, the response is cancer). Where specific potency data are not available, EPA
scientists use guidelines provided in the RQ development methodology  as well as best
professional judgment to evaluate potential carcinogenic potency. For noncarcinogens, the
RQ is based on an evaluation of the human-equivalent minimum effective dose (MED) and
the severity of the effect produced at that dose.  (The ™™™n« effective  dose is derived
from  the Lowest Observable Adverse Effect Level (LOAEL), with adjustments  for
nonchronic exposure and interspeties extrapolation).
                                       22

-------
       RQs, RfDs, and q,'s are all toxicity measures that have been developed for EPA risk
 evaluation purposes. One or more of these values are available for 247 TRI chemicals. The
 70 TRI chemicals for which there  are currently no formal EPA  toxicity evaluations are
 found in Table 4. For these chemicals, potential toxicity will be evaluated based on toxicity
 data available from other  data sources. These sources are listed  in Appendix D.  These
 sources, as well as quantitative structure activity relationship methods, may have to be used
 to supplement the formal available EPA toxicity values.  For certain  chemicals  of
 extraordinary interest, special resources may have to  be made available to perform an
 adequate toxicity evaluation.  Chemicals for which little toxicity if any data exist, and thus
 no evaluation of toxicity is possible, will be excluded from the indicator calculation.

       Qualitative Data Used in Human Toxicity Weighting

       For toxicity weighting, the proposed method uses both weight of evidence (WOE) and
 potency to assign numerical toxicity weights. Typically,  risk assessors use a variety of data
 to evaluate the potential toxicity of a chemical to humans, including epidemiological data,
 data from acute and chronic animal studies, and in vitro toxicity tests. Together, these data
 form a body of evidence regarding  the potential for toxic chemicals to cause a particular
 health effect in humans.' The risk assessor can qualitatively judge the strengths of this body
 of evidence  when determining the probability of the occurrence of the effect in humans.
 Based on this judgment, the chemical is assigned a WOE classification. Weight-of-evidence
 schemes can be designed to demonstrate that a chemical causes a specific health effect  in
 general, or specifically in humans. The categories for carcinogens are related to likelihood
 of effects in humans.

       Standard weight-of-evidence classification schemes are widely used in cancer risk
 assessment  The carcinogenic WOE system presented in this methodology relies primarily
 on categorical  definitions from  two  weighting/scoring systems: the EPA  Cancer Risk
 Assessment  Guidelines (EPA, 1986a, currently being revised) and the TSCA Chemical
 Scoring System (ODryan and Ross, 1988).  The EPA Cancer Risk Assessment Guidelines
 define  the following WOE categories:

Category     Weight of evidence
             Sufficient  evidence  from  epidemiological  studies to  support a  causal
             relationship between exposure to the agent and cancer.
Bl           T Jm*ifA evidence from epidemiological studies and sufficient animal data.

B2           Sufficient evidence from animal studies but inadequate or no evidence or no
             data from epidemiological studies.
                                        23
     t>rr»ni>T. no WOT rvrv OP OTYVTT.

-------
C           Limited evidence of cartinogenitity in animals and an absence of data or
             evidence in humans.

D           Inadequate human and animal evidence for cardnogenitity or no data.

E           No evidence for carcinogenicity in  at least two  adequate animal tests in
             different species or in both adequate epidemiological and animal studies,
             coupled with no evidence or data in epidemiological studies.

       The TSCA  Chemical  Scoring System also provides specific criteria for placing
chemicals in toririty categories based on WOE. This system can serve as a supplement to
the EPA  Risk Assessment Guidelines WOE categories.  The TSCA Chemical Scoring
System oncogenicity weight-of-evidence scoring system is similar to the  categories in the
EPA Cancer Risk Assessment Guidelines:

Category                 Weight of evidence

8-9                      Evidence of oncogenicity from epidemiological studies and/or
                         positive results in two or more mammalian species.

6-7                      Evidence of oncogenicity in either or both sexes of a single
                         mammalian species, with or without limited epidemiological
                         data.

4-5                      Suggestive  evidence   of  oncogenic  potential   from
                         epidemiological   studies,  mammalian   bioassays,   cell
                         transformation in vitro, or promoter/cocarcinogemc activity.

3                        Evidence of genotoric potential.

1-2                      'Limited evidence of lack of oncogenic potential.

0                        No evidence of oncogenic potential from well-conducted, well-
                         designed mammalian studies 1U tWO OT mOie  animal SpCClCS.
These categories could be further modified to include a category of no evidence, similar to
Group D, above.  Many TCI chemicals have already been evaluated using one or both of
these two schemes. Furthermore, there is ongoing work between OPPT and the Oak Ridge
National Laboratory (ORNL) to score additional chemicals using this system. Therefore,
the WOE evaluations using these two schemes are currently available for many TRI
chemicals, and more will be available in the near future.

      For noncarcinogens, WOE is routinely considered by EPA  risk assessors when
developing Reference Doses (RfDs).  Reference Doses are usually developed based on a

                                        24

-------
 No Observable Adverse Effect Level (NOAEL) or a Lowest Observable Adverse Effect
 Level (LOAEL) combined with uncertainty factors and a modifying factor. The uncertainty
 factors  are  applied  to account  for  (a)  extrapolating from animal species to human
 populations, (b) extrapolating from less than chronic NOAELs to chronic NOAELs, and (c)
 extrapolating from studies  on particular human populations  to  the  general human
 population, including sensitive subpopulations.  In addition, a modifying factor can be
 applied to reflect EPA's best professional judgment on the  quality of the entire toxitity
 database for the chemical Since EPA Reference Doses already include both uncertainty
 factors and a modifying factor based on deficiencies in the database, they require no further
 consideration of uncertainty in this methodology.

      Unfortunately, EPA Reference Doses have not been developed for all TRI chemicals.
 When necessary, this methodology will require the evaluation of literature data to assign a
 toxirity  weight  to a chemical  In these circumstances, the following weight-of-evidence
 guidelines from the  TSCA  Chemical Scoring System can be used for  the qualitative
 evaluation of the literature data:
For genotoxicitv:

Category

9
8


5-7


2-4


1

0
Weiht of evidence
Evidence «f mammalia
                                              interaction
with mammalian  germ  cell DNA, or  cpidcmiological data
suggesting genotoxicity in humans.

Evidence of genotoxicity in n«ntnamtnaiia« germ cell assays or
evidence of mammalian dominant lethality.

Evidence of genotoxicity in more than one test system, other
than above.

Limited evidence of genotoxicity, including mixed positive and
negative results.

Limited evidence of nongenotoxicity.

Negative test results indicating lack of known genotoxicity.
                                        25
               . nr» VOT rrnr OR OTTOTE

-------
For developmental effects:

Category                 Weight of evidence

8-9                      Evidence of adverse developmental effects in humans or in at
                         least two other mammalian species

6-7                      Evidence of adverse developmental effects in one mammalian
                         species.

5                        Developmental  effects  at  doses accompanied by maternal
                         toricity or otherwise equivocal test results.

4                        Adverse developmental effects in nonmammalian species or in
                         vitro test systems.

3                        Indirect evidence suggesting possible adverse developmental
                         effects.

2                        Indirect evidence of lack of adverse developmental effects.

1                        Limited evidence of lack of developmental effects.
                                       •
0                        No evidence of developmental toricity potential

Again, categories for no evidence could be added to these scoring systems. EPA has also
developed guidelines for certain noncartinogenic effects.  These guidelines can be used in
conjunction with the TSCA Chemical Scoring System for qualitatively evaluating literature
toricity data on non-carcinogens. Guidelines for nmtagenitity risk assessment (EPA, 1986b)
describe general categories for WOE of nmtagenicity, to which we have assigned letters for
the purposes of this methodology:

For mutagenicity:

Category                 Weight of evidence

A                       Positive data derived from human germ cell mutagenicity
                         studies.

B                        Valid positive results from studies on heritable mutation events
                         jn mammalian perm ^fjly,

C                        Valid positive results from mammalian germ cell chromosome
                         aberration studies that do not include an intergeneration test.

                                       26
                               rvt»

-------
D                       Sufficient evidence for a chemical's interaction with mammalian
                         germ cells, together with valid positive mutagenitity test results
                         from two assay systems.

E                       Suggestive  evidence  for  a  chemical's  interaction  with
                         mammalian germ cells, together with valid positive mutagenitity
                         evidence from two assay systems.

F                       Positive mutagenitity test results of less strength than defined
                         in D,  combined with suggestive evidence for a chemical's
                         interaction with mammalian germ cell

G                       Valid negative test results for all endpoints of concern.

H                       Inadequate evidence bearing on either mutagenicity or chemical
                         interactions with mammalian germ cells.
The Agency's "Proposed Amendments to the Guidelines for the Health Assessment 'of
Suspect Developmental Toxicants" (EPA, 1989) delineates its categories with roughly the
same criteria as that of the TSCA Chemical Scoring System.

      To implement this method, similar weighting systems will need to be developed for
neurotoxitity,  reproductive toxitity and  other chronic toxitity endpoints.  The TSCA
Chemical Scoring  System defines scoring  criteria for subchronic/chronic toxitity as a
function of both a "severity score" and a "dose score." These criteria are:

Severity score            Severity of effects

3                        Life-threatening or severe effects
2                        Moderately serious effects
1                        Mild effects
0                        No observed effects

Dose score               Effects                   Guideline}}

3                        At low doses              50 mg/kg-day
These criteria can be adopted and/or modified for use in this methodology.
                                        27
                                OP OTTOTF

-------
       General Format for Combining Weight of Evidence and Potency

       This methodology uses matrices to evaluate a chemical based on WOE and potency
simultaneously. Rows and columns form matrix cells to which a toxicity weight is assigned.
The rows of the matrix are defined by the weight-of-evidence categorization, while the
columns of the matrix are defined by ranges of the measure of cancer potency (such as q*)
or the measure of noncarcinogenic threshold doses (such as NOAELs). More than one kind
of quantitative measure can be used to weight chemicals. By taking advantage of a range
of data sources available to weight chemicals, more TRI chemicals can be weighted and
included in the indicator. For example, for the cancer potency, one chemical may have a q/
value, while  another chemical may have only an ED10 value. The toxicity weighting matrix
for cancer is constructed so that either measure can be used to assign  a weight  If both
measures are available, the value that results in a higher weight will be used. The heading
of a matrix  column reflects the range  of values that fall into that column.  Ranges of
different toxicity measures that appear in the same  column  heading  reflect a roughly
comparable magnitude of toxicity. Similarly, WOE descriptions appearing in the same row
label represent roughly the same category of WOE.

       The exception to this weighting format is chemicals for which RfDs are available. As
discussed  above, WOE is  considered  in the  development  of  RfDs and is  already
incorporated in the numerical value.  Therefore, the matrix approach is  unnecessary. For
these chemicals, weights will be applied based on ranges of RfD values  alone.

       Weights Applied tfl fte Categories

       Either ordinal or proportional weights could be assigned to the matrix cells.  Ordinal
weights delineate the relative toxicity  rank  among releases and  are  useful for setting
priorities. They do not, however, provide information on the tMgmtnHg of the toxicity of
chemicals relative to one another. For example, an ordinal rank of 3 for chemical A and
1 for chemical B does not *»*•« chemical A is three *""*» worse *IMMI chemical B.  Since
ordinal weights do not reflect proportional differences in toxicity, the ability of the indicator
to reflect changes in health ?"d environmental impacts could be limited if ordinal weights
are used. In fact, if ordinal weights are used, it is possible that the indicator could decrease
over a period when actual risk increases.  An example of this possibility is illustrated in
Figure 2.

       Unlike ordinal systems, proportional scoring systems use numerical scores that reflect
the magnitude of difference between the impacts associated with chemical releases. Figure
3 shows how the indicator vahie developed in Figure 2 would change if proportional rather
than ordinal weights are assigned to the categories. Because of these considerations, the
matrices used hi this methodology assign proportional weights to matrix cells.  Weights
increase by an order of ipag™*"*1* for each order of nMgnfrydy  increase in toxicity and for
each increase in WOE category.
                                        28

-------
                                       Figure 2
Assume that the following scoring system is used to calculate the TRI indicator.  The indicator
traces the releases of carcinogens to air:
qt* Value
SO or greater
5
-------
The corresponding scores would be:
Year
1
1
2
2
Plant
1
2
1
2
Chemical
vinyl
chloride
benzene
vinyl
chloride
benzene
Toxicity
Score
4
2
4
2
Population
Score
100,000
1,000,000
100,000
1,000,000
Exposure Score

2
2
3
1
Overall
Score
8
40
12
20
The overall TRI indicator for year one is 48,  while for year two it is 32.  Thus, from the
indicator, it would appear as if health risks have decreased.  However, the acutal number of
expected cancer cases has increased dramatically, from roughly 1,600 to over 18,500.
                                         30

-------
                                       Figure 3
 Assume that the following scoring system is used to calculate the TRI indicator.  The indicator
 traces the releases of carcinogens to air:
q,* Value
SO or greater
5
-------
The corresponding scores would be:
Year
1
1
2
2
Plant
1
2
1
2
Chemical
vinyl
chloride
hffcfiMift^

vinyl
chloride
benzene
Toxicity
Score
10,000
100
10,000
100
Population
Score
100,000
1,000,000
100,000
1,000,000
Exposure Score
100
100
1,000
10
Overall
Score
100
10
1,000
1
Using proportional weighting, the overall TRI indicator for year one is 110, while for year two
it is 1,001. Thus the increase in risk protrayed by the indicator successfully reflects the increase
in the estimated number of cancer cases.
                                            32
                                  no

-------
        The Human Health Toxicity Matrices

        The preceding discussion presented the general framework for weighting the toxicity
  of TRI releases.  This section describes and explains the matrices developed from this
  framework. Two separate toxicity weighting matrices for carcinogens and noncartinogens
  are discussed.

        Carcinogens.  The toxicity weighting matrix for carcinogens is found in Figure 4. The
  rows of the matrix qualitatively classify carcinogens into two general categories: known/
  probable  and possible.  Weight-of-evidence categories A, 61 and 62 of the EPA Cancer
  Risk Assessment Guidelines and categories 6-9 of the TSCA Chemical Scoring System
  cancer WOE scheme are placed in the "known/probable" category. Class C carcinogens and
  TSCA Chemical Scoring categories 3-5 are placed in the "possible" category.

        The columns of the matrix describe quantitative measures of toxicity. Two alternative
  measures  are presented: the  EPA q,*  and the ED10.  Furthermore, the development
  methodology for cancer RQs (EPA, 1988a) provides criteria  for assigning a chemical to a
  potency group in the absence of an EDIO; these criteria can be used for approximating the
  range of the ED,0 for purposes of chemical weighting in the current methodology.  The
  particular  ranges of q/ values selected to represent each category of cancer potency were
  chosen to correspond to the ranges presented in EPA's Hazard Ranking System (55 Federal
  Register 51532).  (Corresponding ranges for comparable ED,0 values  will need to be
  developed.) The Hazard Ranking System (HRS) is a multipathway scoring system "used to
  assess the threat associated with actual or potential releases of hazardous substances at sites"
  (Federal Register, op at). The HRS score determines whether a site wfll be included on
  the National Priorities List (NFL).   Part of the HRS scoring system rates the inherent
  toxicity of chemicals based on measures of cancer potency,  RfDs, and/or acute toxicity.
  Ranges of toxicity values that differ by an order of magnitude are assigned scores that differ
  by an order of magnitude. The actual numerical weights assigned to the matrix cells in
  Figure 4 correspond to the scores assigned in the HRS to these ranges.   In certain cases,
  ranges presented in our matrix extend beyond those presented in the HRS.  However, the
  basic logic of «««g™'"E toe weights to these ranges remains the same: ranges that differ by
  an order of magnitude are assigned weights that differ by an order of magnitude. Figure
  5 shows the distribution of q/ values in these ranges for the TRI chemicals that have these
  values.

        The cells in the first row of the  matrix (that is, the  row that corresponds to the
  "known/probable" WOE category) were assigned the weights based on the HRS values.
  Weights in the lower row (Ltn the lower WOE category) were assigned by dividing the
  weights in the row above by a factor of 10.
                                         33
DRAFT REPORT - DO NOT CITE OR QUOTE

-------
S3

2
HI

n
e=a
H
PI

-------
       Figure 5
       Distribution of Toxicity Values
8
2:
O
H
s
O
O
3
                     Value
                                         RfDs
                                                                        Vilue
                                      M
                                        Nunber
                                                                                           Number
                      Value
                                                                        Value
                                         Number
                                                                                         It       M
                                                                                           Number
                                                                                                                  5«
                                                            35

-------
       Noncarcinogens.  For noncarcinogens that have established RfDs,  the following
 toxicity weights will be used:

 RfD Range (mg/ke-davl

 RfD < 0.00005                       100,000
 0.00005 < RfD< 0.0005               10,000
 0.0005 < RfD < 0.005                 1,000
 0.005 < RfD < 0.05                   100
 0.05 < RfD < 0.5                     10
 0.5 < RfD                           1

      This weighting system is taken directly from the HRS, with the exception of the
 highest weighting category. The weight assigned to this category is logically consistent with
 the HRS scoring system: RfDs less than 0.00005 are assigned a weight that is an order of
 magnitude greater than RfDs between 0.00005 and 0.0005.  Figure 5 shows the distribution
 of RfD values in all of these ranges for those TRI chemicals that have RfDs.

       For noncarcinogens without RfDs, a toxicity weighting matrix is presented, as shown
 in Figure 6.  The  rows of this matrix also qualitatively classify WOE into two  general
 categories: known/probable and possible.  Categories 5-9 of the TSCA Chemical Scoring
 System WOE schemes for noncarcinogens are placed in the "known/probable" category, and
 categories 2-4 are  placed in the "possible" category. For mutagens, EPA  mutagen risk
 assessment guideline categories A-E are placed in the "known/probable" category and F in
 the "possible" category.
      The gfthinmc of this matrix are labeled with the numerical ranges of values that
define each category of noncancer toxicity.   Measures that can be used to quantitatively
weight toxicity include  the human-adjusted NOAEL (the No Observable Adverse Effect
Level), human-adjusted Lowest Observable Adverse Effect Level (LOAEL), and the human-
adjusted mjnitmmi effective dose (MED). The ranges for the NOAEL values are defined
to roughly correspond to the ranges of RfDs presented above. Corresponding ranges for
LOAEL and MED values still must be developed.

      The cells in the first row of the matrix (that is, the  row that corresponds to the
"known/probable" WOE category) were assigned the same weights as those assigned to the
RfD ranges. Weights in the lower row (Le., the lower WOE category) were assigned by
dividing the weights in the row above by a factor of 10.

      Selecting tfrf Fjjn?j Human Health Toxicity Weight for a fhemigal

      Chemicals can cause several types of toxic effects. Tne TRI Human Health Chronic
Indicator method will weight a chemical based on the endpoint associated with the lowest
dose at which an effect occurs. Under this regime, the same weights are assigned to similar

                                       36

-------
o

-------
    cells in each category of toxicity so that chemical toxicity scores are comparable across
    different types of toxic effects. For example, a highly potent genotoxin with strong WOE
    would get the same score as a highly potent carcinogen with strong WOE.2

          The approach of weighting based on the endpoint with the lowest dose does not
    consider differences in the  severity of the effects posed by the chemicals.  For example,
    cancer is weighted in the same manner that genotoxicity is weighted. Also, chemicals with
    a broad range of effects are weighted the same as a chemical with only one effect The TRI
    Indicator Work Group considered the option of applying an additional factor to the toxicity
    weight based on the severity of the effect Applying such weights across categories of toxic
    endpoints would require a subjective evaluation of the relative severity of the health effects.
    The Work Group also considered the option of applying an additional weight based on the
    number of endpoints for which the chemical demonstrates effects.  However, a chemical may
    appear to demonstrate just one effect only because there are no data on other effects; thus,
    applying a weight based on  the number of endpoints may undervalue some poorly studied
    but still risky chemicals. For these reasons, the Work Group rejected these options; the
    methodology will weight chemicals based on the most severe endpoint without applying
    additional weights for severity or number of effects caused.

    Toxicirv Weights — Ecological

          For ecological effects, the indicator will focus on aquatic life impacts. Very little data
    are available for most chemicals on effects  to terrestrial or avian species, and the human
    health indicator will provide some predictor of these.

          Aquatic toxicity weighting differs from human toxicity weighting in two important
    respects.  First, WOE is not considered a factor in the weighting scheme, since direct
    evidence, of chemical toxicity is available from tests on aquatic species. Second, the aquatic
    toxicity weighting scheme simultaneously considers toxicity and bioaccumulation potential.
   Both of these measures are considered  important when evaluating impacts  on aquatic
   ecosystems.

          Data Used in Aquatic Toxicitv Weighting

          Common numerical  aquatic toxicity  data  include the Acute or Chronic Ambient
   Water Quality Criteria (AWQC), developed by the Office of Water, which may serve as the
   basis for water quality standards, as well as values from the literature, such as the lethal
   concentration, 50 percent (LCjo) - the chemical concentration in water at which 50 percent
      'The toxicity weighting may be pathway-specific for chemicals that demonstrate different
   effects by different pathways.   For example, some chemicals are carcinogens by  the
   inhalation pathway, but not by ingestion.  Thus, the toxicity weighting may be different for
   different release pathways.

                                          38
TTO AFT PFPOPT . DO NOT CITE OR OUOTE

-------
  of test organisms die • or life-cycle or chronic No Observable Adverse  Effect Levels
  (NOAELs). Aquatic RQ values are also available -for some TRI chemicals; aquatic RQs
  are determined based on the aquatic LC^ of the chemical.  Appendix C lists the AWQC
  and aquatic RQs that have been developed for TRI chemicals. Additional aquatic toxicity
  data will be obtained from the Aquatic Toxicity Retrieval System (AQUIRE), an aquatic
  toxicity database maintained by EPA. These data will be reviewed by OPFT before use in
  the indicator.

        The preferred measures of bioaccumulation potential are the bioconcentration factor
  (BCF) or bioaccumulation factor (BAF). These values are derived from laboratory tests
  that compare the  contaminant  concentration in the  environmental  medium to the
  concentration in the tissues of a test organism (usually fish). Several researchers have found
  that for organic contaminants, the BCF or BAF can be approximated as  a function of the
  log of the  octanol water partition coefficient (log K^).  The K*, is a physicochemical
  property that describes the partitioning of organic chemicals between an organic solvent
  (octanol)  and  water.   Finally,  when neither of  these measures are available, the
  bioaccumulation potential can also be approximated by the water solubility of the chemical.
  Generally, the less soluble a chemical, the greater its potential for bioaccumulation. Values
  for all of these measures of bioaccumulation potential are available from a variety of
  sources, including the AQUIRE database, as well as a number of EPA Office of Water
  references, the FFn chemical properties data base and standard chemical reference books.

        The Aquatic  Toxicitv Weighting Matrix

        The aquatic toxicity weight assigned to a chemical is a function of both its aquatic
  toxicity values and bioaccumulation potential values. Separate weights are assigned based
  on each of these measures; the chemical's final toxicity weight is the product of these
  individual  weights.    The  individual weights assigned based on  the  measures  of
  bioaccumulation potential are the following:
Water Solubility
(rag/1)
> 1,500
500-1500
25-500
. .
.
<25
LogKow
<0.8
0.8-2
2-32
32-45
4.5-5.5
5.5-6.0
BCFQ/kg)
<1
1-10
10-100
100-1,000
1,000-10,000
> 10,000
Weight
0.5
5
50
500
5,000
50,000
                                         39
DRAFT REPORT - DO NOT CITE OR QUOTE

-------
Individual weights based on aquatic toxicity measures are the following:
Life Cycle or
Chronic
NOAEL
(Mg/1)
MOO
10-100
MO
0.1-1
<0.1
LC» G,g/l)
> 1,000
100-1,000
10-100
MO
<1
Acute AWQC or
AALAC Oig/1)
> 100,000
10,000-100,000
1000-10,000
100-1,000
<100
Chronic
AWQC or
AALAC
(Mg/D
> 1,000
100-1,000
10-100
MO
<1
Weight
1
10
100
1,000
10,000
As with the human health toxicity weighting, the quantitative measures used to represent
aquatic toxicity, the value ranges used to define the categories of toxicity, and the numerical
weights assigned to each category were for the most part taken from the Hazard Ranking
System.  Hie only exception is the ranges for life cycle or chronic NOAELs, which were
taken from the TSCA Chemical Scoring System.

       Figure 7 presents the combined toxicity weighting system for aquatic toxicity. The
rows of the matrix are defined by the bioaccumulation potential categories anH the columns
of the matrix are defined by the aquatic toxicity categories. The cells of the matrix are the
product of the chemical's bioaccumulation potential and aquatic toxicity weights.

Exposure Weights - Human

       As with toxicity weighting, both qualitative and quantitative elements are considered
when weighting  exposure potential  Three steps are involved in deriving the human
exposure weight The first step is to categorize some measure of exposure  potential into
numerical ranges. The second step is to categorize the levels of uncertainty associated with
the measures of exposure potential. The final step uses a matrix, with numerical exposure
potential ranges arrayed along one axis and uncertainty categories arrayed along the other,
to assign increasing weights to higher-certainty/higher exposure potential releases.

       Quantitative Data Used in Exposure Potential Weighting

       For the first step of this process, quantitative measures of exposure potential must
be estimated.  To do so, several existing scoring systems take the approach of ordinally
ranking the volume of each release by the some physical measure of the chemical's  ability
to move through the  environmental medium into which it is released. However, because
the exposure potential rankings would have different physical "^Epfrg* for  different
                                        40
  ATT T>T>nru>T . r»O WVT PITT Ol? OT'OTE

-------
                                                                                               Ufe Ode or Chi oak NOAEL

                                                                                               Acute AWQC or AALAC
I
HI
n
t»«s
H
O

-------
   pathways, comparisons among releases to different media would be difficult, and weighted
   releases from different pathways could not be added to obtain a single indicator value.

         In this methodology, comparisons across media can be made because a common
   quantitative exposure measure for each medium is derived: an estimate of "surrogate dose" -
   - a measure related to the amount of chemical contacted by an individual per kg body
   weight per day.  Although limited facility-specific data and the use of generic models
   (described below) prevent the calculation of an actual dose, the surrogate dose  measure
   developed from the available data and from generic modeling is designed to be, in concept,
   comparable for all media.

         To  estimate the magnitude  of exposure potential from TRI releases, a separate
   exposure evaluation is conducted for each release pathway.  The ideal derivation of an
   exposure weight would involve a site-specific exposure assessment for each release medium
   and for each exposure pathway.  However, such an effort is well beyond the scope of this
   project and well  beyond the intended use of the  TRI data.  These  data are frequently
   estimates of emissions, not precise measured values.  Notably, they are not estimates of
   environmental concentrations that result from the emissions from the plant Furthermore,
   extensive site-specific information relevant to exposure modeling is not pan of a TRI data
   submission. For example, the TRI forms do not require submission of data on groundwater
   flow,  soil conditions, and other factors that affect  groundwater contamination from land
   releases. It is not the intent of this project to gather additional data or measurements that
   would be needed to perform these  calculations. The need to accurately reflect exposure
   characteristics  in the indicator must be  balanced by  the need  for  a simple and
   understandable indicator that is easily communicated to the public and that is based on
   currently available data. Therefore, for this methodology, the exposure evaluations combine
   data on media-specific emission volumes, phyacochemical properties, and where available,
   site characteristics with site-specific or generic exposure models to determine an estimate
   of the ambient concentration of contaminant in the medium into which the chemical is
   released. (Again, the use of submitter-estimated TRI emission data and generic models with
   many default assumptions make this only a surrogate related to actual concentration). For
   the human health chronic indicator, the ambient media concentrations are then combined
   with standard human exposure assumptions to estimate the magnitude of the surrogate dose.

         It must be  emphasized that while this methodology uses the EPA  exposure
  assessment paradigm to evaluate exposure potential, the results should not be construed as
  an actual absolute numerical estimate of dose resulting from TRI releases. Instead, the
  purpose is to obtain an order of magnitude estimate of surrogate dose resulting from release
  of TRI chemicals relative to the surrogate dose resulting from other releases included  in ihe
  indicator, so that these releases can be weighted appropriately in the indicator.

         The exposure evaluation methods  used for each type of release are specific to that
  type of release and depend on the models and data available to evaluate that pathway. In
  some  cases, models will be combined with some site-specific data to estimate exposure; m


                                          42
DRAFT REPORT - DO NOT CITE OR QUOTE

-------
   other cases, generic worst-case models may be used in the absence of any site-specific data.
   Section V of this report presents an extensive discussion of the specific mechanisms for
   evaluating exposure for each type of release or transfer.

         Qualitative Data Used in Exposure Potential Weighting

         Consideration  of uncertainty in the  exposure evaluation is necessary for making
   comparisons across pathways, since the exposure evaluation methods for various pathways
   differ significantly in their possible level of refinement. For the purposes of exposure
   weighting, we have defined the following uncertainty categories for use in this methodology:

   Category                 Explanation

   A                        Combines modeling with some generic and some dependable
                            site-specific data to generate exposure estimates.

   B                        Combines modeling with some generic and some site-specific
                            data, but identification of appropriate site-specific data subject
                            to error and will often be filled in with generic assumptions.

   C                        Extrapolates generic exposure estimates from actual data from
                            other sites to exposure at particular sites (e.g^ groundwater
                            modeling).

   In general, more generic methods for exposure modeling require more assumptions and
   extrapolations. These assumptions and extrapolations tend to be conservative, so that more
   generic modeling tends to yield overestimates of exposure.  The categories defined above
   are designed so that  a lower category indicates more generic modeling that is likely to
   overestimate exposure when compared to the next highest category.

         The Human Exposure Potential Weighting Matrix

         As with toxicity weighting, a matrix has been developed to weight exposure potential
   that allows simultaneous consideration of the estimated level of exposure and the evaluation
   of the relative level of uncertainty associated with each estimate. The matrix for exposure
   weighting is presented in Figure 8.  The exposure value is expressed in mg/kg-day and is
   calculated on a pathway-specific basis, as described in Section V. The uncertainty categories
   are as defined above.  As with toxicity weighting, proportional weights are assigned so that
   exposures that differ by an order of magnitude are assigned weights that differ by an order
   of magnitude.

         As discussed above, the exposure uncertainty categories are designed so that a lower
   category indicates that the exposure estimate is probably an overestimate compared to the
   next highest category, therefore, for this methodology, the exposure potential score will be


                                          43
TWA FT PFTHTOT - DO NOT CITE OR QUOTE

-------
58
Q
H

n
l=-3
H
PI

O
a

-------
   reduced by a factor of 5 if assigned to category B, and by an order of magnitude if assigned
   to category C.

   Exposure Weights ~ Ecological

          The estimated ambient water  concentration value is  used directly to  evaluate
   potential exposures to aquatic life.  The method for  evaluating ambient surface water
   concentrations resulting from TRI  releases is  discussed in Section V.   Once  ambient
   concentrations have been determined, exposure weights are assigned based on the following
   ranges:

   Estimated water concentration fug/1)           Weight
   MO                                         10
   10-100                                       100
   100-1,000                                    1,000
   > 1000                                       10,000

         Aquatic exposure weights for categories of increasing estimated water concentration
   do not need to reflect exposure relative uncertainty, since all estimates are derived using the
   same methodology.  The weights simply increase by an order of magnitude for  each
   category.

   Population Size Weights

         The Work Group considered several options for including population in the indicator.
   One suggestion was to represent populations as ranges rather than using absolute numbers,
   especially for small populations.   Use of a range may be more appropriate given the
   uncertainty about the size of the exposed population for most exposure pathways. Another
   reason for this approach is to avoid undervaluing potentially high individual impacts on
   small rural populations. Using a range approach, yt««ii rural populations would be assured
   of a minimum weighting.  On the other hand, if reliable population data are availably an
   argument can be may for avoiding the introduction of additional uncertainty in the indicator.
   by using ranges for population values.

         In light of these considerations, this methodology proposes several rules for the use
   of population data in the exposure evaluation.  First, a minimum population value is
   assigned to all releases to avoid undervaluing rural populations. Second, both quantitative
   data and qualitative data (on the uncertainty of the population size estimate) are used when
   evaluating the size of the population potentially exposed to TRI releases.
                                          45
DRAFT REPORT - DO NOT CITE OR QUOTE

-------
       Quantitative Data Used in Population Weiehtine
       The determination of the size of the population exposed to TRI releases will vary
 substantially depending on the medium to which the chemical is released. The methods for
 estimating the size of the exposed population are discussed for each pathway in Section V.
       Methods for estimating exposed population sizes will vary in their accuracy. We may
 have good data on the number of persons surrounding a particular release site but know
 little about how many of these individuals actually come into contact with contaminated
 media. The uncertainty associated with the population estimate will differ by pathway. For
 example, the size of the population potentially exposed to contaminated groundwater will
 be known with significantly less certainty than the size of the population exposed to air
 emissions, because of the greater certainty associated with air modeling (we know who lives
 around the sites, and everyone breathes air) than with modeling of groundwater (location
 and  movement not known, number of persons drinking groundwater not known).

       To address this concern, this methodology will consider uncertainty in the evaluation
 of the size of exposed populations. Uncertainty categories are denned as follows:
A                        Population  siyf  is well*characterized, MM!  contact  with
                          contaminated media is believed to affect most or all members
                          of the exposed population.

B                        Population is characterized v"n£ crude data that is likely to
                          overestimate size of exposed population,  but contact with
                          contaminated media is believed to affect most or all members
                          of the exposed population.

C                       -Population is characterized using crude data that is likely to
                          over estimate size  of exposed population, and contact with
                          contaminated media occurs with an unknown fraction of those
                          potentially exposed.

A lower category indicates that the population estimate is probably an overestimate
compared to the next highest category; therefore, for this methodology, the estimated size
of the population will be reduced by a factor of 10 if assigned to category B, and by two
orders of magnitude if the population estimate is assigned to category C.

       All population sizes will also be rounded up to the nearest 1,000 persons.  By
rounding, we acknowledge that the methods used  to estimate the population sizes are
imperfect and do not justify the use of precise values.  Also, this rounding creates  a
minimum exposed population size, since populations of 0*999 persons will be counted as


                                        46
                 r»r» vr»T rvnr OP OT'OTF.

-------
   1000.   A minimum population size ensures the inclusion of rural  populations in the
   indicator.

         Because of the major difficulties in estimating sizes of the populations of ecological
   receptors, the TRI Ecological Indicator does not include a population weight. In effect, this
   approach assumes that all aquatic emissions occur to equally vulnerable locations.

   Integrating  Toxicity Data.,  Exposure Data, and Population Data to Obtain Facility*
   Chemical-Medium Indicator Elements
         The previous sections described how each element of the human health chronic
   indicator is determined.  The following equation combines  these components for each
   facility, each chemical, and each medium:

           Element^ = ToxieityWeight^ • ExposureWeight^ • AdjustcdPopulation^


   where
   i      =     subscript for chemical i,
  ;      s     subscript for facility j, and
   k     =     subscript for medium k.

   The weights am* the population size are multiplied in this setting because each component
   (toxidry, exposure, and population) contributes  in a multiplicative way to the overall
   magnitude of the  impact  The result of the multiplication of the  weights is  a facility-
   chemical-medium-specific "indicator element"  It must be reiterated that  this is not a
   physically meaningful measure of risk associated  with the facility, but is an approximate
   measure that is comparable to approximate measures for other facilities calculated using the
   same methods. In Section VI, these elements will be combined into a single TRI chronic
   human health indicator.  These elements can be used for diagnostic purposes when the
   indicator is calculated.

         Ecolorical Chronic Indicator

         The methods for determining aquatic tcoticity and exposure weights are described
   above. The following general equation combines  these components for each facility, each
   chemical, and  each medium:
                                          47
DRAFT REPORT - DO NOT CITE OR QUOTE

-------
                               = ToxicityWeigkty • ExposureWeight^,


   where
   /      =     subscript for chemical i,
   y      =     subscript for facility j, and
   k     =     subscript for medium k.

   As with the human health indicator, the weights are multiplied in this setting because each
   component (toxicity and exposure) contributes multiplicatively to the overall magnitude of
   the impact The result of the multiplication of the weights is a facility-chemical-medium-
   specific "indicator element."  Again, the elements should not be interpreted as actual
   measures of risk. In Section VI, these elements will be combined into a single TRI chronic
   ecological indicator.


   V.    MECHANICS OF ESTIMATING EXPOSURE

        The preceding section addressed how exposure and toxicity will be assigned weights
   based on the relative magnitude of each and the underlying uncertainty. The purpose of-this
   section is  to describe  how  the magnitude  of exposure is calculated for each pathway.
   Ideally, we would model each TRI release with the rigor of a full risk assessment, relying
   on site-specific data. This is impossible, however, because resources  and information are
   limited.  For a set of  indicators that are meant to generally track relative year to year
   changes in human am* environmental health impacts, it is I»ISQ unnecessary.  For our
   purposes, it is adequate to approximate the results of such a modeling exercise.

         TRI chemical releases are reported for seven different release and transfer pathways.
   On-site pathways include direct air (stack and fugitive), UmdfiHing, underground injection,
   and surface water releases.  Chemicals might also be  transferred to Publidy Owned
   Treatment Works (POTWs) or Treatment, Storage, and Disposal Faculties (TSDFs). The
   release and transfer pathways for which exposure potential must be evaluated are presented
   in Figure 9.

         To  incorporate  exposure in the TRI indicators, the TUX Indicator Work Group
   considered two fi»"fo»*w*ai approaches. First, releases could be weighted vsing  proxy
   measures   of  exposure, such as  population density  surrounding the facility,  and/or
   environmental mobility characteristics.  Alternatively, releases could be modeled, where
   possible, to derive ambient environmental concentrations  of contaminants at  varying
   distances from the release site, and then combined with the corresponding population data.

         When considering modeling versus a more simplified approach, the Work Group
   noted the  fact that some releases (such as air releases) may be more amenable to a
   modeling approach than other types of releases (such as ofEate transfers); thus, releases

                                          48
DRAFT REPORT - DO NOT CITE OR QUOTE

-------
        FIGURE 9
        Overall Approach for Modeling TRI Discharges
8
I
8
O
S
               DIRECT WATER
GEMS system
Calculate concentrations at drinking
intakes. Use population served as
exposed population; use a fraction of
this population as fish ingestion
population.
I
                     Effluent
                    POTW
                   Transfers
                                                              DIRECT AIR
                                                              Suck. Fugitive
                 Volitilitalion
                                 ISCLT
                                  (Indust. Source Comp. Long Term)
                                  Calculate concentrations at various
                                  ring distances described by TRIAIR.
                                  Use BO/ED for population exposed.
                                          I
                | Sludge Disposal
                 Incincf&t ion
                                                        i
                                                                Volatilization
                                                    DIRECT LAND
                                                     (Lindfilling)
                   Lantiniling
                                   Estimate leachate concentration.
                                   Apply generic DAP.
                                   Use population within 4 sq. km
                                   of source.
                                                                                                       Offsile
                                                                                                     Incineration
 Offsite
Tuisfers
                                                                                  or
    lie
Sill
nn
                                                                                       ing
                                                                 49

-------
    from certain media may be evaluated in a more refined way than releases to other media.
    Furthermore, TRI release data are generally estimates rather than precise quantifications
    of releases, and, since we lack site-specific data, other modeling inputs would by necessity
    be generic. It may not be useful to perform modeling if release data are estimated and if
    inputs  to the model are necessarily generic.  All of these points argue for using a more
    simple approach to evaluating exposure.

           However, even generic modeling has significant advantages.  First, while modeling
    may not allow precise estimates of exposure due to generic and estimated inputs, it does
    allow us to estimate the magnitude of exposure and to consider local conditions where these
    data are available. In short, uncertainty should not be introduced where alternatives exist.
    Furthermore, to compare and sum exposure from different media, each media contribution
    must be expressed in an equivalent form, i.e., estimated "surrogate dose."  In each pathway
    discussed below, surrogate dose can  be estimated via generic modeling of each facility
    release and then can be coupled with toxiciry to constitute a facility-chemical-media-specific
    increment to the  entire  indicator.  No other method allows  for this uniform element
    calculation.  Without this common denominator, we would be forced to evaluate  how a
    proxy measure of  groundwater exposure (based on solubility) can be compared to a proxy
    measure of air exposure (based on photolysis rate). The relative ease of modeling releases
    to different media remains a problem; however, it may be appropriate to have  better
    estimates of exposure for certain pathways if these pathways cause significant impacts and
    would  contribute  disproportionately to the indicators. For example, from  a population
    perspective, it may be important to better understand air releases than ofiEdte transfers since
    air  releases will probably contribute far  more to population  impacts than transfers to
    hazardous waste facilities.  In general, the Work Group preferred modeling where possible
    since it is the common Agency mechanism for incorporating emission data, local conditions,
    and population density into an exposure evaluation.

          The exposure evaluation scheme presented below does not lend itself to quick
      lculation by hand, though hand calculation is not unimaginable.  However, its structure
    offers unlimited combinations and views of the indicators' components.  On one level,
    overall computation of the indicators could not be more replicable or verifiable, since it will
    be performed completely within one computer program.  However, each facility-chemical-
    media indicator element could be disseminated in computer format for those wishing
    different views of its makeup.  Regions, states, or individuals could use these individual
    constituents to create their own subindicators.

          The following discussions of exposure frequently mention concentration and surrogate
    dose.  We do not mean to imply that we somehow supplanted the risk assessment process
    and can accurately calculate cases. We  speak of those  terms only in the abstract  The
    method  is a simple way to gauge relative risks from releases to different media in a
    congruent, defensible way. In some cases, the modeling will be purposely simple, given our
    lack of site-specific data.  The differences in the level of refinement of exposure modeling
    are addressed by \i&n£ the uncertainty weighting scheme dkfMwd in Section IV.

                                           SO
TM» A*-T VVDOVT . no VOT mr OP OT'OTE

-------
  Treatment of Emissions Range Reporting

        Emissions data are a fundamental element of the exposure evaluation process.  As
  discussed above, TRI facilities report emissions to seven pathways.  Emissions data can be
  presented as numerical point  estimates, or, if releases are below  1,000 pounds, as an
  estimated range of emissions. Where emissions are reported as a range, we could either use
  the midpoint of the range or the upper bound of the range  to represent the emissions of
  that chemical. To produce a conservative estimate of exposure potential, we will use the
  upper bound of the range as our estimate of emissions, since this value is the maximum that
  the facility could be emitting.

  Stack and Fugitive Air Releases

        Ideally, reported stack and fugitive air releases from the TRI database would be
  modeled using site-specific data (such as source area or stack height). Since TRI does not
  contain such facility-specific information, we must use default values to model TRI facilities
  with established EPA air dispersion models.

        For this methodology, we will use the Industrial Source  Complex Long Term (ISCLT)
  model developed by the Office of Air Quality Planning and  Standards (OAQPS).  ISCLT
  is a steady-state Gaussian plume model used to estimate long-term pollutant concentrations
  downwind of a source.  The concentration is a function of site-specific parameters (stack
  height, stack velocity)  and chemical specific decay rates.1  The general  form of the
  concentration equation from a point source at a distance r greater than 1 meter away is4:


                                             .QfSVD
  where
        C*    =     concentration at distance r (pg/m1),
        Q     «=     pollutant emission rate (g/s),
        f      =     frequency of occurrence of wind speed and direction,
     'Importantly, chemicals with extremely short half-lives in air will not be modelled using
  these procedures. Such chemicals will be assumed to degrade before significant exposure
  occurs.  Products of decay could also be modeled where data permit.

     4 This equation is from EPA (1992). The  equation is  for a specific wind speed,
  direction, and category ($fc). Each facility has several combinations of these that must be
  added to arrive at a total concentration at that point The equation for area sources is
  similar.
                                         51
DRAFT REPORT - DO NOT CITE OR QUOTE

-------
         6     =     sector width (radians),
         S     =     smoothing function used to smooth discontinuities at sector boundaries,
         u     =     mean wind speed (m/sec),
         
-------
0    Figure 10
g    Stack and Fugitive Air Releases
8






1 Estimated
[Concentration at
(Population Centers



Population
Weighted Air
Concentration



RELEASE
ofchcmlori *
•thdlit**
1
ISCLT
1

-|-

1

-j-

1
POPULATION
WEIGHTED
AVERAGE DOSE






BG/ED



Standard
Exposure
Assumptions

















                                         53

-------
                              Table 9
                        Air Modeling Parameters
Parameter
Stack height
Exit velocity
Stack diameter
Exit gas temperature
Area source size
Area source height
Decay rate
Body weight
Pollution emission rate
Freq. of wind speed and direction
Sector width
Wind speed
Smoothing function
Vertical term
Pop.-weighted average air cone.
Inhalation rale
Value
10m
0.01 m/s
1m
293° K
10m3
3m
varies by
pollutant
70kg
site-specific
site-specific
215°
site-specific
calculated
calculated
calculated
20m'/day
Source/Comment
EPA (1992)
EPA (1992)
EPA (1992)
EPA (1992)
EPA (1992)
EPA (1992)

EPA Exposure Factors
Handbook (EPA, 1990a.);
value is for adults; lifetime
age-weighted average (male
and female combined) is
about 62 kg
TRIS (Ibs/yr)
STAR
360° divided by 16 wind direct.
STAR (m/s)


mg/kg-day
EPA Exposure Factors
Handbook (EPA, 1990a.)
                               54
DRAFT REPORT - DO NOT CITE OR QUOTE

-------
   Federal Reporting Data  System (FRDS) is  accessed to determine the populations at
   drinking water intakes.6

         GEMS uses a simple first-order decay equation along with volume and water speed
   estimates to calculate concentrations at a distance at time /.  The general form is as
   follows7:
   where
               C,  - concentration at time t,
               Co  = initial concentration, and
                     = decay coefficient
   Using the REACH database, which contains information on the stream network of the
   United States, discharges can be modeled as they make their way through the surface water
   network.  Facilities can be matched to appropriate streams  using the NPDES (National
   Pollutant Discharge Elimination System) numbers provided in TRI.

        This methodology will consider two human health exposure pathways from surface
   water releases. First is the drinking water pathway.  As the  pollutant passes through the
   stream network, concentrations at public drinking water intakes can be noted and the
   population served can function as  the exposed population  at that concentration.  The
   population-weighted water concentration is combined with standard exposure parameters
   to yield the following surrogate dosage:


                                        C      •/
                                          *~r't    ~*
  where

         DOSE      »    surrogate dose of contaminant (mg/kg-day),
               t      =    population-weighted average water concentration (mg/1),
      6 This database has a limitation in that it generally captures only those public systems
  that serve populations greater than 2500. Locations for community systems serving smaller
  populations are sporadically available.


      'Chemicals with  extremely short half-lives in water will not be modelled using this
  procedure.  Such chemicals will be assumed to degrade before significant exposure occurs.

                                          55
DRAFT REPORT - DO NOT CITE OR QUOTE

-------
        IWMcr         =     drinking water ingestion rate (I/day), and
        BW         =     human body weight (kg).

  As  suggested by this equation,  this methodology will not account for any removal of
  contaminants by drinking water treatment plants, nor does it account for the formation of
  contaminants during the chlorination process. The method also does not currently account
  for  products of decay, although these could be included where data permit

        A second potential exposure pathway is from consumption of contaminated fish. For
  this pathway, fish concentration is estimated from water concentration:


                                 C/M " c**n ' BCF

  where
                     =     concentration in fish, (rag/kg),
                     =     average water concentration in stream (mg/1), and
        BCF         =     bioconcentration factor for chemical (I/kg).

  Next, the fish concentration value is combined with standard exposure assumptions regarding
  fish consumption rates to determine exposure from this pathway:

                                 DOSE'
                                             BW

  where
        DOSE       «     surrogate dose of contaminant (mg/kg-day),
                           fijfli tissue concentration (mg/kg),
                           fish ingestion rate (kg/day), and
        BW         -     human body weight (kg).

  We will use a fraction, yet -to be determined, of the population served by drinking water
  intakes as an estimate for the number of persons that engage in recreational fishing in an
  area.

        Figure 11 shows our recommended surface water approach, and Table 10 lists model
  parameters for surface water modeling.

  On-Slte Land Releases

        On-site  land releases include releases  to landfill^ surface impoundments,  land
  treatment units and underground injection.  This section describes methods to evaluate
  exposure from these releases. For simplicity, the following discussion will focus on landfill
                                         56
TW APT PFPOPT - DO NOT CITE OR QUOTE

-------
   disposal, but the same evaluation principles will apply to the other types of land releases,
   with the exception of underground injection.

          We are currently investigating methods to evaluate exposure from underground
   injection of TRI chemicals.  Under well-managed conditions, these facilities are designed
   to pose minimal risks to human health or the environment. However, certain conditions can
   lead  to the failure of these facilities and the release  of chemicals  to  human  and
   environmental exposure pathways. An exposure analysis for these releases would have to
   include an  evaluation of the likelihood of  the failure as well as an evaluation of the
   exposure impacts of such a failure.

          Two major pathways are  considered for on-site land releases:  chemicals may
   volatilize to air or leach to groundwater. Volatilization of chemicals from on-site landfills
   is reported  under the fugitive emission estimate for the facility and is thus handled as a
   direct air release.

          Groundwater contamination is also a concern for  land  releases.  However, the
   modeling of groundwater releases will depend on the  regulatory states of  the  unit.
   Chemicals could be deposited in an on-site RCRA-regulated hazardous waste unit, or in an
   on-site nonhazardous solid waste management unit  RCRA standards for hazardous waste
   units are, by regulation, designed to include technical controls to prevent release of
   contaminants into groundwater; if chemicals are placed in such regulated units,  it will be
   assumed that releases to groundwater are negligible. If chemicals are placed hi RCRA
   nonhazardous land disposal units, we will model the  release of chemicals to groundwater.

          The TRI forms provide some clues regarding the regulatory status of land-disposed
   chemicals, but provide no site-specific information that aids in the evaluation of groundwater
   transport, such as geohydrological data. Unfortunately, these data are extremely site-specific
   and are not amenable to characterization by state or region of the country.  In light of these
   limitations, we considered two possible approaches to evaluating groundwater contamination
   potential. First, we could simply  use a measure of a chemical's mobility in groundwater
   (such as solubility and k,, value) in conjunction with the size of nearby populations as a
   proxy for exposure potential. The major drawback to this approach  is that the  exposure
   measure would be inconsistent with the exposure endpoint modeled for direct air and direct
   water releases (Le., the meaning of the measures would not be comparable).

         To maintain a concentration/exposure measure consistent with  the approaches
   suggested for direct  air and  water  releases, we propose  an approach  that gives a
   concentration at the exposure point (the well) to be combined with exposure assumptions
   to  yield a  surrogate dose.   This approach  requires two steps:  estimating  leachate
   concentration (a measure of the amount of chemical that partitions from the waste to water;
   and estimating the dilution and attenuation of leachate from the disposal site to the well
   location. The approach to evaluating exposure from landfilling is summarized in Figure 12.
                                           57
DRAFT REPORT - DO NOT CITE OR QUOTE

-------
>     Figure 11
2     Direct Water Discharges
i
1
           ELEASE  I
           flffhtntkitiT   I
           athdIHgw    I
RGDS
  water
 Population at
drinlditf water
  intakes
                                        Pbpulation
                                      weighted water
                                          fhh
                                     Standard
                                     Exposure
                                    Assumptiom
                                     Standard
                                     Exposure
                                    Assumptiom
                                         DOSE
                                                                                             DOSE
                                                          58

-------
                                Table 10
                     Surface Water Modelling Parameters
Parameter
Decay rate
Dilution rate
Water volume and speed
Population-weighted average water
cone.
Drinking water ingestion rate
Body weight
Average chemical concentration in
stream
Bioconcentration factor
Fish tissue concentration
Fish ingestion rate
Value
varies by
pollutant
site-specific
site-specific
calculated
2 liters
70kg
calculated

varies by
pollutant
calculated
0.0065
Source/Comment

REACH (EPA, 1987b.)
REACH (EPA, 1987b.)
mg/kg-day
EPA Exposure Factors
Handbook (EPA, 1990a.)
EPA Exposure Factors
Handbook (EPA, 1990a.);
value is for adults; lifetime
age-weighted average (male
and female combined) is
about 62 kg
rag/1
lAg
mg/kg
kg/day; Exposure Factors
Handbook (EPA, 1990a.)
                                   59
DRAFT REPORT - DO NOT CITE OR QUOTE

-------
         Leachate concentrations can be estimated using a modified modeling approach with
   chemical-specific parameters.  The general form of this estimate is as follows:
  where
         C|    =     concentration in leachate (kg/1 or 1 x 10* rag/kg),
         C,    =     concentration in landfill solids (kg/m3 or 1000 mg/kg),
         Kd    =     soil/water partition coefficient (I/kg), and
         B«    •     bulk density of material in landfill (kg/m9).

  This equation assumes that the landfill material essentially contains close to 100% solids.
  This  assumption (and the equation) will  have to be  modified for  use  for surface
  impoundments.  It  must be  noted that the concentration in the  leachate, Q, must be
  compatible with the chemical-specific solubility so that the smaller of the two values is used.

         Q, the concentration in the landfill solids, can be estimated by dividing the total mass
  of contaminant disposed (mg/yr) by the total mass of waste disposed in the unit each year

                                 c _  Me(mg per yr)
                                  *   MJi*8 per year)
  where:
         M,    «     total mass loading of contaminant to landfill (mg per year), and
               •     total mass of waste disposed in landfill (kg per year).
  The value for M, is available in the TRI database; the value for M. will be taken from EPA
  (1988b).  This report mtnmanVe* the distribution (by number of facilities and by industry
  type) of the tons per year of waste disposed hi industrial g*ftnfrn**tfdous solid waste ia«Hfiik
  Data are also reported Cor surface impoundments, waste piles and land treatment facilities.
  These summaries are reproduced in Appendix E. It should be noted that using M» as the
  divisor in landfill concentration may underestimate the concentration of the TRI chemical,
  since the landfill may include some of the same chemicals from sources other than TRI
  facilities.

        A summary of the values used in the groundwater calculation and the sources of
  these values appear in Table 11.

        Once leachate concentrations are estimated, the next step is to determine the
  magnitude of dilution and attenuation of contaminants that occur as the contaminant travels
  from the source to the well The Office of Solid Waste performed  an analysis of dilution


                                         60
DRAFT REPORT - DO NOT CITE OR QUOTE

-------
    and attenuation of contaminants in groundwater during the development of the Toxicity
    Characteristic Leaching Procedure (TCLP) rulemaking (55 f6n Federal Register 11798).
    For that rule, OSW used Monte Carlo analysis to evaluate dilution and attenuation factors
    (DAFs) for 44 chemicals. In the Monte Carlo analysis, multiple iterations of a groundwater
    model were performed.  For each model run, model parameters values were drawn
    randomly from their distributions. (It should be noted that distance to the well was one of
    the parameters varied in the analysis: the distribution of distance between a source and a
    well was derived from a survey of Subtitle D facilities). The result of the analysis was a
    distribution of model results, where each model result was a DAF. OSW then selected the
    85 percentile DAF for use in its regulatory calculations. For most chemicals modeled, the
    85th percentile dilution and attenuation factor was approximately a factor of 100.  For this
    methodology, we will use the OSW 85th percentile dilution and attenuation factor of 100
    to estimate groundwater concentrations from land releases. It should be noted that OSWs
    DAFs are not intended to reflect the effect  of pumping in drinking water wells on the
    concentration of chemicals in groundwater, and thus calculation of TRI surrogate dosages
    are oversimplified.

          The final challenge in the groundwater puzzle is determining populations potentially
    exposed to the estimated groundwater concentration. The population of persons served by
    well water is available for each county from the National Well Water Association data files.
    From these data, we can derive a Veil water  drinker" population density for each county.
    We will then calculate the population of well water drinkers within 4 km2 of the landfill site
    as our exposed population.

    Releases To POTWs

          In 1988, 570  million pounds of TRI chemicals were discharged to the country's
    Publicly Owned Treatment Works (POTWs) compared with 360 million pounds discharged
    directly to surface waters.  Modeling exposure from TRI discharges to POTWs requires
    consideration of (1) overall removal efficiencies of POTWs and resulting effluent discharges
    from POTWs and (2) residuals management at POTWs.  A  summary of our proposed
    approach to modeling POTW emissions is found in Figure 13.

          Modeling the exposures from POTW effluent is inexact due to the lack of National
    Pollution Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) numbers  for the receiving  POTW.
    Without the  NPDES number, the location of the POTW facility can only be determined
    indirectly. Other OPFT efforts using TRI data have constructed approaches to locate
    POTWs.  They involve name or zip code matches with databases to arrive at a NPDES
    number for the POTW and thus determine effluent streams and exposed drinking water
   populations.  Ideally, a separate effort could be undertaken to match POTWs in TRI  with
   NPDES numbers.  Such a match would greatly enhance modeling POTWs. Absent such an
   effort, we will use the POTW zip code as its geographical locator.
                                         61
DRAFT REPORT - DO NOT CITE OR QUOTE

-------
Figure 12
Direct Land Releases
                  IELEASE
                  7\
          VoUtffired
        contaminant incl.
        in fngttjrc report
T ^arhtng into
	 . • .•
grvul
IUWBICT
                    RCRAD
                  Nonhazardous
                   Population
                  weighted water
                      I
                    Standard
                       t
                     DOSE
 RCRAC
jiazardous
Well ma
 site. Assume
  no risk.
                             62
 DRAFT REPORT - DO NOT (II!  ' >R QUO!

-------
                                Table 11
                      Groundwater Modelling Parameters
Parameter
Concentration in landfill waste
Concentration in leachate
Bulk density
Partition coefficient
Value
calculated
calculated
400 kg/mj
varies by
pollutant
Source/Comment
calculated from TRIS data
and from industry-specific
mass of waste disposal per
year (see Appendix E)
mg/1
calculated from data in EPA
(1988b)

                                  63
DRAFT REPORT - DO NOT CITE OR QUOTE

-------
  Figure 13
  POTW Transfers
            1
                TRANSFER
                                       POTW
                                       infh**1**
                     POTW
                     residual

                                     Assume
                                     no risk
                        or
iT OlSQUZSDflD


See Figure
Air Flow
                      Sludge

                                  POTW
                                  efDueot
                                  Surface
                                   Water
                                   I
                                                      See Figure
                                                     Water Flow
i^n^


Incineration

See Figure
Air Flow
On-Ste

Off-Site
   1
       See Figure Off-
       Site Transfers?
         landfill*
 Locate    \
v\s

via
-H  See Figure
     Off-Site
     Transfers
                                     64
DRAFT REPORT - DO NOT CITE OR QUOTE

-------
         POTWs are not completely effective at removing all of the chemicals in the influent;
   some of the chemical loading in the influent will be released in the POTNV effluent. Typical
   overall POTW removal efficiencies vary by chemical.  Chemical loadings that are removed
   by POTW treatment processes partition to several pathways within the POTW,  including
   biodegradation, volatilization,  and  adsorption to  sludge.   Using average removal and
   partitioning rates, chemicals will be divided among effluent, biodegradation, air and sludge
   pathways.  The Domestic Sewage Study (EPA 1986c) gives both typical POTW removal
   efficiencies and within-POTW partitioning rates for many TRI chemicals. These values will
   be used in this methodology. Chemicals lacking partitioning rates will be assigned rates
   based on their chemical class.  To do so, each chemical having partitioning rates in the
   Domestic Sewage Study will be assigned to a class (halo-organic, metal,  etc.), and an
   average determined for each class. The average rate will be applied to other TRI chemicals
   in that class lacking specific partitioning rates.

         Once the fates of chemicals entering the POTW are determined, the exposure levels
   associated with chemical loadings to each compartment will be estimated. Chemicals that
   escape in the POTW effluent will be modeled using the surface water evaluation methods
   described above. Chemicals that biodegrade will be assumed to cause no further exposure.
   POTW volatilization releases will be treated like  area-source air releases, as described
   above.

         For chemicals  that partition to sludge, the models used to depict exposure will
   depend on the sludge disposal method employed  by the POTW. The remaining  problem
   is to determine which POTWs engage in which sludge disposal practices. A database does
   exist  (the National  Sewage Sludge Survey)  that describes the sludge disposal  methods
   employed by POTWs in the United  States. The exposure levels from POTW sludge
   contaminants can be modeled using the same methods used to model direct releases of
   contaminants, depending on the POTW sludge disposal practice (incineration, landfilling,
   land application, etc). If extracting data on disposal practices is too cumbersome or if a
   match cannot be found,  other methods for modeling these exposures will have to be
   adopted. One possible method is to use results from the national aggregate population risk
   assessment for municipal sludge performed in support of upcoming municipal sludge rules.
   From this risk assessment, we could obtain average exposures per ton of sludge disposed,
   by disposal method. These results could be used for  this analysis by weighting these unit
   exposures by  the amount of  sludge disposed by each  practice (either regionally  or
   nationally), then multiplying by the tons of sludge disposed by the POTW (which can be
   estimated based on flow to the POTW).

   Off-Site Transfers

         In  1988, over 17 percent of TRI volume was  transferred to off-site locations for
   storage or disposal. Figure 14 presents a summary of our proposed method to model off-site
   transfers.  TRI reporters are supposed to supply the name and address of the receiving
   facility.  From these data, we must determine  if wastes  are sent to a hazardous  or


                                         65
DRAFT REPORT - DO NOT CITE OR QUOTE

-------
 nonhazardous waste management facility. Efforts are currently underway between OSW and
 OPPT to match facilities reported in TRI with RCRIS reporting to aid in making this
 determination.   Chemical submissions indicating  transfer to a RCRA hazardous waste
 facility will not be included in the indicator; for the purposes of simplifying the indicator
 calculation,  these transfers are assumed to pose no further risk  in a regulated disposal
 facility.

       For some off-site facilities, the TRI form will report the treatment or disposal method
 employed ChfTwrfrh  sent to facilities where the treatment method is  unknown will be
 assigned among treatment technologies, based on the distribution of methods practiced at
 Treatment, Storage or  Disposal Facilities (TSDFs) where the treatment/disposal method
 is known.

      The exposure evaluation for off-site transfers will obviously depend on the type of
 treatment/disposal employed off-site.  We are still investigating methods for evaluating
 exposures from various  treatment and  disposal technologies, including underground
 injection. We  currently  have methods to  evaluate exposure from two offsite  disposal
 technologies: waste incineration and landfilling.

      Air releases from off-site waste incinerators  can be modeled like direct air releases.
 We will  obtain removal efficiencies for nonhazardous waste  incinerators from  an OSW
 analysis of municipal solid waste combustion (EPA, 1987a).

      For landfills, two major pathways will be considered. The groundwater pathway will
 be modeled  Cor off-site releases  in  the same  manner as  Cor  on-site land  releases.
 Volatilization, however, wfll be handled differently. For on-site releases, volatilization is
 included in reported fugitive emissions and thus exposure is modeled with air releases. For
 off-site land releases, volatilization emissions from IMHJ disposal must be  estimated before
 exposure can be modeled. Since the volatilization rate is a function of vapor concentration,
 the vapor concentration must be calculated.  This involves two steps: partitioning from the
solid to the water, and then water to air. Simple steady-state relationships can be used to
approximate these partitioning processes if certain  chemical-specific data are known.

      The equation for determining the concentration of chemical in the liquid phase (i.e.,
leachate) was given earlier in the "On-Site Land Release" section:
                                        66
                TVI

-------
        Figure 14
        Off-Site Transfers
5
i
S
O
s



TBAM3FPRS















link with
liMUnut coda
















landfill


or


Incineration

or

Treatment
or
Underground
Injection


^^^x"**^
^"^
^v^^
^>>v»>,^












RCRA
Hitanluus



Btf*B A
RCRA
Nonhazardous


See Figure
Air Flow





u
Assume well-
managed landfill:
^r thereftire no risk
x^

	 See Figure

jf Air Flow
c^

^ See Figure
Flow







                                                 f.1

-------
                                        *„**<

 where
       C,    =    concentration in leachate (liquid phase) (kg/1),
       C,    =    concentration in landfill solids (kg/m'),
       K<    =    soil/water partition coefficient (I/kg), and
       Bd    =    bulk density of material in landfill (kg/m1).

 The second calculation determines the vapor phase concentration from the liquid phase
 concentration using Henry's Law Constant (the ratio of the  contaminant concentration in
 the vapor to the concentration in the liquid phase):
                                    C, « H C,

 where
       C,    =    concentration hi vapor phase (kg/1) and
       H    =    Henry's Law Constant (dimensionless).

 Now that an equilibrium vapor concentration has been determined, the rate of volatilization
 may be estimated from a first-order rate equation:
                                Vol Rate - 4^, C,

 where
             B    volatilization rate constant.
The volatilization  rate constant is taken from a EPA (1985)  equation for uncovered
monofills:

                                   0.17
where
      u     «     wind speed (m/s),
      T     =     ambient air temperature, assumed to be 15°C,
      MW  =     molecular weight (g/mol) and
      0.17 and. 0.944 are empirical constants.

All of these formulae may be combined to express the volatilization rate as a function of
the chemical concentration in the solid phase:
                                       68
      PFPOPT . HO NOT CTTF. OB OT'OTF.

-------
                                      0.17 u (0.994)(r-ao) H C
                           Vol Rate  =  - - - '-
         These volatilization emissions estimates, along with weather and population data, will
  be used to arrive at population-weighted concentrations in the same way as fugitive direct
  air releases from TRI facilities. Population will be extracted using the zip code of the
  receiving facility. Volatilization parameters are summarized in Table 11

  VI.    COMPUTATION OF THE INDICATORS

         This section of the repon summarizes the actual computation of the TRI indicators
  and the adjustments made to the indicators when chemicals  or facilities are added  to
  theoriginal set of TRI chemicals and facilities.  The methods of calculating the indicators
  are presented first; subsequent discussion focuses on methods to accommodate additions of
  both chemicals and facilities to  the indicators.

         Before describing its calculation, we will reiterate a few characteristics of the TRI
  indicators. First, two chronic indicators will be calculated, one to measure the impacts
  imposed on human health and the other to measure impacts on the environment Dividing
  the indicators into categories allows us to examine fluctuations in each category. Second,
  the actual indicator quantity yields a general measure of  related to risk but does not
  translate into a physically meaningful term, e.g^ the statistical risk to an individual.  Third,
  two chronic indicators (i.e., human health and ecological) with the  same score do not
  necessarily share the same absolute risk.  Again, it is the relative change to the previous
  score that make the TRI indicators useful instruments.

         Fourth, it is important to  remember that the TRI indicators are rough measures only
  of the impacts  of the TRI chemical releases, a subset of the total universe of chemicals
  being released into the environment. The indicators gauge neither the impacts of chemicals
  regulated  in other programs within the EPA nor the impacts of chemicals that lie wholly
  outside of EPA regulation. In the future, the indicator scores will represent the impacts of
  additional  chemicals and faculties yet to be added to the program; however, the initial
  indicator scores will reflect  only the impacts of the  current roster of TRI  chemicals,
  facilities, and media.

         When chemicals and  facilities are added  to the TRI roster in the  future, the
  numerical value of  the indicators would  almost certainly increase if no adjustments were
  made to the method of calculation to account for the additions.  However, such an increase
  would not necessarily represent a sudden increase in actual environmental impact, but rather
  would reflect a broader understanding  of the impacts that had existed all  along.  To
  maintain comparability in the indicators' scores over time, the indicators would have to be
                                          69
DRAFT REPORT - DO NOT CITE OR QUOTE

-------
                                Table 12
                     Volatilization Modelling Parameters
Parameter
K,
Molecular weight
Henry's Law Constants
Average area of source: municipal
solid waste landfill
Median area of source: industrial
nonhazardous land disposal
Mean wind speed
Value
varies
varies
varies
315
landfill: 3
surf.iinpndint: 0.5
land trtment 15
waste pile: 0.5
site-specific
Source/Comment
Chemical properties
database
Chemical properties
database
Chemical properties
database
in acres; from EPA
(1988c)
in acres; from EPA
(19884)
m/s; from STAR data
                                   70
DRAFT REPORT - DO NOT CITE OR QUOTE

-------
m
   adjusted in some manner when such additions occur. We address this issue in the following
   sections.

   Indicators Computation

         The indicators will be calculated by combining the individual TRI chemical-facility-
   media indicator elements.  As discussed earlier, each element's value is a measure of a
   chemical's impact on either human health or the environment (depending on the indicator)
   based on some measure of the volume of release from a facility, the chemical's toxitity, and
   the potential exposed population for the media of release. We propose two alternative ways
   of calculating  the indicators:

         Simple Sum of the Component Scores:


                              / « 5j + Sj  *  Sj *  ... * S


   where
         I      =     TRI indicator of interest and
         S      =     facility-chemical-medium-specific indicator element

         In this method, each component score makes a contribution proportional to its size.
   Simply, it is the total impact resulting from all chemical-facility-media releases. The final
   value would be scaled to a manageable number for ease of presentation to the public. For
   example, in the first year, the final number could be scaled to 10,000, and subsequent year
   numbers would be scaled so that they could be compared to 10,000.

         Simple Sum Normalized to a Base Year!


                          (5, +S^ + S,  *  «. * 5.)
                      7 • - ' - - - - -  rn**fiar .
                           (5, + S, «• 5, * ... +SU)^^


         Like the simple sum method, this method represents each  component  score
   proportionately. Its primary advantage is that it is a dimensionless ratio that tracks progress
   over time and continuously looks back at the beginning of the indicator record.  With a
   score of 100 in the base year, a score of 60 in year  2 and 40 in year 3, the indicator value
   has been reduced by 40 percent in year 2 compared to the base year, 60 percent in year 3
   compared to the base year, and 20 percent from year 2 to year 3.  Thus, the score would
   reflect change from year to year, and from the base year. It must be reiterated that while
   such a  trend  in scores over the years would imply that there has been a decrease  in
   environmental effects, the magnitude of the decrease is unknown.
                                         71
DRAFT REPORT - DO NOT CITE OR QUOTE

-------
         Other Methods 0f (Calculation Cnn
-------
   including: (a) the creation of separate indicators for new chemicals and facilities, (b) a ratio
   adjustment  method, and (c) the initiation of new indicators upon addition of many new
   chemicals and facilities (the "starting over" option). Details of each of these methods, and
   their advantages and disadvantages, are found in Appendix F. The Work Group identified
   two of these options as the most feasible and easily interpretable.

         The first option is to create new indicators when significant new additions are made
   to the TRI roster. "Significant" additions could be several minor additions that have been
   made over the course of a few years that eventually add up to a significant change, or a
   single major influx of new chemicals (due to Congressional action, for example). These new
   indicators would include both old and new chemicals and facilities, but would provide a
   mechanism to  track the initial set of chemicals and facilities  so that trends could  be
   discerned for that subset

         A second option is to simply start over when significant new additions are made,
   without subsequent tracking of subsets. This approach would also allow modifications to the
   calculation methods that may be desired based  on experience with the indicators from
   previous years.  This second option would be accompanied by a thorough explanation to the
   public regarding why the initial set of indicators are being abandoned and a new set  of
   indicators adopted.
  VII.   ABIOTIC INDICATORS

         The Work Group considered expanding the set of TRI indicators to include indirect
  health and environmental impacts from TRI releases. Examples include deposition of
  airborne chemicals into other media, such as surface water; global climate change; acid
  deposition; ozone depletion; and tropospheric ozone formation (smog formation).

        -Since each of these indirect effects are effects on human health and the environment,
  it would seem necessary to include them in a  set  of indicators which measures
  environmental impacts from TRI releases.  However, the complexity of and uncertainty in
  modeling these scenarios makes direct insertion into our current indicator algorithm
  extremely difficult.  The following discussions examines indirect health and environmental
  impacts, their potential inclusion into the TRI Environmental Indicators, the potential
  creation of separate indicators, and the difficulties in accomplishing either.

  Global Wanning

         Some .of the TRI chemicals are considered "greenhouse gases." These chemicals,
  when released into the atmosphere, can absorb infra-red radiation which the earth emits as
  it establishes radiative equilibrium with the solar system. The potential result of this "effect"
  is the increase of the average temperature of the earth's surface, an increase which could
  lead to higher sea levels, droughts,  floods, and climate  changes.

                                          73
DRAFT REPORT - DO NOT CITE OR QUOTE

-------
         The quantification of these risks is a hotly contested topic in academic, political and
   industrial circles. The potential temperature increases have been predicted to be anywhere
   between zero and eight degrees Celsius. The direction of the climate change resulting from
   the accumulation of greenhouse gases can be offset by natural occurrences such as volcanic
   eruptions or the appearance of El Nino, a circulating body of abnormally warm water in the
   Pacific Ocean.  Since the results of the  buildup of greenhouse gases have not been, and
   quite possibly cannot be, quantified, it is impossible to assign a greenhouse effect risk to the
   unit emission of a greenhouse gas.  Thus the greenhouse effect cannot effectively be
   incorporated into the TRI Environmental Indicators.

         This is not to  say that the release of greenhouse gases, and their relative  threat,
   cannot be traced with a separate indicator.  In attempting to quantify the climate change
   potential associated with gaseous emissions, greenhouse gases have been weighted relative
   to their capacity to absorb infra-red radiation and their half-life in the atmosphere.  These
   weights have been normalized to CO* the greenhouse gas greatest in both presence in the
   atmosphere and rate of addition to the atmosphere. The other major greenhouse gases are
   listed below:
                            Life
   Trace Gas
   Carbon Dioxide
   Methane
   Nitrous Oxide
   CFC-11"
   CFC-12"
   HCFC-22
   CFC-113"
Global Warming Potential
(Integration Time Horizon^
(120)
10
ISO
60
130
15
90
50
6
110
2QjOSt

1
63
270
4500
7100
4100
4500
1900
350
5800
7
100 vrs.

1
21
290
3500
7300
1500
4200
1300
100
5800
3
                         500 vn

                         1
                         9
                         190
                         1500
                         4500
                         510
                         2100
                         460
                         34
                         3200
                         2
   CH,CC1,
   CF,Br
   CO

   " - TRI Chemical

   Source: EPA (1990b)

   The emissions of greenhouse gases can be reported by their relative weight of contribution
   to the greenhouse effect and reported in a simple indicator.  For CFC-11, -12, -13 and
   carbon tetracbloride, the indicator developed here for global warming potential would be
   an additional  measure of these chemicals' environmental hazard. That is, each of the
   chemicals listed above will also have human health and ecological effects captured by the
                                          74
DRAFT REPORT - DO NOT CITE OR QUOTE

-------
   TRI Environmental Indicators method described in earlier sections. The global warming
   indicator would supplement the set of TRI Environmental Indicators to provide an overall
   measure of these four chemicals' potential to cause environmental damage.

         We should note that the TRI data base is quite limited in its ability to assess overall
   global wanning potential from air releases of U.S. point sources.  In fact, only four of the
   eleven chemicals that are key contributors to global wanning are currently reported in TRI.
   Thus, any separate attempt to measure trends in global warming using the TRI database
   should consider these limitations.

   Acid Rain

         Acid rain results from the deposition of sulfur- and nitrogen- containing compounds,
   particularly sulfur dioxide and nitrous oxides, into clouds. The sulfur and nitrogen react with
   the water to form sulfuric and nitric acid which then accompany water during precipitation,
   leading to corrosion  of structures and reductions in the  pH of soils  and water.  Some
   researchers have attributed the elimination of habitat in different parts of the world to acid
   rain, particularly in areas where coal provides the primary energy source for combustion
   processes.

         Like the greenhouse effect, it is extremely difficult to determine the effect caused by
   the unit emission of an "acid rain" chemical The amount of sulfur and nitrogen which may
   combine to form an acid depends upon equilibrium concentrations in the  area of concern.
   Although the acidity  of sulfuric acid and nitric acid may be  compared directly by their
   respective pH at a given concentration, and although the number of sulfur or nitrogen atoms
   present in a compound may determine the ability of a chemical to contribute to the creation
   of these acids, site-specific conditions will determine the quantity and concentration of the
   acids.

         Like the risks associated with global warming, the risks posed to human health and
   the environment from acid rain have not been quantified in terms of individual toxic risks.
   Some work has been done on health conditions and respiratory problems. However, most
   work concerning acid rain has  focused on population-based economic risks, a different
   perspective than the one used to determine the TRI Environmental Indicators. The health
   effects seem to have been precursors to determining factors such as days  lost at work and
   other economic inputs.

         Furthermore, SO, and NOV the primary substances linked to the formation of acid
   deposition particles, are not currently included in the TRI list of chemicals for which
   reporting is required.  In addition, coal burning power plants are not included among SIC
   codes 20-39.  As such, those facilities who are among  major emitters  of acid deposition
   precursors are also not required to report under TRL If in future rulemakmg under SARA
   Section 313 these substances and sources are added to the TRI list, then an indicator could
   be developed to track progress in reducing acid deposition.


                                          75
DRAFT REPORT - DO NOT CTTE OR QUOTE

-------
Stratospheric Ozone Depletion

      The depletion of the stratospheric ozone layer results from the reaction of chlorine
and  fluorine atoms in chlorofluorocarbons with  ozone, breaking the ozone down into
diatomic oxygen and oxygenated compounds.  Since ozone absorbs incoming ultraviolet
radiation, the deterioration of the ozone  layer is resulting  in  dramatic  increases  in
environmental exposure to UV radiation. This high-energy end of the spectrum has been
shown to cause cataracts, suppress the immune system and induce cancer in humans. It has
also  been shown to adversely affect plant and animal life. Thus, the risks to humans could
lie anywhere from actual health hazards to loss of agriculture.

      A major project at EPA focused on determining the risks associated with CFCs and
their alternatives in order to formulate policy options. The model tracks emissions into the
atmosphere, models the reduction in the ozone layer, and calculates risks and damage
associated with skin cancer, cataracts, aquatic impacts, crop loss, immunosuppression, and
even a qualitative assessment to the food chain (starting with oceanic plankton). The model
is complicated but could be used to determine risks associated with the emissions of CFCs.

      A weighting scheme has been developed to determine the effectiveness of different
CFCs at depleting the ozone layer. These weights are detailed  below:

                         Domestic                            Weighted
Substance                1986 Use         Weight            Production
                         (millions fcg)

CFC-11"                 9L3              1                  913
CFC-12"                 1462             1                  1462
CFC-113"                71.1              0.8                S6.9
CFC-114'                4.1               1                  4.1
CFC-115*                4.61              0.6                18

" • TRI Chemicals: Chlorinated Fluorocarboos are a category in the TRL

Source:  Hahn and McGartland (1989)

A separate indicator could be developed for ozone depletion through the use of these
weights. The indicator would serve as an approximate measure of these group of chemicals
contribution to stratospheric ozone depletion.  This measure obviously would not  be
complete since some chemicals (e.g^ HCFCs)  and many sources (e.g., home and car  air
conditioning  systems)  are  not included in the current  TRI reporting requirements.
Nevertheless, a number of stratospheric ozone depleting chemicals and some production and
use sources are included in TRI, so that TRI and this indicator could provide some general
trends in tracking releases of these substances.
                                       76
      T*T?nrtT>T  r\r\ wvr rrnr OP

-------
         For the individual substances  listed  above,  this stratospheric ozone  depletion
   indicator would provide an additional measure of these chemicals' relative environmental
   hazard. For example, a carcinogenic substance such as carbon tetrachloride will be captured
   by the human health and environmental indicators described in earlier sections. Carbon
   tetrachloride would also be included in the stratospheric ozone depletion indicator as well
   as the global wanning indicator.  Thus, the stratospheric ozone depletion indicator will
   provide a supplemental measure of environmental damage of each of the chemicals listed
   above.

   Tropospheric Ozone

         The creation of tropospheric (low atmosphere) ozone, one of the main constituents
   of the lower atmosphere, results from the reaction of a radical oxygen atom with an oxygen
   molecule.  This maverick oxygen atom is produced when ultraviolet radiation in sunlight
   breaks  apart a nitrogen  dioxide atom  into nitrous  oxide  and  oxygen.   In normal
   circumstances, the ozone will react with the nitrous oxide in order to reform the nitrogen
   dioxide and the diatomic oxygen, the preferred state.  However, the presence of volatile
   organic compounds (VOCs) in the air prevent this elimination of ozone by reacting with the
   nitrous oxide, creating nitrogen dioxide before the molecule can react with ozone. Thus it
   is the presence of both NO, and VOCs that lead  to the  formation of ozone in the
   troposphere.

         The presence of ozone in the troposphere poses human  health and environmental
   risks since it is this level of the atmosphere in which we live.  Ozone causes respiratory
   ailments, particularly in the older and younger populations, and is an eye  irritant.

         The difficulty with pinning down the effects of emissions of either nitrous oxides  or
   VOCs is their dependence upon one another for the creation and destruction of ozone.
   Rural and urban areas wfll have different impacts from increased or decreased emissions
   of VOCs.

         Reporting of VOCs as a group and NO, are currently not required by TRI. VOCs
   could be derived by identifying all individual organic chemical compounds currently reponed
   in TRI that are considered tropospheric ozone precursors.  An indicator could then  be
   derived by summing all those compounds for each facility. An alternative approach would
   be to simply  add by rulemaking VOCs and NO, as a group.  In this way, analyzing these
   substances and developing the indicator for tropospheric ozone precursors from TRI
   facilities would be straightforward.  A third  approach would be to not develop a TRI
   indicator at all for VOCs since the Clean Air Act requirements necessitate monitoring and
   reporting of emissions of these substances in ozone non-attainment areas.
                                         77
DRAFT REPORT - DO NOT CITE OR QUOTE

-------
   Particle Deposition

         Panicle deposition differs from the volatilization pathway currently analyzed in the
   TRI Environmental Indicators by tracing airborne emissions through exposure scenarios
   other than inhalation. Particles can land on clouds and precipitate, entering water bodies
   and exposing populations through drinking water. Particle deposition can also produce risks
   to both humans and wildlife through  direct ingestion of soils and dust and by consuming
   food crops grown on agricultural land.

         Many models have been developed at ORD to determine the exposure posed by
   particle deposition. We are investigating these methods for their potential incorporation
   into the indicators method.

   VIII.  PROPOSED  COMPUTER ALGORITHM  FOR  CALCULATING  THE  TRI
         INDICATORS

         Preceding sections discussed the general  methodology for calculating the TRI
   Environmental Indicators. Each component part was addressed and its calculation or use
   was outlined. As presented in Section VI, the indicators are designed as  the  sum of
   constituent facility-media-chemical "elements":

                              / - Sl  * £} «• Sj «• ». •«• Sm


   where
         I      s     TRI indicator aT>d
                                                  element.
   After the program runs, as many as 500,000 indicator elements will be summed to yield just
   one of the raw TRI indicators (e.g, the Human Health Chronic Indicator). How do we
   arrive at the half million elements to begin with? This section addresses the automated
   approach to calculating the elements.  The computer algorithm used to calculate the TRI
   Environmental Indicators can be thought of as a  three-part  process;  input, exposure
   modeling, and element calculation,  This section  describes each of these parts.  First, we
   describe the fundamental data input files common to all of the element calculations. Next,
   we provide a step-by-step description of how these data files are linked with mathematical
   models and the exposure and toxicity weighting matrices in order to calculate the elements.
   The step-by-step description also delineates the format and content of additional data files
   that are specific to the analysis of particular release pathways. A summary of the step-by-
   step process is provided in Appendix G.

         Before we begin to construct an algorithm for indicator  calculation, we must first
   select a programming language in which to implement the algorithm.  We propose to use
   the Statistical Analysis System (SAS). SAS is a data management and analysis programming
   language widely used in government and industry.  In fact, an  outstanding TRI analysis

                                         78
DRAFT REPORT - DO NOT CITE OR QUOTE

-------
  system, TRIPQUIC, uses SAS code to provide a rich set of exploratory tools.  Its flexibility
  and power are unsurpassed among major data management systems. The choice to use SAS
  allows greater control of the input and output sequences and easily allow virtually limitless
  views of an indicator's make-up.

  General Data Input

        To support the calculation of the indicators, we will create or use a variety of data
  tiles.7 The program will then access these data files to obtain model input parameters as
  the models are run. Because the TRI database is continually updated and so fluctuates over
  time, we will use data from the two week period each year when EPA freezes the database
  for analysis.  All of the TRI Environmental Indicators calculations rely on three major data
  input files.  First,  the RELEASE8 file contains information  on releases for each facility-
  chemical combination in  the TRI data base.   The RELEASE file contains values for
  releases to all media and is the core of the indicators calculation. In the input process, data
  will be checked for errors and, if possible, corrected.9  Variables essential  to indicator
  calculation that are contained in the file are listed below.
Variable

TRI ID
DCN


ZTPCODE

NPDES


LATITUDE
Comment

Unique facility identifier
Identification number used for
*nvYf hnw facility *vitn liata in
5tflu»r dp^n filgf
7** code of the facility


fkcDitv

1 atitii«i» fgr facility
Variable

ACTF1AG
FUGAIR


STKAIR

WATER


LAND
Comment

Activity/use flags
Fugitive air emission of
diftmfeai frflgi fk^> facility
(pounds per year)
Stack w* miissifln of chemical
from the facility (pounds per
year)

«iMifiti frnm fartlftv /twiittiffa
per year)
On-site land release from
faculty (pounds per year)
     7We refer to data files by a capitalized one word file name.  This is only for clarity in
  the discussion; the actual locations and names of files appear in footnotes.

     1 Text file • TRISJROD.CHEMICAL.Fn .F89. This file was created to assist in creating
  the TRI National report The entire file format is available from EPA.

     9 The exact details of how various errors will be treated will be discussed in the final
  report

                                         79
DRAFT REPORT - DO NOT CITE OR QUOTE

-------
LONGITUDE
SIC
CAS
TRIRCRA
Longitude for facility
SIC code of facility
CAS Dumber of chemical

RCRA ID number of TRI
facility (if it has one)
UI
POTW
TRANSFER
BASIS1-
BASIS5
Release from facility to
underground injection
(pounds per year)
Discharge of chemical from
facility to POTW (pounds per
year)
Transfer of chemical off-site
from facility (pounds per
year) (other than POTW
discharges)
Basis/method for estimating
the quantity of release
(separate variable for each
type of release)
         The ACTFLAG variable indicates how the chemical is used at the TRI facility.
   Although this variable has no  direct role in  indicator calculation, it will be useful for
   performing diagnostics on the indicators.  Similarly, the method for estimating the quantity
   of the release is included as the variable BASIS and can be used for performing diagnostics
   on the indicators.

         The second fundamental input file is the BGREACH file, which contains information
   on the populations and geographies of areas surrounding TRI facilities.10  The BGREACH
   file was inspired by the current efforts to  develop a CIS (Geographic Information System)
   at EPA.  The file is a two-dimensional digital representation of the United States. As seen
   in Figure 15, the country is divided into 1 kilometer square cells.11 For each of these cells,
   a variety of geographical information about the location can be stored. Storing information
   in this manner allows us to access all of the relevant geographical information for each TRI
   facility by simply anrsiing the BGREACH cell that matches the location of the facility.
   This approach has significant advantages  over having to access a number of different data
   files to retrieve different pieces of geographical information. Although the BGREACH file
   is not an exact reproduction of the geography and demographics of  the U.S.,  it is  a
   reasonably good  approximation for our purposes.  The variables contained  in the
   BGREACH file are listed below.
      10 FBXTRIS.TRIDENT.BGREACH - This file is a SAS housed on the EPA mainframe
  developed for this project

      11 The choice of 1 kilometer is somewhat arbitrary. The size of each square can be set
  to any value. However, halving each squares area quadruples the size of the file.
DRAFT REPORT - DO NOT CITE OR QUOTE

-------
Variable
CELLXY
POP
NEARSTAR
WELL
Comment
Cartesian location of the cell
Population in the cell
Nearest Weather Station ID
Well density in cell
Variable
FLOW
WATERPOP
FIPS
NEXTXY
Comment
Water volume (million liters
per day)
Population at intake
State-County FIPS Code
Next cell for stream
        Other variables can be added to the file if necessary. To build the BGREACH file,
  we will need to extract data from a variety of sources.  Enumerated below are explanations
  of each variable, sources used to obtain data on the variable, and the weaknesses of each
  variable.

        1. CELLXY - This value describes the relative location of the cell on the grid. This
        variable is the basic identifier that will be used to link the information in BGREACH
        file with  information from the RELEASE file and other data files.  We will link
              BGREACH to the RELEASE data by using the latitude and longitude data
              of the TRI facilities. To link the location of a TRI facility to a CELLXY
              value, the  equivalent cartesian (x and y)  distances of the TRI facility latitude
              and  longitude are  first calculated from a  central point in the continental
              United States (96 degrees longitude and 37 degrees latitude). After these
              distances are calculated, a cell address can be directly calculated as follows:
        where
              CelL,
              y
              X
                           CeUn - (y+1600)-10* * (x+1600)
cell address or location file,
north/south distance (km) to center of US, and
east/west distance (km) to center of US.
        Adding 1600 (km) to the x and y distances guarantees positive values.

        2.  POP • This variable  represents the number of people living in the cell.
        Information on populations will be extracted from the Census Bureau's BG/ED file.
        The BG/ED file reports population and longitude/latitude pairs for centroids of
        Block Groups and Enumeration Districts.11  Each centroid will be convened into
        a cell address (Cell,,) based on the above equation. Populations with equivalent cell
     13 Block Groups and Enumeration Districts are terms used by the Census Bureau to
  describe very small units or blocks within metropolitan areas and rural areas generally
  Containing not more than 800 people.

                                         81
DRAFT REPORT - DO NOT CITE OR QUOTE

-------
 >
        Figure  15
        How the TRI Indicator Program Views the United States
X
g
§
§
                Surface Water Body
         The U.S. U carved Into
         squares I kilometer wide.
         each referenced asanx and y
         distance from a center point.
The entire grid system
containing 10 million cells
Is kept In a file and each
cell can be directly accessed.
Facilities locations can be
pinpointed on the grid by
converting their longitude and
latitude to a cell address.
                                                                                     Each Cell Contains Information on;
                                                                                     Location         Water Volume
                                                                                     Population        Water Direction
                                                                                     Weather Stations Well Density
                                                                                     * Other variables may be added.

-------
        addresses will  be  summed.   This  exercise  yields a population number for each
        inhabited square kilometer in the United States.

        One problem in this approach is that the land area of rural districts can be larger
        than a square kilometer. These areas are treated the same as a city block. In other
        words, a cell in the BGREACH file may contain a population that is actually spread
        over several kilometers.  One way to adjust for this  is  to assume a uniform
        population distribution and  allot populations to surrounding cells based on the
        reported size of the Enumeration District  However, since we propose in our
        methodology to set populations to  a minimum value  of 1,000, and  since the
        population  in  an Enumeration District  is usually less  than 1,000,  uniformly
        distributing populations is not necessary.

        3. NEARSTAR • This variable identifies the location of nearby weather stations. It
        contains an identification  value for the nearest weather station from the STAR
        (STability ARray)  database.  Using this identification number,  the most probable
        prevailing weather conditions can quickly be fetched from a companion weather data
        file.

        4. WELL - Variable WELL is a percentage of cell occupants who receive their
        drinking water from groundwater sources.  It comes from a National  Well Water
        Association (NWWA) county level file with counts  of persons and homes either
        having private wells or receiving water from a utility that uses groundwater as its
        source. The NWWA file is catalogued using state and county FTPS codes. To insert
        these data into our BGREACH file, we will first match the FDPS codes to the Census
        BG/ED data. We can then match the BG/ED data to the cell identifier (CELLXY)
        as described above.

        5. FLOW - This variable contains the flow volume of the surface water body in the
        cell.  We can get data on the continental stream network from the REACH file
        which is pan of the Routing and Graphical Display System (RODS).  The stream
        network will be mapped onto the BGREACH grid system based on longitude and
        latitude coordinates of stream segments in the REACH file.  Since segment lengths
        are often larger than our 1 km grid network, care will be taken to assure consecutive
        segments align within our grid. Essentially, the path of a surface water body will be
        tracked at 1 km intervals instead of the multiple mfle intervals in REACH. This will
        not increase precision, however, since each grid cell that is part of a stream segment
        will contain the flow properties of the segment itself in million liters per day.

        6. WATERPOP •  This variable  contains the size of the population served by a
        drinking water utility that has an intake within the cell's boundaries.  Using this
        variable, we will be able to estimate the population exposed to chemicals in surface
        water in that celL  Data on the population served by drinking water utilities will be
        derived from FRDS.


                                        83
DRAFT REPORT - DO NOT CITE OR QUOTE

-------
        7. NEXTXY - This variable contains the address of the cell into which the surface
        water body flows next  It is the link that allows us to follow the movement of
        chemical discharges through the surface water, network.

        The final fundamental input data file is the TOX file. This file contains chemical-
  specific lexicological  and chemical properties data.  These data will be linked via  the
  chemical's CAS number to the RELEASE file and other data files."  The variables
  contained in the TOX file are listed below.
Variable
CAS
WOE
TSCAWOE
OSTAR
ED10

RFD
WOENC
TSCAWOENC
Comment
CAS number
EPA cancer
WOE category
TSCA Chemical
Scoring System
cancer WOE
category
Cancer potency
ftr**"*** (kg*
day/mg)
WOE
Effective dote, 10
percent (dose
lethal to 10% of
IffH mwntftmlf)
1 LJ *!.' -m^t ^M^BI
(mg/kg-day)
EPAnoncancer
WOE category
TSCA Oifmiral
Scoring System
__»_»>_ mf\c
category
Variable
.AQNOAEL
LOGKOW
SOL
AIRDECAY

WATERDECAY

KOC
POTWREMOVE
POTWVOL
Conunent
Life cycle or chronic No
Observable Adverse
Effect Level for aquatic
life
Log of the octanol water

Water solubility (mg/1)
Decay rate m air (hr*1)
Decay rate in water (hr'1)


Sou*water parauoa
«» -• - -
COC^^ICaEDK
POTW removal efficiency
Percent of chemical that
volatilizes at the POTW
     » FBXTRIS.TIUDENT.TOXJPHYSCHEM - SAS file housed on the EPA mainframe.
  This file will also be available in dBase m and Lotus 1-2-3.

                                       84
DRAFT REPORT - DO NOT CITE OR QUOTE

-------
LOAEL
NOAEL
MED
LCSO
AAWQC
CAWQC
Lowest
Observable
Adverse Effect
Level (mg/kg-
day)
No Observable
Adverse Effect
Level (mg/kg-
day)
effective dose
(mg/kg-dav)
Lethal
concentration. 50
percent
(concentration
lethal to 50% of
test organisms
Acute Ambient
Water Quality
criteria or
f\ HlnlPHi (^•'•^WslWs*
Life Advisory
Water Quality
Criteria or
Ambient Aquatic
Life Advisory

POTWSLUDGE
POTWDEG
DRE
HC
MW
BCF
Percent of chemical that
partitions to sludge
Percent of chemical that
degrades in the POTW
Removal efficiency for
municipal waste
incinerator

Henry's Law constant
Molecular weioht



        Sections IV and V of this report describe the meaning and the sources of information
  for each of these variables.. In addition, Appendix C presents the values for some of these
  variables for many of the TRI chemicals.

  Modeling Process

        In Section IV, weighting schemes for taridry  and exposure evaluations were
  described. In Section V, the mathematics behind modeling exposure were discussed. In this
  section, we simply outline the mechanics of combining the data files described above with
  (a) the mathematical equations that predict exposure and (b) with the weighting schemes
  used to derive the toxitity and exposure potential weights. The final fadlity-chemical-
  medium-specific element is the product of the toxirity weight, exposure weight and estimated
  population size.
                                         85
DRAFT REPORT - DO NOT CITE OR QUOTE

-------
         1. Air Releases - A facility directly releasing to air is first located on the BGREACH
         grid.  The data in the BGREACH file are used as inputs to the ISCLT model
         equations discussed in Section V. At each of the 100 cells (10 km x 10 km) nearest
         to the facility, the program calculates a concentration based on the ISCLT equations.
         To perform these calculations, weather  data  (not included in  BGREACH) are
         needed.  The weather data are stored in  the STAR14 data file. Variables included
         in the STAR dataset are given below.
Variable
ID
LONGITUDE
LATITUDE
Commeat
STAR Station ID
Longitude of the station
Latitude of the station
Variable
MEANWIND
CATEGORY
F1-F16
Comment
Mean wind speed
Stability category
16 frequencies of occurrence
        The NEARSTAR variable in the BGREACH file is matched with the ID variable
        in the STAR data file.

        The concentration calculated in each cell is then weighted by the population in the
        cell to derive a population-weighted average concentration over all 100 cells. If a
        cell contains no population, a value of 10 is used in the  cell to assure  that the
        population surrounding a facility is at least 1000 (Le., there will be 100 cells with at
        least 10 persons in each cell).

        Once the population-weighted concentration is estimated, the program derives the
        surrogate dose using the surrogate dose calculations described in Section V.  The
        program then uses the exposure weighting matrix (presented in Section IV) to assign
        an exposure weight to the calculated surrogate dose. For the air release pathway, we
        propose  to use uncertainty category A to classify the air exposure potential (see
        Section IV discussion of exposure potential uncertainty).

        Finally, the program accesses  the TOX data file to assign a tenacity weight  The
        tontity weighting matrix used by the program is presented in Section IV.  The
        product of the exposure score, the toxicity score and the size of the population over
        the  100  cells  yields an indicator  element for  the  facility-chemical-air release
        combination. We propose to use uncertainty category A for the air pathway, since
        the population exposed via this route is fairly well characterized (compared to other
        pathways).
     14 FBXTRIS.TRIDENT.STAR - SAS file containing weather information used in air
  modelling.  The file was converted to SAS for this project  It contains the same data used
  by ISCLT.

                                         86
DRAFT REPORT - DO NOT CITE OR QUOTE

-------
         2. Water Releases - A facility discharging to water is located on the BGREACH grid
         and, using the water volume data contained  in the BGREACH file,  an initial
         concentration is calculated at the cell containing the facility. Then, based on the
         NEXTXY variable in the BGREACH file, the surface water body is traversed and
         the concentration is adjusted along the water body.

         Two exposure  pathways are  calculated from these water  concentrations.  First,
         exposures from drinking water are calculated. If a cell contains no drinking water
         intake, the WATERPOP variable is zero; otherwise, the WATERPOP variable is
         non-zero.  The concentrations in the cells with a drinking water intake are convened
         to surrogate doses using the surrogate dose equations described in Section IV. The
         calculated surrogate  doses are weighted by the population  in the cell to derive a
         population-weighted  average surrogate dose.  As with the air releases, the program
         then uses the  exposure weighting matrix to assign an exposure weight  to the
         calculated population-weighted surrogate dose. For the drinking water pathway, we
         propose to use uncertainty category B for exposure potential weighting for several
         reasons. First, the calculation of water concentrations does not consider partitioning
         of chemical between the water column and suspended  solids, deposition of the
         sediments along the  water course, or other processes that may affect the fate and
         transport of contaminants along a surface water body.  Furthermore, there is, no
         consideration of the removal of contaminants during treatment of drinking water at
         the utility.

         Finally, the program  accesses the TOX data file to assign a tcoticity weight based on
         the toxicity matrix presented in Section IV. The product of the exposure score, the
         toxicity score and the population for all of the cells with drinking water intakes yields
         a facility-chemical-drinking water element For population uncertainty weighting, we
         propose to use category B; although we know the locations and populations served
         by drinking water with reasonable accuracy for systems serving more than 10,000
         persons, we have only sporadic data about smaller systems.

         Another possible exposure pathway  for water discharges is the consumption of
         contaminated fish.   Each segment of the affected  water body may contain
         contaminated fish  which could be caught and  eaten by recreational fishers.  As
         described  above, the program will track the concentration of the chemical as it
         traverses down the waterway; at each cell, the concentration in fish will be derived
         and the resulting  surrogate dose calculated using  the surrogate dose equations
         presented in Section V.  The calculated surrogate dose in  each cell will then be
         weighted by the population of recreational fishers assumed to reside in that cell.
         This yields a population-weighted average surrogate dose  for all cells.  We will
         estimate the number of recreational fishers as the total population in the cell times
         a fraction of persons who are assumed to fish for recreation.  The U.S. Fish and
         Wildlife Service produces a survey of hunting, fishing and wildlife every five years.
         The survey includes state-specific data on fishing rates that we could use to derive

                                           87
DRAFT REPORT - DO NOT CITE OR QUOTE

-------
 a state-specific fraction of persons who fish.  As with the drinking water pathway
 releases, the program then uses the exposure matrix to assign  a  weight  to the
 calculated  population-weighted surrogate dose.   For this  exposure pathway, we
 propose to use uncertainty category C for exposure potential for several reasons.
 First, as with the drinking water pathway, the estimated water concentrations are
 probably an overestimate  because we don't consider all processes in surface water
 that affect concentrations.  Second, fish concentrations are actually dependent on the
 type of species, particularly its lipid content and its  position in the food chain.
 Finally, the actual probability of recreational fishing in the particular stream reach
 being modeled is unknown, as is the actual quantity  of fish consumed from that
 particular reach.

 Next, the program accesses the TOX data file to assign a toxicity weight based on the
 toxiciry weighting matrix presented in Section IV. The product of the exposure score,
 the  toxicity score  and the  population for  all  of  the cells  traversed  by the
 contaminated surface water yields an element for the facility-chemical-fish ingestion
 combination. For fish ingestion, we propose to use population uncertainty category
 C, since the actual number of persons fishing in the particular stream reach is a very
 rough estimate using generic data.
 3. On-sltff Tf "d Releases - Land releases, as discussed in Section V, can contaminate
 groundwater or can volatilize to air.  For on-site land releases, the volatilization
 component should be reported under fugitive emissions and thus will be handled
 under the air release calculations. For groundwater releases, the exposure modeling
 will depend on the regulatory status of the on-site unit into which the chemical is
 released.   Therefore, before  any  groundwater modeling can be conducted, the
 regulatory status of the  unit must be determined.  There are a number of ways to
 approach this problem.  First, an effort could be undertaken to match the on-site
 land releases reported in TRI to the RCRIS database. This would allow us to obtain
 information on the type  of units maimaingH by the TRI facility.  Such a match could
 be achieved through the use of the unique RCRA ID number which is reported in
 both TRI  (if the facility has such  a number) and in RCRIS.  However, such an
 undertaking may prove  to be quite burdensome.  A simpler approach would be to
 assume that if the TRI form reports a RCRA ID number for the facility, then the on-
 site land releases are assumed to go to a RCRA regulated unit Otherwise, the on-
 site land release is assumed to occur in a nonhazardous land disposal facility.
If the release occurs in a nonhazardous unit, groundwater releases are modeled.  As
described hi Section V, there are two steps to this process: modeling the leachate
concentrations and then applying a dilution and attenuation factor to estimate the
concentrations at the well. Since deriving leachate concentration is a function of the
contaminant level in the waste, we must first estimate this value.  The equation
presented in Section V  for calculating waste concentration requires an estimate of
the waste volume generated by the industry on a yearly basis.  The release loading


                                  88
UFPORT - DO NOT CITE OR QUOTE

-------
         can then be assumed to be dispersed throughout this waste volume. Appendix E
         contains the estimated waste volumes by industry.  This appendix will be converted
         to a data file WASTE", with the following content:
Variable
SIC
WASTEVOL
ComniFDt
SIC code for which the
waste volume is
applicable
Industry-specific waste
volume disposed per
year
Variable

UNTTTYPE

Cooioicflt
Type of management
unit into which waste is
placed

         Once the waste concentration is estimated, the program will access the TOX data file
         to obtain the partition coefficient necessary to calculate the leachate concentration,
         as described in Section V.  The DAF (dilution and attenuation factor) of 100 then
         is applied to estimate the contaminant concentration at the well The program uses
         the well concentrations to  calculate an estimated surrogate dose, as described in
         Section V.

         The program then uses the exposure matrix to assign a weight to the  calculated
         surrogate dose.  For the  groundwater pathway, we propose to  use uncertainty
         category C, since the exposure estimate  is based on a conservative, steady-state
         estimate  of leachate concentration, and  on a conservative, generic  dilution and
         attenuation factor.
         The program then
the TOX data file to assign a weight based on the toxicity
         matrix presented in Section IV. The proposed population exposed to contaminated
         groundwater is calculated from the number of persons receiving drinking water from
         groundwater within 4 square kilometers of the facility. This value is included in the
         BGREACH file as the WELL variable. We propose to use population uncertainty
         category C for this pathway, since we do not know the areal extent of the potential
         groundwater contamination, the direction of groundwater flow, and other factors that
         would help us to estimate the number of persons drinking groundwater potentially
         affected by the acuity.

         The product of the exposure score, the toxicity score and the population over 4 km2
         yields an element for the facm'ty-chenu'cal-groundwater combination.

         4. Releases to POTWs - Some facilities report discharges to POTWs. For these TRI
         releases, the  modeling  of the exposure potential requires information about the
      "FBXTRIS.TRIDENT.WASTE - SAS file containing waste volume information.

                                          89
DRAFT REPORT - DO NOT CITE OR QUOTE

-------
         location and certain characteristics of the POTW to which the TRI facility releases
         contaminants.  To store POTW-specific information, we will use a data file called
         POTW." The appropriate POTW file will be matched to the TRI transfer via the
         DCN (Document Control Number) variable in the RELEASE data file. Variable!
         contained in the POTW file are shown below.
Variable
DCN
BASIS6
f* AM ••••••*
ID used for matching with TRI
transferring facility
Basts/Method for estimate of
quantity of release to POTW
Variable
ZIPCODE
SLUDGE
Comment
ZIP code of the POTW
facility
Sludge disposal method
employed by the POTW
         The ZIP code of the POTW is provided on the TRI form of the facility making the
         transfer. Using this data file, POTWs will be located on the BGREACH grid based
         on the latitude and longitude of the ZIP code centroid.  To do so, we must match
         the ZIP code centroid with a latitude and longitude.  This information will be stored
         in a data file called ZIPCODE.17 Hie format of the ZIPCODE file is given below.
Variable
ZIPCODE
LONGITUDE


POP
Comment
ZIP code
Longitude of the ZIP code
MkHtrniff

!/IP code population
Variable
FIPS
LATITUDE



Comment
State-County FIPS CODE
Latitude of the ZIP code



         Once we have located the POTW, the next step is to apply the overall POTW
         contaminant removal rate (stored in the TOX file) to the release.  This overall
         removal rate allows the program to fpifufrte the loading of contaminant remaining
         in the POTW effluent "»H the loading that remains in the POTW.  Contaminants
         remaining in the POTW are partitioned within the POTW, using partitioning rates
         stored in the TOX file.  The partitioning rates allow us to estimate the amount of
         contaminant in the POTW sludge and in the POTW volatile emissions, as well as the
         amount that degrades.
      16 TRIS.PROD JOTWJFBLE89 - This file is also part of the national report family of
   files.  The full record layout is available from EPA.

      17 FBXTRIS.TRIDEhrr^IPCODE.CENTROID • SAS file containing FIPS, zipcode,
   longitude/latitude, and census information for all ZIP codes in the United States.

                                       90
DRAFT REPORT - DO NOT CITE OR QUOTE

-------
         Once the program has accounted for the fate of all of TRI releases to the POTW,
         it models the exposure associated with each fate endpoint First, the POTW effluent
         is modeled as a direct water discharge from the POTW. Since ZIP code centroids
         are used to locate the  POTW, it is possible  that a POTW may be placed on a
         BGREACH grid cell without a water body running through it  In this case, the water
         body receiving the POTW effluent is determined by finding the nearest water body
         to the ZIP code centroid. We could improve this estimate if we could find longitude
         and latitude information  for POTWs  from  a  source other than ZIP  codes.
         Volatilization from POTWs is modeled as a fugitive  emission.  The method  for
         modeling fugitive emissions is described in the Air Releases section above.

         The shidge disposal practice employed by a particular POTW is not known from the
         TRI database.  We will attempt to use the NSSS to identify sludge disposal methods
         for particular POTWs. If we are successful, we can then model the particular sludge
         disposal  method using  exposure evaluation  methods described  above.  For
         incinerated sludge, destruction and removal efficiencies from the  TOX file are
         applied and then air modeling is performed, as described in the Air Releases section
         above. Land disposal of sludge can be modeled as a land release using methods
         described above.

         If the  NSSS database  cannot be employed to identify POTW sludge disposal
         practices, the impacts of sludge disposal will be quantified using chemical-specific
         weighted average unit exposure estimate derived from the national municipal sewage
         sludge aggregate risk assessment.

         The resulting sum of the uncertainty-adjusted, population-weighted surrogate doses
         from  POTW  effluent,  volatilization at  the POTW, incineration of  sludge,
         volatilization of land disposed shidge, and  groundwater contamination from land-
         disposed sludge are combined with the chemical-specific tenacity score to yield a
         fadlity-chemical-POTW release element

         fr Transfers Off-Site -  Some faculties report transfers to off-site faculties. As with
         POTW transfers, to assess exposure potential associated with off-site transfers, we
         must have information on the off-site facility location and some of its characteristics.
        To store  off-site facility information, we will  construct the data  file  OFFSITE."
         Variables necessary from the file are shown below.
     11TRIS JROD.OFFSTTEJTLE89 - This file is also part of the national report family of
  files. The full record layout is available from EPA.

                                        91
DRAFT REPORT - DO NOT CITE OR QUOTE

-------
Variable
DCN
ZIPCODE
TREAT
Comment
ID used for matching TRI facility
ZIP code of off-site facility
Type of treatment
Variable
RCRA-ID
BASIS?

Comment
RCRA ID number (if it has
one)
Basis/Method for estimating
quantify of ehemiyaj
transferred off-site

         We can match data in the RELEASE file to this file via the DCN (Document
         Control Number) variable. The ZIP code for the off-site facility to which chemicals
         are transferred is contained in the TRI data base.  The ZIP  code will serve, in
         conjunction with the ZIPCODE data file, to locate our facility on the BGREACH
         grid, as was described for locating POTWs. It should be noted that OSW and OPPT
         are jointly working on a tracking system to match TRI releases to the RCRIS data
         base.  If this  effort is completed before we implement the TRI Environmental
         Indicator, we may be able to use the fruits of that effort for more precise tracking
         of the off-site releases. Once we have located the off-site facility, we also need to
         know (a) the regulatory status of the unit to which the material is transferred and (b)
         the treatment/disposal technologies used by the off-site facility. The regulatory status
         of  the off-site units could be determined in a number of ways.   The TRI fonn
         requires the reporting facility to give the RCRA-ID number of the off-site facility to
         which the chemical is being transferred. We could assume that if such a number is
         reported, then the chemical  is being transferred  to a RCRA-regulated unit
         Otherwise, we will assume that it is a RCRA Subtitle D nonhazardous management
         unit

         The TRI forms also require the reporting facility to indicate the treatment/disposal
         method used at the off-site facility. Where this information is reported, it is stored
         as the TREAT variable in the OFFSTTE data file; the method reported will be
         assumed to be the treatment/disposal method employed by the off-site facility.  If
         this information is not reported (despite the requirement), we will have to assume
         a  distribution  of   treatment/disposal  methods,  based  on the  frequency  of
         treatment/disposal methods reported for that chemical Using this distribution, we
         will assign the  appropriate proportion   of the  release  to  each  reported
         treatment/disposal method.

         Once the treatment method is established, we can model exposure potential using the
         methods described above. Incinerators will be modeled by applying destruction and
         removal efficiencies from the TOX data file  and running the air model described in
         the Air Release section.  LandfiUing is treated the same as on-site land releases.
         Other treatment methods  employed at off-site  facilities  (storage, underground
         injection) are being  explored for possible incorporation into the indicators.
                                         92
DRAFT REPORT - DO NOT CITE OR QUOTE

-------
        The resulting sum of the uncertainty-adjusted, population-weighted surrogate doses
        from incineration, volatilization and groundwater exposures are combined with the
        chemical-specific toxicity score to yield a facility-chemical-off-site release element.

  Indicators Summation Process

        After the elements are calculated, all the elements can be combined in limitless ways.
  Figure 16 shows how flexible this approach can be in tracking indicator differentials over
  time.  Elements will be kept in a file each year  so comparisons can be quickly made with
  previous  years.  The elements can also be combined and evaluated in  other ways than
  annual comparisons.  The detailed calculations used to create elements allow computation
  of "subindicators" for individual chemicals, geographic regions, industry sectors, facilities, or
  exposure pathways. These subindicators, like the overall indicator, cannot be compared to
  some absolute level of concern, but could help identify the relative contribution to various
  components to the overall estimate of emission impacts.

  IX.    ISSUES FOR  FUTURE CONSIDERATION

        There are two general types of issues yet to be resolved:  specific methodological
  questions for the indicators developed to date, and development of additional indicators.
  The methodological questions associated with the indicators developed to date that still need
  to be resolved include the following:
        •     How to address additions/deletions to the TRI ghemieai list, anH whether to
              create new indicators when significant changes are made;

        •     How to include deposition of TRI rfiamfaai* into underground injection wells
              in the indicators;

        •     For noncaranogenic chemicals without RfDs, what specific WOE systems
              should be used  for neurotoxicity, reproductive toxidty, and other chronic
              toxicity endpoints;

        •     For offsite  transfers, how to better  match  TRI  transfers to particular
              treatment practices (e.g, which  TRI chemicals are sent to hazardous or
              nonhazardous waste management facilities; use of specific treatment practices
              at POTWs; and how to estimate the potential impact of non-landfill, non-
              incineration treatment types); and

        •     Using initial results of indicator computations, an examination of the impact
              of various exposure weights and their WOE modifiers.

        The possible development of indicators for acute human health effects and acute
  aquatic effects depends on improved toxicity and other data.  Li addition, as discussed in

                                         93
DRAFT REPORT - DO NOT CITE OR QUOTE

-------
I
i
o
s
     Figure 16
     Reporting Subindices with TRI Index Component Method
     Calculating Facility-Chemical-Media Increments Yields Unlimited Flexibility
S
I

2

3

4

5
I'
>  7
           8

           m
/*,
                   23
                Variable 1 values

                4   5   6   7   <
                w
                        M
                     u
                                M
                        /M
                        'o
                            /M
                               "
                        m.*-*
                      n.ii-7
                                *7.ii-«
                                      .ii-5
                         'm.H-5
                                  «.!!-<
                              M.H-J
                                      M.II-J
                              •"m.
                                       ii-J
                                                 M,
                                                   71
•m.w-2
    *3.n-l
                                              *5.
                                          *«.«-l
•*m.i
                                                  I,..
     I,.
                                                  I..
                                           I,.
                                            ...
                                                   n-2

                                                         .•.VAV.V

                                                         m
                    mo/Ter the choice of variables overall index sums to I.
                                             94

-------
   Section VII, EPA considered expanding the TRI Environmental Indicators to reflect indirect
   health and environmental impacts from TRI chemicals, such as global climate change, acid
   deposition, stratospheric ozone depletion, tropospheric ozone formation, and paniculate
   deposition.  While many of these impacts have  health-related effects, the complexity and
   uncertainty in modeling them may make it impossible to incorporate them into the present
   set of indicators.

   X.    CONCLUSION

         As an indication of improvements in environmental  quality  over time, the TRI
   Human Health and Ecological Indicators provide the EPA with a valuable tool to measure
   general trends related to impacts of TRI chemicals. They do not capture all environmental
   releases of concern,  and  thus changes in these indicators over time cannot be  used  to
   evaluate changes in other sources of environmental pollution. These indicators do, however,
   generally relate  changes  in releases  to relative changes in  chronic human health and
   ecological  impacts from a  large number  of toxic chemicals of concern to the  Agency.
   Importantly, the indicators also provide an ability to analyze the  relative contribution  of
   chemicals and industrial sectors to important changes in the indicators over time.
                                         93
T«> AUT WFPOWT - IX) NOT CITE OR OUOTE

-------
  XI.   REFERENCES
  Hahn, R.  and A.  McGartland.  1989. Hie political economy of instrument choice: an
        examination of the U.S. role in implementing the Montreal Protocol.  Northwestern
        University Law Review 83 (3): 597.
  O'Bryan, T.R. and R.H. Ross. 1988. Chemical Scoring System for ffp*?^ ?pfl ^rposure
        Identification. Journal of Toxicology and Environmental Health, 1:119-134.

  U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1985. Exposure to Airborne Contaminants
        Released from Land Disposal Facilities - A Proposed Methodology.  Prepared for
        the Office of Solid Waste by Environmental Science  and Engineering. Inc. ESE
        Document Number 85-527-0100-2140. August

  U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1986a.  Guidelines for Carcinogen Risk
        Assessment.  51 federal Register 33992 (September 24, 1986).

  U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1986b. Guidelines for Mutagenicitv Risk
        Assessment  51 Federal Register 34006 (September 24, 1986).

  U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1986c Report to Congress on the Discharge
        of Hazardous Wastes to Publicly Owned Treatment Works (the Domestic Sewage
        Study}. Office of Water Regulations and Standards, EPA/530-SW-86-004. February.

  U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1987a. Municipal Solid Waste Combustion
        Study Report to Congress.  Office of Solid Waste. EPA/530-SW-87-021a. June.

  U.S. FpvirQnmgT|tal Protection Agency (EPA). 1987b. GraphicfljExpflsure Modeling System
        ( GEMS) User's Guide. Prepared for the Office of Pesticides and Toxic Substances,
        Exposure Evaluation Division by General Sciences Corporation under Contract No.
        68023970. February.
  U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1987c. lute. KTfltcd Risk Information System
        Supportive  Documentation. Volume  1. AffPCTdffi  A-   Office of Health  and
        Environmental Assessment Office of Research and Development  EPA/600/8-
        86/032a. March.

  U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1988a. Methodology for Evaluating Potential
        Carcinopenicitv in Support of Repgrtable Quantity Adjustments Pursuant to
        CERCLA Section 102.
                                        96
DRAFT REPORT - DO NOT CITE OR QUOTE

-------
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1988b. Report to Congress:  Solid Waste
      Disposal in the United States. Volume 2.  April.

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1988c. National Survey of Solid Waste
      f Municipal) Landfill Facilities.    Office  of  Solid  Waste.  EPA/530-SW88-034.
      September.

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1988d. "Industrial Subtitle D Risk Screening
      Analysis Results." Prepared for the Office of Solid Waste by ICF, Inc., December
      30.

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency  (EPA).  1989. Proposed Amendments to the
      Guidelines for the Health Assessment  of  Suspect Developmental Toxicants.  54
      Federal Register 9386 (March 6, 1989).

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1990a. Exposure Factors Handbook.  Office
      of Health and Environmental Assessment.  EPA/600/8-89/043. March.

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1990b. Policy Options for Stabilizing Global
      Climate: Report to Congress.  Main Report  Prepared by the Office of Policy,
      Planning and Evaluation.  EPA Document No. 21P-20Q3.1. December.

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1992. User's Guide for the Industrial Source
      Complex fISf2^ Dispersion Models. Volume 2. Description of Model Algorithms.
      Prepared for the Office of Air Quality, Planning and Standards, Technical Support
      Division. March.
                                      97
              . no WOT CITE OR QUOTE

-------
            Appendix A





Survey of Ranking and Scoring Systems
                A-1

-------
 I.     Survey of EPA Scoring and Ranking Efforts

       Scoring and ranking of chemicals is not a new undertaking.  Numerous efforts have
 focussed on  categorizing and ranking chemicals  for a number of purposes.  The most
 common purpose is devising a  methodology to choose from among a vast  number of
 chemicals those that  merit further scrutiny.  The following is a review of sixteen EPA
 scoring and ranking systems that have been or are used by OTS and other Agency Offices.
 A. OTS Efforts

 1. Screening Methodology for Pollution Prevention Targeting
       I'SEPA (date unknown), Prepared for the Office of Toxic Substances

       The Office of Toxic Substances prepared a screening methodology as a tool  for
 targeting chemicals .or pollution prevention.  A three step scoring system, based on the
 toxicity (both potency and type of risk posed) and on the release/production ratio of the
 chemical, was used.  Several risk classifications were evaluated; within each classification,
 a chemical was given a preliminary score of 3, 2, or 1 for high, medium, or low concern,
 respectively. The first risk area evaluated was cancer potency.  All chemicals designated as
 B2 carcinogenic were given a preliminary score of 3 (high).  Oncogeniciry  received an
 additional weighting factor of 3 to arrive at a raw score for cancer potency. General chronic
 toxicity and ecotoxicity were scored; these scores were given an overall weighting factor of
 2.  Reproductive effects, neurotoxicity, and developmental toxicity were also scored, but
 these scores were given a weighting factor of 1. The raw scores for all four risk groups were
 added  together and multiplied by  the release/production ratio to arrive at a composite
 score.  For each chemical the composite score was calculated as:
                CSt - (Of- 3  * RDNt- 1 «• Cf- 2 «• £,• 2)
                                                        Production


where:

      CS;    «=     Composite score for chemical i
      Oj    ••     Oncogeniciry concern for chemical i
      RDNj e     Reproductive, developmental,neurotoxicity concern for chemical /
      Q     =     Chronic toxicity concern for chemical i
      E,     =     Ecological toxicity concern for chemical j
                                        A-2

-------
 This methodology was used for internal EPA chemical targeting.  It has not been, to our
 knowledge, publicly reviewed.

 Pros: Method is simple. Broadly accounts for potency and severity of risk posed.  Having
 three broad  categories of potency allows  the use of structure-activity and professional
 judgment  to score   chemicals  lacking extensive  lexicological  databases.    Includes
 consideration of both cancer and noncancer effects.

 Cons: Method groups chemicals very broadly, limiting the variation in potencies that can be
 expressed. Method ranks chemicals ordinally, not proportionately, which does not allow for
 accounting of the magnitude of differences among the chemicals.  Does  not have an
 exposure component.  Assumes that carcinogenic effects are more serious than reproductive
 effects.  To our knowledge, method has not been reviewed outside of the Agency.

 2. TSCA's TRI Chemical Risk Assessment Pre-screcniny Methodology
      USEPA (date unknown). Memo from the Office of Toxic Substances (date unknown)

      The objective of this exercise was to select the most likely candidates among TRI
 chemicals for possible regulation under TSCA.  Of the  309 TRI chemicals,  193 were
 eliminated outright because they were already being assessed or regulated by another EPA
 division, they were not subject to TSCA, or no reports of use were received by EPA.

      The remaining 116 chemicals were preliminarily ranked by exposure assessment and
 hazard  assessment  The two  assessments were used in concert  with the investigators'
 knowledge to judge which chemicals presented the most significant risks to human health.
 This group of roughly 20 chemicals received top priority for more extensive  and rigorous
 investigation, including exposure and hazard assessments, to determine which of them should
 be considered for regulation under TSCA.
      One hundred sixteen TRI chemicals were ranked using the Exposure Scoring System
for Existing Chemicals.  The system was used to rank each chemical in four pathways:
surface  water (drinking water), environmental (aquatic organisms), ambient  air,  and
groundwater.  These rankings were not combined  in a final ranking.   To perform the
rankings, two measures were estimated hi each pathway for each chemical.

      The first measure, potential of exposure, is a measure of the presence of the chemical
in the environment If the chemical is not expected to be released to a particular pathway.
it is assigned a score of "none" for no potential of exposure. Otherwise, if the chemical does
not exceed thresholds for physical and chemical properties (half-life, Henry's Law constant.
vapor pressure), it is assigned a "low" or "none". Those that are expected to be released in
a particular pathway and exceed the thresholds are assigned "high", "medium", or "low"
potential of exposure depending on the level of potential exposure that is calculated by the

                                       A-3

-------
 program. This calculation is a function of release and concentration levels at sites. Rough
 estimates are used if only partial information is available.
       The second measure, population, is a score of the number of people that might be
 exposed to the chemical.  It is calculated for each pathway and chemical. The system simply
 adds up the populations surrounding production sites, or if exposure mostly occurs during
 industrial use, extrapolates exposed populations from the number of industrial use  sites.
 The final "high/medium/low/none" score is based on population thresholds.

 The final score for each pathway area uses the following determination matrix:
Final Exposure Score

Exposure
Measure

High
Medium
Low
None
Population Measure
High
High
High
Medium
None
Medium
High
Medium
Low
None
Low
Medium
Low
Low
None
None
None
None
None
None
       Preliminary Hazard Ranldnv
       EPA intended to develop a Hazard Ranking System to rank the TRI chemicals based
on measures of toxirity.  However, only a preliminary search system was developed. It
allowed the user to score all TRI chemicals that fit given criteria, e.g. all those with an RQ
over 1000 IDS. This system was used to develop simple lis's of high toxicity chemical groups.
Using  this  information and their best judgement, the pre-screeners selected roughly 30
chemicals which they determined to be the most hazardous.

       Note that  this ranking system has only been used  within EPA's Office of Toxic
Substances and has not been publicly reviewed.

Pros: Exposure  screening includes four pathways of exposure.  Modelling approach is used
to evaluate exposure  potential.  Population surrounding TRI site  is also  included as a
measure of exposure potential
                                        A-4

-------
 Cons: Although modelling is used for exposure evaluation, the results are used to group the
 chemicals into low, medium and high exposure potential groups. Pathway-specific scores are
 not combined, thus requiring further judgments to evaluate overall exposure potential of a
 chemical. To our knowledge, method has not been reviewed outside of the Agency.


       O'Bryan, T. R. and Ross, R. H. (1988) Journal of Toxicology and Environmental
       Health, Vol (1): 119-134

       This system was developed by the Office of Toxic Substances and by the Oak Ridge
 National Research Laboratory. It combines expert judgement and objective scores to screen
 chemicals for further investigation  for potential  regulation under TSCA.  Chemicals are
 scored in eleven areas:

       Oncogenicity                   Genotoxitity
       Developmental toxicity          Acute and chronic mammalian toxicity
       Aquatic toxicity                Bioconcentration
       Chemical production volume    Occupational exposure
       Consumer'exposure             Environmental exposure
       Environmental fate

       Scores are assigned by and reconciled between two independent experts.  While the
 scores are based on delineated parameters, they can be adjusted in accordance with expert
 opinion. Scores for  oncogeniciry, genotoxicity, developmental toxkity and the exposure
 measures are based on weight-of-evidence. Scores for the others are based on thresholds
 (e.g. a bioconcentration score of 9 is assigned for BCF levels above  1000.) Tables 1 through
 3 in our August 26  memorandum  delineates the numerical ranges  thy* comprise these
 scoring methods.  In some cases, structure activity relationships were used to supplement
 available data.  Individual scores  generally range from 0 to 10 and are intended for
 comparison across areas and chemicals but not  as weights for the calculation of a final
 chemical score. In fact, the methodology does not develop a final score. Instead, the scores
 from all eleven areas are presented  as a score profile to which expert judgement is applied
 to determine whether a  chemical  presents a great enough hazard to undergo further
 investigation  under TSCA.  Note that  this  methodology has been published  in a peer-
 reviewed journal

 Pros: System considers a large number of health endpoints (cancer, developmental toxicity.
genotoxicity)  in the evaluation.  Makes use of both available data and expen judgment.
allowing for coverage of a large number of chemicals. Published in a peer-reviewed journal.

Cons: System does not  combine scores for overall judgment on relative toxicity of a
chemical In fact, the method explicitly states that scores can be used  for comparisons
across areas, but are  not intended as weights for combination into a  final score.  Method
does not include an exposure component.


                                       -\-5

-------
 4. CERCLA Section 104 Third Priority List* of Hazardous Substances that will be the
 Subject of ToTJcologv Profiles
             USEPA 1990, Prepared for the Office of Toxic Substances, February

       EPA is using this system to select and rank the 275 most hazardous chemicals from
 among all substances found at National Priority List sites.  Three  principal  criteria
 determine how hazardous a chemical  is:  1) frequency of occurrence at NPL sites, 2)
 chemical toxicity, and 3) potential for human exposure. Measures of these criteria are used
 to calculate site and exposure ranks for each chemical, which determine the chemical's final
 ranking.

       Frequency of occurrence is measured as the percent of sites at which the chemical
 is known to occur.  Toxicity  of the chemical is measured by its Reportable Quantity  (the
 lowest of the mammalian acute and chronic toxicity  RQs was used.)  When these ratings
 were  not available, the chemical was assigned an RQ equivalent by the EPA Structure
 Activity Team. A site index  was calculated for each  chemical as:


                    Frequency of occurrence (percent)
       Site Index  «	
                                      RQ

 The chemicals were assigned ordinal site ranks beginning with 1 for the chemical with the
 highest site index, 2 for the chemical with the next highest site index, etc.

       The measurement of  chemical exposure is considerably more  involved. First, an
 exposure index value is calculated for each chemical  as:

       Exposure index «= WCR + WFR + SCR  + SFR + (2 x BPR)

where:

       WCR   =    the geometric mean of chemical concentration in water at all sites
                   where the chemical occurred, ranked ordinally
       WFR   •    percent of sites at which the chemical occurred in water / percent of
                   sites at which the chemical occurred in any media, ordinally ranked
       SCR    »    the geometric mean of chemical concentration in soil at all sites where
                   the chemical occurred, ranked ordinally
       WFR   =    percent  of sites at  which the chemical occurred in soil / percent of
                   sites at which the chemical occurred in any media, ordinally ranked
       BPR    •    boiling point of the chemical, ordinally ranked
                                       A-6

-------
 For WCR, the geometric mean as indicated is calculated for each chemical. The chemicals
 are then ranked ordinally according to this value; WCR equals the rank assigned to the
 chemical.

       This method holds for each of the five variables listed above.  Note that boiling point
 values are used as a correlate of potential for air migration.

       Because NPL site concentration data are not available for many chemicals, a second
 methodology to calculate exposure was developed to complement the first This method
 takes advantage of the fact that a chemical's status as a chemical  of concern gives some
 indication of the chemical's exposure potential  Thus chemicals were ranked ordinally by
 the number of NPL sites at which they were listed as chemicals of concern. The lesser of
 this measure and the exposure index described above was used as the exposure rank.

       Finally, these ranks were adjusted based on existing exposure information compiled
 in six data bases: NRC, AHE, DOT/HMIS, NEXIS, NHATS and RTS. Because of source
 and methodological disparities between the databases, the data they contained were not in
 themselves useful.  However, because the simple occurrence of a chemical in one of the
 databases implies some  degree of exposure, the number of databases in which a chemical
 was listed was used to determine the adjustments made to the exposure ranks.  (Note that
 because  the first four  databases  contained  data from overlapping sources, multiple
 occurrences of a chemical in these databases was taken as a single listing.) Hie adjustment
 was made as follows. The exposure rank was multiplied by a factor of 0.9 if a chemical was
 listed in only one database, by 0.8 if in two databases, at|rf by 0.7 if in three databases.
       The site and exposure ranks of each were combined using the following formula:

       Hazard Index « 2/3 x Site Rank  +   1/3 x Exposure Rank

The weights reflect the fact that the site rank represents two of the three principal criteria
mentioned initially, while the  exposure rank represents  only one.  The chemicals  were
assigned final ordinal hazard ranks beginning with 1 for the chemical with the lowest hazard
index, 2 for the chemical with the next lowest site index, etc.

Pros: Uses a peer-reviewed, well-established measure of relative toxicity (RQ) for toxiciry
ranking.  Combines all measures (toxicity, exposure, frequency of occurrence) into a single
index for each chemical

Cons: Exposure component relies on availability  of site-specific concentration  data for
exposure potential evaluation, which is not  available for our purposes.  Toxiciry and
exposure ranked ordinally,  so that  proportional  differences in potency  and  exposure
potential are not captured. Use of RQ also does not capture severity of effects.
                                       A-7

-------
 5. Toxic Chemical Release Inventory Risk Screening Guide
       (USEPA 1989, Prepared by the Office of Toxic Substances, Volume 1, July)

       The Risk Screening Guide serves to explain both the meaning of Toxic Release
 Inventory (TRI) data and ways of interpreting that data.  Volume One of the document is
 divided into five sections.  The first section details the advent of the TRI program as well
 as the nature of, limitations on, and modes of access to the TRI  data. Section Two details
 and explains the elements of risk assessment. Section Three presents the guide's qualitative
 methodology for risk  assessment  for  each exposure route, incorporating the  elements
 detailed in Section Two.  Section Four proposes  options for acting on the results of the
 assessment and Section Five lists a host of resources that can be used to answer any further
 questions.

       The Risk Screening System presented in Section Three merits special attention. The
 system centers itself around qualitative measurements of different chemical-specific and site-
 specific factors.  The user of the system first selects an exposure route (either  air,  land,
 surface water or POTW).  The next step is to record the  location of release, the zones of
 effect (inner and outer), and the population of interest.  The user then delineates different
 "exposure factors" which depend upon the exposure route chosen (Le. wind direction for air
 or bioconcentration factors for surface water). The scores for these factors depends upon
 the factor being discussed. For example, a water discharge receives a"+" if it flows to a
 small lake or stream and a"-" if it flows to a large body of water.  Next, the user should
 select a toxic measure for each chemical  from among a set of measures presented in
 Appendix A  (discussed below).   The  user selects the lowest ranking among all of the
 different toxicological ranks.  Next, the quantity of release should then be listed as either
 "high," "moderate," or low" through the use of  data presented in Appendix C  The user
 compares the releases as recorded in TRI to either the table of median emissions or by to
 local  releases.   Exposure  factors should then  be recorded as detailed in Appendix D
 (discussed below), including high/low environmental transformation, release rate, and anv
 other factors which may seem relevant

       The result of the risk screening system is  a profile of scores. From this information
it is possible to assess the relative severity of industrial practices  in the area. The user can
consult local experts in order to get a feel for the individual risk.

       Volume Two includes appendices which provide data and examples to facilitate the
assessment process. Appendix A ranks toxicological information on chemicals according to
the following scheme:
                                        A-8

-------
Toxicological
Measure
TPQ
(Ibs.)
RQ
(Ibs.)
RfD
(mg/kg-day)
WQC
(mg/L)
Cancer Potency
Group I
1 10 100
1 10 100
< 0.01
< 1
All
Group 2
500
1,000
0.01 - 0.1
1-10

Group 3
1,000 10,000
5,000
>= 1.0
>= 10

These ranking boundaries are used for each of the RQs (aquatic, chronic, acute, and
carcinogenic), RfDs (inhalation and oral), and WQCs (chronic and acute).

       Appendix B aids users in assessing air releases. It discusses a generic air modelling
       i which uses the Industrial Source Complex Long-Term (ISCLT) model It provides
two graphs which display the results of generic model runs, the first plotting concentration
versus distance from the release site for various stack heights, and the second plotting
concentration versus distance from the release site  for various durations  of release.
Multiplying data points on the graph by the actual release quantities provides an estimate
of the concentration at different distantly of concern.
      Appendix C assists users in assessing the severity of chemical releases. It provides
information on median  chemical  release data and  actual TRI chemical  release data
(classified by SIC code) to assist in m«tipm£ a "severe," "moderate," or low" score to the
quantity of release (see the discussion on the Risk Screening System in Volume One).

      Appendix D provides information on environmental fate characteristics of different
chemicals to provide rankings.  The characteristics used to evaluate fate in different
environmental media and their rankings are listed below:
                                       A-9

-------
Factor
Volatilization
Leaching &
Soil Mobility
Bioconccntration
Air Abiotic
Persistence
Water Abiotic
Persistence
Air Biotic
Persistence
Water Biotic
Persistence
Biological
Treatment

Measure
Henry's Constant
(atm-m3/mol)
Log,o (K.)
BCF
Atmospheric
Half-life
Aquatic
Half-lives
Degradation Rate
Degradation Rate
Rate of removal in
bio* treatment
High Concern
( + )
£ 10'2
 4.5
<. 250
£ 1/2 day
£ 1/2 day
1 to 7 days
1 to 7 days
rapidly removed:
-P for phys/chem
-B for biodegr.
The measure for water abiotic persistence steins from the longest of the hydrolysis, direct
photolysis, and indirect photoreacnon.

      Appendix H presents and describes the Roadmap database as well as other databases
that contain information on Section 313 chemicals.  The Roadmap database includes the
following information for each chemical in tabular form:

      •      Federal regulations that apply to the chemical, along with relevant regulatory
             levels

      •      States that have drinking water standards or recommendations, along with
             relevant regulatory levels, as reported in the Federal-State Toxicology and
             Regulatory Alliance Committee (FSTRAC)

      •      States that have ambient air information, including ambient air standards or
             guidelines,  pollutant research  information, source  testing information,
             monitoring data, emissions inventory information, and permitting information,
             as reported in the National Air Toxics Information Clearinghouse (NATICH).
                                       A-10

-------
       •     States that have water monitoring information, as reported in the Storage and
             Retrieval Systems (STORET).

       •     General sources of information, including on-line data bases, and documents
             from EPA and other sources.

This appendix includes expanded descriptions of these information sources. ROADMAPS
has since been updated to include additional data. Its "Carrinogenicity Matrix" inclu  *s
results from the National Toxicology Program bioassay tests (either positive or negative .or
carcinogenicity);  the  National  Toxicology  Program's  carcinogenicity  ranking;  the
cartinogenicity rating assigned by the International Agency for Research on Cancer; the
EPA's carcinogenicity rating; and the GENETOX carcinogenicity evaluation. It also now
contains a "Health and Environmental Effects" table which indicates whether a chemical is
at a level of concern for heritable  mutations, developmental toxicity, reproductive toxicity,
acute toxicity, and chronic toxicity, as well as the references for  this data (among EPA
databases).

       The remaining appendices contain other information to guide a use through the risk
assessment process.  Appendix E  presents information concerning the different types of
releases, the release frequency, existing controls, and estimation methods for the releases.
Appendix F presents a case study using the risk screening method (described below).
Appendix I presents a sample EPA Hazardous Substance Fact Sheet Each of these sheets
discusses  one  of the Section 313  chemicals, providing information on typical modes of
exposure, means of protection, proper handling, etc Appendix J provides an example of an
EPA  Chemical Profile which provides physiochemical information on  the  Section 313
chemicals and which also discusses topics covered on the EPA Hazardous Substance Fact
Sheet

Pros:  Appendix A of the Risk Screening Guide allows grouping of chemicals according to
any of five measures of toxicity; using alternative measures of toxicity allows a larger number
of chemicals to be scored than if only a single measure was used.  Appendix D  groups
chemicals into groups of "high concern"  and low  concern" based on environmental fate
characteristics.  The Risk Screening Guide has been peer reviewed and is published.

Cons: The grouping approach allows only broad characterization of toxicity and exposure,
and does not consider severity or potency. Exposure evaluation does not explicitly consider
populations (although this can be considered on a site-by-site basis).
                                       A-ll

-------
 B. Other Agency Scoring Systems that Use TRI Data

 1. Targeting Pollution Prevention Opportunities Using the 1988 Tories Release Inventory
       USEPA 1990, Prepared for the Office of Policy, Planning and Evaluation, Pollution
       Prevention D  ision, September 29)

       OPPE's Pollution Prevention Division (PPD) developed a method to rank chemicals
 and facilities based on total volume of a subset of TRI chemicals.  A list of high-priority
 chemicals was established for air, land, and water releases based on toxicity and exposure
 potential (based on the mobility of the chemical) in the TRI Risk Screening Guide.  After
 a list was established for each media, the release volume of those chemicals became the
 ranking instrument.  While no exposure-based adjustments were  actually made to the
 rankings, possible methods for such adjustments were discussed in some detail in the text.
 The population considered at risk for each pathway varies by the mobility of the chemical.
 Thus,  only  populations relatively close to the facility are considered for low mobility
 chemicals, while at greater distances are included for high mobility chemicals. The table
 below shows how  distance from  facility and chemical persistence  affect PPD choice of
 populations. PPD also proposed a method to adjust for the exposure  potential of aquatic
 ecosystems for discharges to surface waters. Similar to human populations within circles of
 given radii from the facility,  the stream volume acts as a proxy for aquatic exposure.  The
 water-volume proxy assumes that densities and types of  aquatic organisms are  constant
 among all streams and are  strongly positively correlated  with total volume of water.
 Proposed methods for accounting for ecological risk from discharges to other media were
 resource intensive and did not lend themselves to computer automation.

       This  method was used for internal EPA chemical evaluation and  has not  been
 publicly reviewed.

             Concentric Ring Radius From Facility For Population Count

Pathway
Point and Non-Point Air
Release
Underground and Land
Releases
Surface Water Releases
Mobility of Chemical
High
4 miles
1 mile
15 miles
Medium
2 miles
1/2 mile
10 miles
Low - No Data
1 mile
1/4 mile
5 miles
Note: Surface water distances are downstream distances from the facility.
                                       A-12

-------
 Pros for exposure evaluation: Combines Risk Screening Guide environmental fate groupings
 with simple rules for defining the size of the potentially exposed population.  This is*a
 straightforward  approach that  allows quick,  rough weighting of emissions  by potential
 exposure.

 Cons for exposure  evaluation:  Does not consider factors  affecting  differences in media
 concentrations among sites as pan of exposure evaluation. Selection of distances to consider
 for exposed population is somewhat arbitrary.
       USEPA 1991, Prepared for the Office of Policy Analysis, February 4

       The Office of Policy Analysis developed a population weighted hazard index that
 ranked water bodies and POTWs reported in TRI.  OPA used Reponable Quantities as
 proxies for three risk  classes for which ranks were provided.  Cancer potency, chronic
 toxicity, and aquatic toxicity were treated separately in deriving indexes and ranks.  For each
 risk class, each chemical release was divided by the RQ for that risk class. The weighted
 releases were summed  over a selected set such as state or county to arrive at an unadjusted
 index.

 The equation for calculating the unadjusted Hazard Index is:
where:
      H,
      R,
      RQ.
Hazard Index for set i
Pounds released of chemical x
Reportable Quantity for chemical
      For each state or county, unadjusted indices were calculated for cancer, chronic, and
aquatic toxicity. The indices for cancer potency and chronic toxicity were adjusted using the
size of the exposed population to reflect human exposure potential:
                                       A-13

-------
where:

      P     = Persons per square mile in the county of release R,

      Aquatic toxicity indices were not adjusted using this method due to inadequate data
about the size of the exposed aquatic population. Thus, the OPA work does not address the
difficult question of  adjusting indices  based  on exposure  potential to aquatic life and
habitats.

      For releases to POTWs, the analysis addressed the hazard of POTW residuals as well
as effluent.  Average removal rates were applied to chemicals released to POTWs. Standard
partitioning rates were applied to the portion removed by the POTW. Hazard indices were
then generated for each partitioning pathway (sludge, volatilization) within the POTW.

      This methodology was used within the EPA and has  not been publicly reviewed.

Pros: Uses peer-reviewed, publicly available toxicity measure (RQs) that are available for
a fairly large percentage of TRI chemicals. Also considers county population density as a
surrogate measure of exposure potential

Cons: Does not consider environmental fate of chemicals in exposure evaluation.  Use of
RQs does not include consideration of severity of effects.  RQs  do incorporate some
consideration of potency, but groupings according to potency are broad.

3. Review of Rgrion VII TRI Strategy
      USEPA1991, Memo from Dermont Bouchard, EPA Region Vn to Loren Hall, OTS,
      July  9

      Region Vn is developing  strategies  to utilize  TRI data.   One strategy ranks
geographic areas by human health and aquatic ecological risks to determine areas most in
need of investigation for further enforcement, remediation, technical assistance, or other
purposes.  The human health risk analysis, which is separate from the ecological risk
analysis, is measured by relative daily toxic loadings (RDTLs). For  a given site, an RDTL
is estimated for the following categories:
                                      A-14

-------
       Non-cancer acute toxicity by ingestion
       Chronic inhalation cancer
       Chronic ingestion cancer
       Chronic inhalation non-cancer
       Chronic ingestion non-cancer

       A toxicity measure (for example, the inverse of the RfD for chronic ingestion non-
cancer) is multiplied by the site loading to the appropriate media (surface water emission
in this case) for each category. These RDTLs are not to be added, unless they are added
within a category across the various chemicals present at a site.  Because RDTL units are
different for each category, they are comparable across sites only within categories.

       Aquatic ecological risk for a site is determined in a similar manner.  A multi-trophic
analysis is used to identify an LCM that is the lowest, most protective value for the site. The
RDTL is calculated as:

RDTL =     chemical loading volume X  LQo /  stream volume

Total risk for a site is the sum of the RDTLs across chemicals released at that site.

       The Region Vn TRI strategy is currently under peer review within the EPA.

Pros: Considers acute and chronic toxic endpoints and multiple exposure pathways.  The
toxicity measures used (RfDs, q*. WQQ reflect the relative potencies of chemicals.  For
ecological risk, more than one trophic level is considered.

Cons: Scores are not combined across sites for a single chemical index; however, scores may
be combined within a single site. The  human health evaluation categories do not consider
environmental fate or population exposure potential This system is oriented more toward
identifying problem sites than in characterizing overall risk from all sites.

C. OSWER Scoring and Pa
  fffl*[flfrfl ^flffMllP SvsteHis Flinl Rote
      55 Federal Register No. 241, pp. 51532-51667, December 14, 1990
      The Hazard Ranking System (HRS) is the principal maehankm used by the EPA to
place sites on the National Priorities List (NPL).  It provides a methodology for scoring a
site based on various site characteristi :«.  It incorporates information representing four
exposure pathways: ground water, surtax water, soil and air. If the site's score exceeds an
established threshold, the site qualifies for the NPL
                                       A-15

-------
              Ranking Score
 The hazard ranking score is calculated as:

 HRS «= (Sv + S2W +  S2.  + S2.)"2

       where:

             S     =      is the scores for each of the four pathways delineated below.

       Using the root-mean-square calculation, low migration pathways scores yield a low
 HRS. However, the HRS score could be relatively high even if only one pathway score was
 high. This is an important requirement for HRS scoring because some extremely dangerous
 sites pose threats through only one migration pathway.

       While the scoring system for each pathway is quite sophisticated, the pathway scores
 follow this general methodology:

 Likelihood of Release x Quantity of waste  at the site x Measure of toxicity x Measure of
 exposure

 The pathway scoring systems demonstrate how toxicity and exposure characteristics  can be
 scored (le. weighted). They are much more sophisticated than ordinal scoring systems that
 implicitly weight characteristics without any underlying justification.

       Gronnd Water Migration Pathway

       The pathway score  is the product of the following three categories (divided by a
 scaling factor of 82,500) for the aquifer and contaminant yielding the highest pathway score.

 Likelihood of Release      X     Waste Characteristics     X Targets _
Highest of:                     Score of [(Score of          Nearest well score +
Observed release = 550         Toxicity score and           Weighted Population +
      or                       Mobility score) x            Resources score +
Potential to release »           Weighted Hazardous waste      Wellhead score
 Contaminant Score x            quantity]
 (Net precipitation score +
 Depth to aquifer score +
 Travel time score)
      The scores for these individual components are a«ign«d based on conditions set by
the Rule.  For example,  the  contaminant score is 10 if a liner is not present in the

                                       A- 16

-------
 containment system, 9 if one is present.  The toxicity score is the highest of 1) chronic
 toxicity score based on ranges for RfDs, 2) carcinogenicity score based on ranges for human
 carcinogenicity slope factors and weight-of-evidence, and 3) acute toxicity score based on
 ranges for oral LDso> dermal LDso and various LC^. Mobility is scored based on ranges
 for water solubility and the distribution coefficient (which is based on  soil type) of the
 contaminant. Table 1 of our August 26 memorandum delineates the numerical ranges that
 compose this scoring method.

       The numerous inputs for the groundwater pathway analysis include both chemical-
 and site-specific measures. Many of these measures are not available for the sites listed on
 the TRI (for example, chemical waste containment conditions or the characteristics of the
 geology of surrounding strata.)  The following list delineates those  measures that are
 available for many of the TRI chemicals and sites:

       Chronic toxicity (human) RfD
       Human carcinogenicity slope factor
       Human carcinogenicity weight-of-evidence
       Oral LD jo
       Dermal LDM
       Dust or mist LQo
       Gas or vapor
       Water solubility
       ^distribution
       Quantity or volume of waste
       Population
       Net precipitation
       Depth to the aquifer
       Nearest well
       Surface Water Migration Pfltfr'BY

       There are two components for likelihood of release, overland/flood and groundwater
to surface water.  Each is the higher of an observed or potential release. The component
that yields the highest score when multiplied by  the sum of the threat  scores is  the
likelihood of release that is used in the HRS score for this pathway.  Threats are composed
of three categories: drinking water, human food chain, and environmental.  The score of
each threat is the product of the waste characteristics and targets for that threat.

       As with  the  groundwater migration pathway, surface water migration pathway is
based  on scoring different conditions regarding site, pathway, environmental, chemical.
quantity, and population characteristics. The internal scores are used as weights, not ordinal
ranks,, for these parameters. The methodology is designed so that worst case condition*
determine the final HRS  rank.  Thus if two exposure routes within a media migrai.nr.

                                       A-17

-------
 pathway exist for a given site, the most damaging route (as scored) is used to calculate the
 rank. For example, if the risk of exposure through drinking water is worse than that through
 fish consumption, the surface water score for the site will be based on risks from drinking
 water.

       The surface water migration pathway scoring system utilizes a combined rating factor
 to score combinations of toxicity and persistence of a chemical.  The factor matrix scores
 twenty four combinations yielding scores that range eight orders of magnitude.

       Like the analysis of the groundwater pathway, the surface water pathway analysis
 incorporates  many measures that are not available for the sites listed on the TRI (for
 example, the area over which a chemical drains into the surrounding environment.) The
 following list delineates those measures that are available for many of the TRI chemicals
 and sites:

       Quantity or volume of waste
       Chronic toxicity (human) RfD
       Human carcinogenicity slope factor
       Human carcinogenicity weight-of-evidence
       OralLDjo
       Dermal LD jo
       Dust or mist LCjo
       Gas or vapor LCjo
       Half-life in water from combined effects of:
             hydrolysis
             biodegradation
             photolysis
             volatilization
      Stream volume in cubic feet per second
      BCF
      EPA chronic and acute Ambient Water Quality Criteria
      EPA chronic and acute Ambient Aquatic Tjfa Advisory Concentrations
      Population

      Air Migration Pathway

      The methodology for this pathway considers gas releases and paniculate releases
separately. A site which has both kinds of releases is a««e"«i an air pathway score based
on whichever kind of release poses the higher risk (as determined by this methodology.)
As with the two pathways described above, a release score is based either on an observed
release, if present, or on the potential of the site to release. The release score is multiplied
by the waste characteristic score and  the target score to yield the overall pathway score.
                                       A-18

-------
       The air water migration pathway methodology is based on scoring different conditions
 regarding site, pathway, environmental, chemical, quantity,  and population characteristics.
 Specifically, the waste characteristic score comprises measures of toxicity, mobility,  and
 quantity of the chemical released.  The target score comprises measures of the nearest
 individual, surrounding population, natural resources and sensitive environments. Many of
 the criteria on which scores of these qualities are based are not appropriate for the TRI
 indicator methodology (e.g. acreage of a nearby sensitive wetland environment.) However,
 many physical and  chemical properties of the chemicals are used  as criteria to measure
 toxicity,  mobility, and migration potential.   The numerical ranges or these  criteria are
 presented in our August 26 memorandum.

       As with the groundwater and surface water migration pathways, internal scores of the
 air migration pathway are used as weights,  not ordinal ranks, in  the calculation of the
 pathway score.  In  addition, as  with the other pathways, the air pathway methodology is
 designed so that worst case conditions determine the final HRS rank.

       Like the  analyses of the first two pathways, the air migration pathway analysis
 incorporates many  measures that are not available for the sites listed on the TRI  (for
 example, containment measures in effect and their degree of effectiveness.) The following
 list delineates those measures that are available for many of the TRI chemicals and sites:

       Vapor pressure
       Henry's constant
       Quantity or volume of waste
       Chronic toxicity (human) RfD
       Human cardnogenicity slope factor
       Human cardnogenicity weight-of-evidence
       Oral LD„
       Dermal LDM
       Dust or mist LCjo
       Gas or vapor LCjo
       Population

       Note that this ranking system has been published in the Federal Register and has
been publicly reviewed.

Pros: A reviewed and published method for evaluating and  ranking hazardous waste sites.
Evaluates four exposure pathways and adds the scores to yield a single site  score.
Considers many relevant site and chemical characteristics when scoring exposure. Toxicity
score  is  based  on  highest of cancer,  noncancer and acute toxicity subscores, thereby
incorporating consideration of a range of health endpoints. Scores are used as weights, not
ranks, so magnitude of exposure and toxicity can be considered.
                                       A-19

-------
 Cons: Exposure evaluation requires much more detailed site-specific data than are available
 for TRI sites.

 2. Application of the Hazard Ranking System to the Prioritization of Organic Compounds
 Identified at Hazardous Waste Remedial Action Sites
       Hallstedt,  P. A., Puskar, M. A., and  Levine, S.  P (1986) Hazardous  Waste and
       Hazardous Materials, Vol (3)2, pp. 221-232

       This system ranks chemicals by relative risk to target those chemicals that are of
 highest concern with respect to hazardous waste cleanup and the  reduction of hazards to
 human health.  The authors' measure of relative risk incorporates  the methodology of the
 first (unrevised) EPA Hazard Ranking System to score chemical toxicity and persistence.

 The risk formula that determines the ranking score is straightforward:

       Score = Measure of Hazard X Exposure

       The  measure  of  hazard is based  on  a  chemical's  toxicity and  persistence
 characteristics. Each characteristic is ranked from 0 to 3,3 representing the highest oro>r
 of toxicity or persistence. The methodologies underlying these rankings are referenced and
 can be explored if necessary.  The overall measure of hazard reflects a synergistic effect
 between toxicity and persistence and is summarized in the following table:
Measure of Hazard


Toxicity


0
1

2
3
Persistence
0
0
3

6
9
1
0
6

9
12
2
0
9

12
15
3
0
12

15
18
      Exposure is measured as the percentage of the sample sites that release a chemical
weighted by the concentration of each release. Thus, exposure is not an absolute measure
of population exposure but a relative measure that is a function of the sample of sites that
is used. Concentration of release was used in lieu of volume of release, because data on
the latter was unavailable.

      Note that this methodology has been published in a peer-reviewed journal.
                                       A-20

-------
 Pros: Simple, straightforward assignment of chemicals to categories based on toxiciry and
 persistence.  Provides relative  ranks  of chemicals based on  toxicity-persistence matrix.
 Allows for categorization of large number of chemicals, based on available data, SAR, and
 Best Professional Judgment  Has been published in peer review journal.

 Cons: Broad groupings do not permit refined accounting of relative toxiciry or persistence
 of chemk-iS. Exposure component inappropriate for our purposes, since it considers only
 the frequency  of occurrence of  chemicals, and  not  their concentrations  or  volumes.
 Populations exposed are not considered.


 D. Office of Water Scoring and Ranking Systems

 1. A Ranking System for Clean Water Act Section 307fa) List of Priority Pollutants
       USEPA 1985, July 3 (Office unknown)

       This methodology was developed to determine which chemicals should be added to
 or subtracted from the  Priority Pollutants List, a list of chemicals that pose the greatest
 hazard to human health  and the environment  nationwide  in  surface water bodies.
 Chemicals are list candidates if they are either very toxic or exposed to a large population.
 This system does not attempt to rank chemicals, but simply provides the decision rule for
 inclusion or exclusion in the list However, because the chemicals are scored in the process
 of determining exclusion or inclusion, ***** system is relevant to the ranking discussion. It
 is unknown whether this methodology has been peer-reviewed or made available for public
 comment.

       To evaluate toxiciry, the following five categories are considered, followed by the
 variables considered in each category:

 1) Aquatic Toxiciry
       acute (LCjo), chronic (MATC)
2) Mammalian Toxiciry
       acute oral (LDM). acute dermal (LDW), chronic/sub-chronic (LDLo and TDLo)
3) Human Health
       Evidence of cartinogeniciry, mutagenicity and teratogenicity
4) BioaccMtMi^ation
       BCF, BAF, Log P
5) Environmental Persistence
       environmental half-life, hydrolysis rate, Henry's constant, KD value
      Because the variables in a category are often well-correlated, they are considered
together to avoid biasing the system by considering the same topic twice. A score is
                                       A-21

-------
 developed for each category by considering the most potent effect of any of the variables
 in that category.  For example, the scoring system for Aquatic Toxicity is:

             Acute (LCM)       Chronic (MATC)
 Score       (mg/L1)                   (mg/L)   	
 12           <0.1                      <0.01
 10           0.1  to 1.0                 0.01 to 0.1
 5           1.0  to 10.0                0.1 to 1.0
 3           10.0 to 100                1.0 to 10.0
 0           > 100                     > 10
 •                 Insufficient information

       The values of the scores assigned to each category were based on expert judgment.
 The scoring systems are similar for the other  categories.  One of the advantages of this
 method is that data gaps in one variable may be filled by data from another within the same
 category. Note that in the Human Health category, weight of evidence classes, not numeric
 measures (such as q*), are assigned score values.  If the sum of the scores over  the five
 categories is greater than  10, then the chemical is listed.


       National exposure potential is evaluated in  a similar manner.   The following
 categories are individually scored on a scale of 0 to 10 based on numerical thresholds as
 above:

 1) Amount of discharge nationwide (metric tons per year)
 2) Number of sites of discharge having detectable concentrations
 3) Frequency of detection in ambient waters (percent)
 4) Frequency of detection in aquatic sediments (percent)
 5) Frequency of detection in industrial or municipal effluents (percent)

       If the sum  of the scores  over the five categories is greater than 10, then the chemical
 should be listed.

 Pros:  Considers a range  of acute  and chronic toxicities.   Includes  persistence and
 bioaccumulation.  Allows for more than one measure to be used to rank a chemical within
 one category, thus allowing a wider range of chemicals to be scored. Allows use of expert
judgment to fill in data gaps.

 Cons:  Toxicity ranks are ordinal, not proportional Since this system was not intended for
 site-specific use, it is limited in its consideration of exposure potential; exposure potential
 is  based  only  on environmental  fate  properties of  the chemicals and frequency-  m
 occurrence.
                                       A-22

-------
2. Screening Procedure for Chemicals qf Importance to the Office of Water
       USEPA 1986, Prepared by the Office of Health and Environmental Assessment,
       November 14

       This  screening method was developed by ORD  for  the  Office  of  Water  to
differentiate quickly and inexpensively between higher and lower risk chemicals so that the
Office could set priorities for more intensive review of a small set of chemicals.  Each
chemical is identified as having "high", "low" or "unknown" toxicity and "high", "low"  or
"unknown" exposure.  Chemicals are categorized using this matrix:
Rank Categories
Exposure
High
Low
Unknown
Toxicity
High
1
3
3
Low
2
4
4
Unknown
2
4
4
       A fifth and  lowest category is reserved for  chemicals that are clearly not an
environmental problem. Chemicals in this category must either 1) have a half-life of less
than a few minutes and not be highly toxic (acute only), 2) be easily treatable, or 3) have
not been shown to be toxic at high concentrai
      The criteria for labeling a chemical as having "high" toxicity is different depending
on the exposure pathway and exposed population. For example, a chemical exposed to
human populations is "highly" toxic if it is a definite, probable or possible carcinogen, or it
is developmental^ toxic. A chemical exposed to aquatic life populations is "highly" toxic if
     <  100 mg/1 or chronic toxicity <  1 mg/L
      The criteria for labeling a chemical as having "high" exposure is also different
depending on the exposure pathway and exposed population.  Usually several conditions
must be met  Among these, for example, are BCF thresholds and whether or not the
chemical has been detected (at any level) in a relevant water pathway.

      While "high" criteria  are not comparable across pathways and populations,  this
method succeeds in grouping chemicals roughly by risk. Chemicals not labeled "high" for
toxicity or exposure are labeled "low", unless information is unavailable.  Data gaps are
minimized by using chemical estimation models (ENPART, a fate model; CHEMFATE:
CHEMEST.j

      It is unknown  whether this methodology has undergone peer review or public
comment.
                                      A-23

-------
 Pros:  Quick, easy to understand.  Assigns rank based on toxicity and exposure potential
 simultaneously rather than considering these elements separately. Allows scoring of a large
 number of chemicals  based on available  data, SAR, and Best Professional  Judgment.
 Considers  a range of health endpoints.   Implicitly  weights  cancer  and noncancer  by
 automatically assigning "high" ranks to cancer and developmental toxicity.

 Cons: Consideration of potency, severity and weight of evidence are implicit, not explicit,
 in assignment of chemical to one  of the  toxicity categories.   Limited consideration of
 exposure, based on environmental fate properties and the frequency of detection in U.S.
 waters.
 E. Air Office Scoring and Ranking Systems

 1. The Source Category Ranking System: Development and Methodology
       USEPA 1990, Prepared for the Office of Air Quality Planning Standards, Chemicals
       and Petroleum Branch, February 16

       This system was devised to rank sources of different emissions in order to prioritize
 air pollutant source categories.  The scoring system looks at both long- and short-term
 effects of pollutants, taking into consideration pollutant concentrations, «"a"*«"™ and
 average  exposure,  the  total  exposed population,  and health risks associated  with the
 exposure. To our knowledge, this system has only been used internally by the EPA and has
 not been publicly or peer reviewed.

       Health effects scores are based upon carcinogenicity, reproductive and developmental
 toxicity, acute toxicity data, and nonlethal health effects. Before calculating health risk
 scores, all health effects are scaled by dividing by the respective »na»itniim health score so
 that the maximum equals one.  Scores for a particular site are then added across pollutants.

      Exposure scores  were calculated using an algorithm integrated with the Industrial
 Source Complex Long-Term Model (ISCLT). Exposures per unit loss rates were calculated
for both long-term  (average) and short-term (peak) chemical releases. These were then
scaled by dividing by the f"a*«f*"«f" exposure score such that the greatest exposure would
equal one.

Pros:  System was devised to rank air pollutant source categories. It utilizes data on acute
and chronic toxicity, pollutant concentrations (as obtained from air modelling), populations
exposed and human health risk. Scores arc developed for carcinogenicity and other health
end points.  Scores are summed across pollutants to obtain source  specific  values.
Normalizes scores by dividing each score by maximum value possible in that category.

Cons:  System is media-specific to EPA's Air program.  The system neither incorporates
severity of health effects nor does it allow weight of evidence considerations in scoring.


                                        A-24

-------
 Unknown if system has been peer reviewed.  The system also does not include non-human
 health effects in establishing a source-specific score.
 2. Measuring Air Quality; The New Pollutants Standards Index
       USEPA 1978, Prepared for the Office of Policy Analysis, July

       Thk index measures air quality based on the potential acute human health effects of
 five major pollutants: carbon monoxide, photochemical oxidants, nitrogen dioxide, sulfur
 dioxide, and paniculate matter. The index is formed by calculating the following subindex
 for each pollutant:

                          100 X Observed Concentration
       Subindex
                   National Ambient Air Quality Standard (NAAQS)

       The Index value (ranging from 0 to 500) is equal to the highest of the five subindices.
The pollutant responsible for the highest subindex and all pollutants with subindices greater
than 100 are named (a subindex greater than 100 indicates that the pollutant concentration
violates the NAAQS.)  Because of the limited definition, indices calculated in this way on
a regional or local basis are not  comparable because variables such as area of effect,
duration of concentration, and exposed population are not controlled.

       This index has been published and was designed specifically for public use.

Pros:  This index provides a measure of overall air quality based on the potential acute
human health effects of five criteria air pollutants.  The  index is simple and easy  to
understand.   Subindices are  calculated for each  pollutant by  dividing the  observed
concentration by the relevant National Ambient Air Quality Standard.

Cons:  This index is severely limited to just the five criteria air pollutants. The index only
incorporates acute health effects data along with ambient air concentration data. It does
not look at chronic health effects, ecological effects, populations exposed, weight of evidence
considerations, or severity of effects.  Additionally, the index does not allow for combining
values into a single score.
                                       A-25

-------
                      Standards  for Hazardous Air Pollutants for Source Categories:

 Air Pollutants
       USEPA 1991, Prepared for the Office of Air Quality Planning Standards

       This proposed rule will implement provisions of the Clean Air Act Amendments of
 1990 that allow a source to obtain an extension for compliance with air emissions standards
 if the source has achieved an overall emission reduction of 90% or more by specified dates.
 Reductions are calculated based on overall emissions from the source; therefore, a source
 can  use greater than  90% reductions  from some  pollutants to offset less  than  90%
 reductions for other pollutants to achieve the overall 90% reduction. However, certain rules
 govern this practice of offsetting for "high-risk" pollutants.  Offsetting of these "high-risk"
 pollutants with lower risk pollutants is calculated based on the relative  toxicity of the
 chemicals.  For carcinogens, weighting factors are applied to the emissions of these "high-
 risk" chemicals, so that every 1 pound of these carcinogens equals between 10 and 1,000,000
 pounds of lower risk carcinogens. For noncarcinogens, weighting factors are not developed;
 rather, chemicals are categorized  into  two groups, high risk and low risk.  High risk
 noncarcinogens can be traded on a one-to-one basis with other high risk noncarcinogens and
 with carcinogens on a ten-to-one basis.  Reductions in high-risk noncarcinogens can offset
 low risk noncarcinogens, but not vice versa.

       To identify high-risk chemicals in both the carcinogen and noncarcmogen categories,
 OAQPS first gathered available health data on the chemicals. For carcinogens, potency data
 was  taken from IRIS and  from CERCLA Reportable Quantities.  Weight-of-evidence
 classifications and CERCLA hazard ranking (low, medium, high) was also recorded. IRIS
 was also used to obtain data for noncarcinogg"*  IRIS was supplemented by RTECS, where
 IRIS data were not available.

       After health data were gathered, OAQPS performed generic exposure modelling
 based on average meteorologic conditions.  If the chemical concentration 500 meters from
 the source posed greater than 1 x 10** risk, or if the concentration exceeded the reference
 dose (or the LOEL/100 or LD50/1000, if no RfD was available) by an order of magnitude
 or more, the chemical was preliminarily designated "high-risk".  The weighting factors for
 carcinogens were determined based on the ratio of the potency estimates of the high-risk
 chemicals to the potency estimates of the lower risk chemicals. In contrast, noncarcinogens
were simply placed into high and low risk groups, without specific weighting factors.  The
 last step in the analysis was to determine if any U.S. facilities actually emit these chemicals
in sufficient quantities to reach the health effects benchmark of concern. This determination
was based  on TRI emissions data  and other sources of emissions data.  If at least one
facility released the chemical in sufficient quantities to reach the benchmark exposure level.
the chemical was included on the final "high-risk" list Note that these emissions standards
will be published in the Federal Register.
                                       A-26

-------
 Pros: The relevant aspect of this proposal is the identification of chemicals that will count
 toward early emission reduction goals. Importantly, chemicals are ranked as high or low risk
 using generic air exposure modelling; this would support our use of such a generic approach.
 Secondly, the system implicitly  ranks  carcinogens against noncarcinogens by  allowing
 weighted trading among the tow types of chemicals. The relative emission trading amounts
 would support a cancer versus noncancer severity weighting. The approach will be published
 in the Federal Register.

 Cons: System considers only air emissions. System is tailored to a particular requirement
 of The Clean Air Act Amendments. The system does not address ecological effects.
 1. USEPA Unfinished Business Report! A Comparative Assessment  of Environmental
 Problems
       USEPA 1987, Prepared for the Administrator by
             Richard Morgenstern, Director, Office of Policy Analysis
             Don day, Deputy Assistant Administrator for Air and Radiation
             Gerald Emison, Director, Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards
             Rebecca Hanmer, Deputy Assistant, Administrator for Water
             Marcia Williams, Director, Office of Solid Waste
       PB88-127048, February 1987

       This EPA report assesses 31 prominent environmental problems currently facing the
 United States.  It attempts to rank them by the risk each poses to society in an effort to
 prioritize how EPA should use its resources. The enviimimemal problems were defined
 along  existing program lines,  e.g. criteria air pollutants, hazardous air  pollutants,
 contaminants in drinking water, Superfund sites, pesticide residues on food, worker exposure
 to toxic chemicals, etc. The ranking system that the authors employed has been published
 and peer reviewed by the Scientific Advisory Board.

       Four different types of risks were evaluated for each environmental problem: cancer
 risks, non-cancer health risks, ecological effects, and welfare effects (visible impairment,
 materials damage, etc).  These risk evaluations did not consider the economic or technical
 controllability of the risks  or the benefits to society of the  activities causing the
 environmental problems. No attempt was made to combine the risk evaluations, so in effect
 four separate rankings of the 31 problems were generated.

       The risk assessments were based on pollutant exposure and effects data.  However.
 because the data were largely incomplete and the methodologies for evaluating them are
 undeveloped  or crude,  assessments were  ultimately  based on the collective informed
judgement of the experts involved. Wherever possible, these judgements were made using
 formal a«d systematic methods.
                                       A-27

-------
       Cancer Risk

       To assess carcinogenic risk, EPA relied on  the Carcinogen Assessment Group's
 evaluation of the magnitude of risk. However, final rankings were based on judgment of
 the weight of evidence as well as magnitude.

       Non-Cancer Health Risk Evaluation

       Each environmental problem was ranked based on the incidence of effects of the
 chemicals associated with each problem and weighted by  the severity of the effects.  The
 methodology began by selecting a few representative chemicals, for which incidence of
 exposure was estimated:

 Incidence = number of people exposed X chemical potency
       (potency = exposure dose divided by reference dose)

       Data was often unavailable, in which  case  the  authors' judgement was  used.
 Incidences were summed,  weighted by an effect severity  index.  The final rank was
 determined by scaling the sum by the authors' estimate of how much of the problem was not
 captured by the representative chemicals.                                          *

       Ecological Risk

       The authors attempted a broad assessment of environmental impacts on all kinds of
 ecosystems from terrestrial and freshwater types to marine and estuarine types. However,
 their assessment was the least rigorous of the  four.  Each environmental problem was
 ranked by subjective consensus as high, medium or low for each type of ecosystem.  The
 rankings were based on  expert judgement of  1) potential anthrogenic impact on the
 environment at the local, regional and biospheric levels and, 2) the severity of the impact
 in terms of number of years required for ecosystem recovery once the stress was removed.

       The judgements for a  particular  environmental problem were  systematically
aggregated across ecosystems to generate a high,  medium or low overall ranking for the
problem. However, the authors felt that their method was too inexact to try to establish
relative rankings within these categories.

       Welfare Rlik

       A full range  of welfare effects were considered, inehiHing soiling and other material
damages, recreation, natural resources, damages to other public and commercial property
and ground water supplies, and losses in aesthetics and non-user values. Hie environmental
problems were ranked by consensus through a subjective review of the  extent and cos: of
existing y«d  potential damage.
                                      A-28

-------
Pros: Method is simple. Incorporates four broad risks/effects categories, being cancer risks,
non-cancer risks, ecological effects, and welfare effects. These categories allow and require
professional judgment in score determination.  The cancer risk score uses both magnitude
of risk as well as the weight of evidence. The non-cancer risk score uses exposure as well
as severity of effect. This system has been published and reviewed by the Scientific Advisory
Board.

Cons:   The four different categories cannot be combined into  a unified score.  The
professional judgment went into the score determination rather than the data selection, a
process which would prove too unwieldy for the entire TRI database.  Both the ecological
and welfare ranks were subjective and relied upon site-by-site judgment rather than a
rigorous method for calculation.
2. Integrated Environment Management Program
       USEPA 1986, Prepared for the Environmental Criteria and Assessment Office,
       March

       The IEMP is one system which seeks to incorporate the severity of the toririty effect
into a chemical release ranking system. The ranking of the chemical release is based upon
its relative risk index score, calculated as:

RRIS • (Dose) • (EsL Potency for Human Health Effect) * (Weighting Factor)

       Though the algorithm for determining the dose is not specified,  the calculation is
based upon: (1) pollutant loadings; (2) an exposure analysis using established Agency fate
and transport models; (3) the population base identified; and (4) assumptions about body
weight and routes of uptake.

       Human health effects are divided into eight different categories, Le. cardnogenicity,
mutagenicity, etcThe health score is a function of the probability that the effect occurs in
humans (T - based upon a set of decision rules regarding weight of evidence) and the
probability of occurrence of the toxic effect (P). For carcinogens, P equals the risk per unit
dose.  For non-carcinogens,

P-I/MED

where I is the observed incidence of effects above  the control incidence at the minimum
effective dose (MED) expressed as (mg/kg/day).

      The weighting factor is  actually a severity factor for each toxic  effect  They are
intended to reflect the significance of the quality of life lost, years of life lost, and economic
cost of the disease.
                                       A-29

-------
       To the best of our knowledge, this system has been used only within the EPA and
 has not been publicly reviewed.

 Pros:  Method is simple.   It uses both exposure and  routes of exposure in its dose
 calculation.  It incorporates eight different health effects in its health score and relies upon
 the weight of evidence. It can use one or all of these effects, allowing for gaps in the data.
 It contains a weighting factor for the severity of effect  It also generates a single score for
 carcinogens and non-carcinogens.

 Cons:  The  system has not, to our knowledge, been peer reviewed. The specifics of the
 determination of the dose score and health score are not specified in the literature.  The
 allowance of one to all of the health effects in the scoring makes a "fair" comparison among
 chemicals uncertain.
3. Examination of the Severity of Toxic Effects and Recommendation of a Systematic
Approach to Rank Adverse Effects
       USEPA 1986, Prepared for the Environmental  Criteria  and Assessment Office,
       March

       Although this paper did not present a scoring system, it presents information on one
aspect of scoring: the weighting of severity among different types of health noncancer
effects. Note that it is an internal EPA document and has not undergone public review.
The purpose of this paper is to differentiate the effects of chemicals upon the human body
and then to rank those effects.  For example, two different chemicals may have identical
IjQFIs (Lowest Observable Effect Level) but that the "effects" may be entirely different,
i.e. slight changes in the liver versus kidney and/or heart failure.  Thus, while current
research focusses on comparing chemicals according to these quantities, the author believes
in the necessity of a simultaneous ranking system based upon both the type and magnitude
of different toxic effects. This paper presents two ranking systems, one for histopathological
lesions (direct physical impact upon organs) and one for biochemical effects.

      The histopathological scheme lists the severity of effect as a function of the severity
of the lesion, modified by any additional non-histopathological effects, and the affected
organ. The expression for the severity score is:

Score « ((Lesion Severity) +  (Non-hist Modifier))' Organ Factor

      The lesion severity is determined from a table which lists eight  possible ranges of
effects and then assigns a score from one to eight (eight being the most severe) for that
range. The modifier is simply an addend for three different non-histopathological effects:
organ weight change, biochemical change, and organ system impairment For an observed
effect in each category, the modifier is one. For no observable effect, the modifier is zeio.
If it is unknown whether these effects  accompany the lesion, the modifier is one-half.  A


                                       A-30

-------
value is assigned to  the organ factor according to a .table which ranks each of the  four
"Organ Categories" defined in the report.

       The algorithm for the endpoint toxicity scheme is similar. The severity score may be
expressed as:

Score  = ((Endpoint  Severity) +  (Endpoint Modifier)) * Organ Factor

       The endpoint severity is determined from a table which lists seven possible ranges
for the biochemical change or system impairment as well as the category of the affected
organ. The table assigns a score, from one to seven, for each range, with seven being the
most severe.  The modifier, as  in the first scheme, is equal to one,  zero, or one-half,
depending upon an observed, non-observed, or uncertain accompanying histopathological
lesion or organ weight change. For example, a body weight change in an organism receives
a score of one, the absence of organ weight change and lesions creates  a modifier of zero
for both and therefore a total modifier of zero.  No effect in category one organs (lung,
heart, brain, etc.) is an organ factor of one, yielding a total score of one.

       The author cautions that  these proposed schemes are not suitable for use in 'the
comparison of chemicals because, since factors such as duration of exposure and route of
exposure were not variables in the derivation of the schemes, these would need to be held
as fixed in comparing chemicals,  a situation which never occurs in toxic releases.

Pros: A relatively simple method. It  examines the differences in the severity of effects.  I
includes mtiirtnp* according to the organs affected, biochemical effects, and histopathologic&i
effects.

Cons:  This is  not  an overall scoring  system.   The author  even  cautions  against its
integration into a scoring system because certain site-specific variables, such as duration or
route of exposure, were not incorporated into the scheme. This system has not been peer
reviewed.

       In developing this severity ranking scheme, the authors of this paper reviewed several
other systems that use severity as a factor in the comparison of chemicals. The following
describes systems used by the author  to develop their scoring systems.
                                       A-31

-------
       Assessment of Air Emissions  from HpTardous Waste Treatment. Storage,  and
       Disposal Facilities

       One hundred of the 501 RCRA wastes handled by treatment, storage, and disposal
 facilities (TSDFs) were ranked according to  two types of health data, toxic effects  and
 carcinogenic effects.   Two factors were created,  the  toxicity  hazard factor  and  the
 carcinogenicity hazard factor.  These are described as:

 THF = (gas-phase equil. cone.) / (Threshold  Limit Value)
 CHF = (gas-phase equil. cone.) / (max allow, cone, at the 1E-5 Risk Level)
 The tnMitmim allowable concentration at the 100,000 risk level is the concentration at which
 there is a 95% confidence that the limit on the cancer risk is one in one hundred thousand
 people.  Each of these factors is then multiplied by the wastes' aqueous and nonaqueous
 disposal volumes in order to generate volume-weighted hazard scores.

       In addition to the determination of these factors, a weighting factor is created from
 carcinogenicity, teratogenicity, and acute toxic effects of each contaminant (using data from
 RTECS). The score for each lies between zero and three. This weighting factor was then
 multiplied by the scores.

 Pros:   Simple  system.  Incorporates two different health  effects,  toxic effects  and
 carcinogenic effects.  It uses the volume of release directly in the score determination.
 Includes a weighting factor based upon carcinogenicity, teratogenicity,  and acute  toxic
 effects.

 Cons:  The two scoring factors for toxic and carcinogenic effects cannot be combined.  The
 factors rely upon the Threshold Limit Value and the Maximum Allowable Concentration
 at the  1E-5 Risk Level respectively, data which exists for few chemicals. Does not have an
 exposure component.
      RCRA Rlsk-Cort Analysis Model;

      Tins model follows a five-step process in order to determine human health risks
resulting from  releases of chemicals.  After chemical selection, concentrations of the
contaminants- are estimated for  three  transport  processes  (air,  surface  water,  and
groundwater). The model then estimates the total human intake, calculates the risk to an
individual, and then estimates the population risk by multiplying by the total population in
a given area. This process assigns a risk score which then ranks the releases.
                                       A-32

-------
       Two equations were developed in order to model the process. They are:

 Care. Risk = (risk per unit dose)'(severity index)'(dose)ihlp"(population exposed)
 Non-Care. Risk =  (risk per unit dose)'(dose)*(population exposed)

 The severity index follows from a 1984 EPA ranking system developed to quantify statutory
 reportable quantities of hazardous substances. It assigns a value of 0.1 for severities 1-2, 0.5
 for 3-7, and 1.0 for 8-10.  The shape is merely an exponent to determine the shape of the
 curve.

 Pros:  Simple System, requiring only a dose for mammalian  species based upon either
 human or animal chronic or acute doses. Considers three different routes of exposure, oral,
 inhalation, and dermaL

 Cons:  Relies upon a narrow range of health effects.  Does not have an exposure or a
 volume component (it ranks chemicals, not releases). Though  the score only requires  the
 dose, the calculation of the dose is a cumbersome and difficult to understand process.


       Toidcitv Scoring System Using RTECS Data Bases;

       Though the scoring algorithm is simple, requiring only a dose, the methodology
 requires detailed toxitity data for input into the algorithm.

       The only dose considered are those  for rr.ammalian species.  This method only
 considers oral, "ihftlgfr'op an^ dermal routes of exposure, a»nimin£ each of equal importance
 and the absorption to be 100%.  Four subscores are considered for each substance: human
 acute, animal acute, human chronic,nnf^ animal chronic The final score is taken from the
 following hierarchy:

       —>    minimum of human fl"d animal chronic doses, if both have entries;
       —>    chronic dose for humans or animal* if only one has entry;
       —>    minimum of human and animal acute doses, if both have an entry and there
             are no chronic entries; and
       - >    acute dose for hnmans or animaic  if this is the only category with any entries

       In using RTECS, chronic exposures are those resulting in effects other than death or
are effects such as  cancer which may result in mortality. Selecting a human chronic effect
requires comparison in the RTECS data bases, where carcinogenic effects are classified as
a carcinogenic response(CAR), a neoplastic response(NEO), or an equivocal tumorigenic
agent(ETA). The lowest effect level for carcinogenitity is chosen by selecting the lowest
dose of CAR or NEO. If neither exists, the lowest ETA is multiplied by two. The selected
dose is modified when there are multiple carcinogeniciry entries by decreasing the selected
dose 10 percent per additional positive result, to a muitimnm Of 50%. Teratogemc doses


                                       A-33

-------
 from individual studies are ranked and the dose at the 20th percentile is selected as the
 teratogenic dose. This dose is lowered in the same manner as the carcinogenic dose.

 Pros:  Simple system.  Incorporates exposure data for three different routes, air, surface
 water, and groundwater. It also incorporates the severity of effect according to a 1984 EPA
 ranking system, making its inclusion simple and straightforward.

 Cons: Relies strictly upon the cancer slope of a chemical, limiting the number of allowable
 chemicals by available data.  The two separate scores calculated, carcinogenic and non-
 carcinogenic, may not be compared.

 IL     Survey of TRI Ranking and Indexing Efforts Outside EPA

       A  number  of organizations  outside  of  the  Agency   have  also  developed
 ranking/scoring  systems  for their own purposes,  such as targeting chemicals for state
 regulation; identifying chemicals for pollution prevention projects; and assessing the hazard
 of TRI emissions in particular communities.

       Abt Associates contacted a number of organizations which have utilized TRI data' in
 publications.  The organizations were asked about the scope and methodology used in their
 reports.
Rhonc-Ponlgnc in Paris developed an EmrimmiMtmai TnH»» (El) to accfss the aqueous
effluent impact of wastes. They computed a raw indicator as a weighted average of the daily
mass of six types of wastes (toxic materials, suspended solids, nitrogen, phosphorus, salts,
and chemical organics). No justification is given for these weights. The raw indicator is
multiplied by 100 and divided by the average from the prior year to arrive at the final El
for the month. This transformation is intended to make comparisons easy. If the index is
greater than 100 the impact has been greater, values less that 100 indicate improvement
(Rhone-Poulenc memo July 25, 1991)

ChcHiimls on Which Pats Are CprrCfftlv InadeunaffB Selection Criteria for Health and
Environmental
      Organisation for Economic Co-operation and Development, Berlin, March 1985

      This report itself did not present a chemical ranking system. Rather, the purpose of
this task was to develop a rational methodology by which countries could select chemicals
that most urgently need attention.  The elements of this methodology were: identifying
selection elements, exploring ways of weighting and combining elements and reviewing data
sources.  Selection elements identified included workplace  exposure, general population
exposure, environmental exposure, human and environmental effects.  OECD also included
recommendations for applying these elements.   Importantly, OECD  emphasized the
importance of clarifying the purpose and scope of the selection exercise in order to define
limits and interpretations.  OECD also supported the use of expert judgment to fill in data


                                      A-34

-------
gaps.  Finally,  OECD strongly urged consideration of data  quality in  the ranking and
selection of chemicals.

       For each of the elements of the methodology, OECD broke the approach down into
four steps: compilation, screening, refinement and review. The  report then suggested topics
to consider in each of the four phases.

Polaroid Corporation has developed a 5-category scheme for  all chemicals that they use.
Chemicals in categories i and ii are highly toxic (known and possible carcinogens). Category
V chemicals are non-toxic solid waste.  Chemical categories have been used to establish
goals for SO percent reduction in chemical uj£ by category.  The focus  on chemical use
reduction rather than chemical release reduction is based on the Massachusetts Toxics Use
Reduction Act. Category specific goals are designed to prevent strategies that claim a "SO
percent use reduction" but are based exclusively on reductions in use of low tenacity wastes.
(Conversation with Polaroid Corporation representatives, June 1991)

The Boston Herald published a series of articles under the heading of "HI wind," covering
environmental  releases of toxic chemicals in  Massachusetts.  The  Herald concentrated
mostly upon volumetric data but also developed an algorithm for ranking the chemical
releases according to volume and toxirity.  The algorithm multiplied the volume of release
by a decimal number derived from the inhalation risk number. This enabled the article to
rank individual emitters  ^y order of "cancer risk."  The Herald acknowledged that the
ranking did not faa»rporaie human exposure into its calculation a«d cautioned against using
their calculation as an "actual measurement of risk*
fThe Boston Herald. Monday, May 13,1991, p. 8).
Air Toxic "Hot Snots* PPMTMU Risk Assessment GuldeUim
       California Air Pollution Control Officers Association, March 1990

       This system is designed to prioritize facilities in accordance with the Air Toxics "Hot
Spots" Information and Assessment Act of 1987.  According to this act, any facility which
qualifies as  a "high priority" facility must  perform a  health risk assessment.  Localities
determine the priority level (high, intermediate, or low) of the faculties in their district
based  upon the facility's reported emissions of one or more of some 500 chemicals.
Separate calculations  and priority levels are used for carcinogenic and noncarcinogenic
substances.  The higher of the two levels as calculated is assigned to the facility.

       The score for  a facility emitting carcinogens  is  equal to  the  sum of the scores
generated for each carcinogen.  Each contaminant's score is calculated as

TS =  emissions [Ibs/yr] ' unit risk [ug/m']*1 ' distance factor • normalization factor

       The distance factor is determined from the distance from the source of the emission^
to the nearest populated area. That quantity corresponds to a value relating the change in


                                       A-35

-------
 concentration with distance through the use of a Gaussian plume dispersion model.  A total
 score of ten roughly corresponds to a risk of one in ten thousand and a total score of one
 similarly corresponds to a risk of one in one hundred thousand. This methodology places
 any facility scoring above ten in the "high priority" category and those scoring below one in
 the "low priority" category. A score between one and ten requires further analysis.

       The score for a facility emitting non-carcinogens is determined much in the same
 way.  The total score for the faculty is the sum of the scores of each substance emitted by
 the facility.  The substance score may be expressed as:

 TS -  emissions [Ibs/yr1] * distance  factor ' normalization/acceptable  exposure level
       [ug/mj]

       The non-carcinogenic scores are considered identically to the carcinogenic scores,
 with "high priority" assignment to facilities with totals over ten and "low priority" assignment
 to facilities with total scores below one.  Note that the carcinogenic and non-carcinogenic
 scores are not added together.

 Louisiana's Environmental Action Plan "Lean to 2000*
       Public Advisory and Steering Committee Risk Ranking Retreat Briefing Material-
       March 26, 1991

       T^nniyiana formed a Political Advisory Committee (FAQ to rank 33 environmental
 issues by  the severity of risks they posed to the  State.  Risks were divided  into three
 categories, human health, ecological effects, and quality of life.  The issues were  ranked
 separately within each of these categories based upon available scientific information  and
 the judgement of assembled experts. Informed by the three iwiiniy, the PAC settled the
 final comprehensive risk ranking by voting on the issues.

       Health Effects

       This method estimates risk to human health from the cancer a"d non-cancer effects.
Cancer risk was calculated based on chemicals representative of each issue:

       Risk  = Environmental Concentration X Potency X Population Exposed

       Thus the issues were ranked by estimated cancer cases that would be caused by a
particular environmental problem.  The issues were categorized as high, medium or low
based on breaks in the data of these results.
    1 maximum Ibs/yr for substances associated with acute toritity and average Ibs/yr for
substances associated with chronic toxiciry

                                       A-36

-------
       Non-cancer health risk was estimated from chemicals representative of tich issue.
Three exposure pathways were considered: air inhalation, food and liquid ingestion, and skin
adsorption.  Risk  presented by each  issue was calculated for each applicable exposure
scenario as:

       Risk = Severity Index X Dose X Population Score

       The severity index is a standard ordinal ranking of body  organs  affected by a
chemical and the severity of those affects. Dose is an ordinal score based on ranges of RfD
divided by average contaminant concentration in the population's environment.  Population
score is an ordinal rank of ranges of population sizes.

       Non-cancer health risk for an issue is calculated as the average of the risks post. by
each exposure pathway. Issues were again ranked high, medium or low based on breaks in
the data of these results.

       The final issue ranking  placed equal weight on  the cancer and non-cancer effects.
The nine possible  combinations of the elements of the two categories were assigned very
high,  high, medium high, medium and low ranks based on a committee consensus.

       Ecological Effects

       The ranking committee ranked the environmental issues based on  the degree to
which nine ecosystems were affected by each issue. Impacts on each of the nine ecosystems
were  evaluated on an issue by issue basis by •»a""t""g how stressors associated with an
issue  impacted the stress indicators in an ecosystem.   For example, for the Terrestrial
Habitat Loss issue, stressors like industrial development and proposed road construction
were  rated on a scale of 0 to 10 for how they affect such stress indicators  as Changes in
Nutrient Cycling and Loss of Habitat A stressor's score  was the weighted average of ratings
across stress indicators, the .weights  reflecting the committee's assessment  of  relative
importance of the  stress indicators.  Stressor scores were averaged to determine the final
rating of the importance of the issue to the particular ecosystem.

      The rank of the issue was calculated as the weighted average of these ecosystem-
specific ratings, the weights reflecting the committee's assessment of the  value of each
ecosystem. Breaks in the ranking figures determined how the issues were divided into five
categories (very high through low.) Separately, committee members voted on the ecological
importance of each issue using the same five categories and compared this  ranking to the
quantitative one. The four issues that were not placed in the same categories by the two
systems were recategorized by  consensus.
                                       A-37

-------
       Quality of Life

       This analysis attempted to rank the issues into high, medium and low categories
 based  on the costs associated with damages not accounted for in the two other rankings.
 Among these costs are health care costs, recreation losses, materials damage and aesthetic
 losses.  The issues were first  ranked based on the  dollar value  estimates of costs as
 determined by various relevant economic studies. The issues were ranked again based on
 qualitative assessments of changes in quality of life using such measures as the number of
 people suffering damages, and the reversibility of those damages. Equal weight was given
 to the quantitative and qualitative rankings in determining the final ranking (again using the
 very high through low categories.)
                               _^	Lists from Ten Domestic
and International Organizations
       USEPA198S, Prepared for the Office of Pesticides and Toxic Substances, Economics
       and Technology Division, December 31

       This report reviewed various systems by which different organizations have compiled
lists of chemicals which they believe ought to be monitored Each of these steps involved
selecting criteria in order to determine their placement upon the list as well as ranges.  The
following mtnmariTJtj the findings of this report:
           EnreDMiii Coiniimnitles Council Directive Chemical Wnifard Lists
             82/501/EEC, 03 No L 230,53.82, pp. M8 (June 24, 1982)

      The EC has  mandated that any industry  must list their use of any of. the 178
chemicals upon this list The chemicals on this list fall into two toxic categories, very toxic
substances, other toxic substances.  The qualifications for these categories are as follows:
                                       A-38

-------
          "Very Toxic" Substances
        Other Toxic Substances
  LDjo (oral) < = 5; or
  LDjo(cutaneous) < =  10; or
  LCso (inhalation) < = 0.1
25 < LDso (oral) < • 200; or
SO < LDSO (cutaneous) < = 400; or
0.5 < LCjo (inhalation)  < =  2
                    or
  5< LDjo(oral) <= 25; or
  10 < LDso (cutaneous) < = 50; or
  0.1 < LCso (inhalation) < = 0.1
                   and
  Physical and chemical properties which
  cause effects similar to those caused by
  chemicals which fall into the above
  criteria
      California Air Resource Board Toxic Chemical List & NIOSH/OSHA Pocket Guide:
             Air Resources Board of the State of California

      The NIOSH/OSHA Pocket Guide to Chemical Hazards is a list of 380 chemicals,
all  under  federal regulation, which  includes information  on  and  recommendations
concerning each of these chemicals.  The object of this list is to compile chemicals most
likely to travel downwind in the event of an accidental release.  The California  Air
Resources  Board included on its list any chemical  from  the guide with an IDLH
(Immediately Dangerous to Life and Health - mammim concentration of a substance from
which one could escape within 30 minutes without any escape-impairing symptoms or any
irreversible health effects) below  2000 ppm and a vapor pressure greater than 20 mmHg.

      New Jersey Department of Environmental Protection Highly Toxic Substances List:
             State of New Jersey Department of Environmental Protection, Division of
             Environmental Quality

      The division of  Environmental Quality in  the Department of Environmental
Protection in New Jersey sought  to prepare a list of chemicals which would cause acute
health effects if released into the  air. Their toxicity criterion was based upon a Threshold
Limit Value (TLV - time-weighted average concentration to which nearly all workers  may
be repeatedly exposed without adverse effect)  of one pro.  An  additional criterion for
inclusion on the list was reactivity.  Volatility and usage were used to rank the chemicals.
but the methodology is not included in the report.
                                      A-39

-------
       Department of Transportation Poisonous Substances List:
             DOT Hazardous Materials Regulations 49 CFR 172.101

       The DOTs Hazardous  Materials Table  includes two categories for poisonous
 substances, Poison A and Poison B.  Poison B materials meet the following requirements:

                              LDjo(oral) < = 50 mg/kg
                LCjo (inhalation) < = 2 mg/1 (if such a cone, is likely)
                          LDjo (cutaneous) < = 200 mg/kg

 The Poison List has 153 chemicals of which 141 are Poison B materials.

       Philadelphia Air Pollution Control Board Toxic Air Contaminants List:
             Air Management  Regulation  VI: Control of Emissions of Toxic  Air
             Contaminants, Air Pollution Control Board of the Philadelphia Department
             of Public Health, 1981

       Two lists were  developed in order to require emissions reports from industry. The
 criteria for the development of Schedule A are not specified, though the methodology
 incorporated  risk of immediate harm,  carcinogenicity,  mutagenicity,  tertogenicity,
 bioaccumulative effects,  and whether  the chemical  is known to be present  in  the
 Philadelphia area. The criteria for schedule B are identical and also meet the definition of
 "pollutant" as established  by  the EPA.  The two schedules encompass a  total  of  104
 chemicals.

       Union Carbide Corp. Industrial Hygiene Sampling and Monitoring Program List
             Union Carbide Institute plant, 1984

       Union Carbide developed a list of priority chemicals for their monitoring program
at their plant in Institute, West Virginia.  The chemicals have  been ranked ordinally from
one to four in the following-system:
                                       A-40

-------
       Rating 4

  Have OSHA,
  ACGIH, or UCC
  standards
  (whichever is
  lower) including
  permissible
  exposure limits
  (PEL) of less than
  5 pm or less than
  0.1 mg/m8 as
  TWA8(time
  weighted average
  for normal 8 hr.
  day)

  known carcinogens

  result in
  mutagenesis,
  teratogenesis, or
  fertility impairment
  in humans

  result in
  irreversible nerve
  damage

  result in
  irreversible long-
  term organ toxicity

  are fast-acting and
  can produce major
  injury
	Rating 3

     5 200
        or
    TWAg>5

classified as simple
asphyxiants or
nuisances

have generally low
risk effects
The ranking of the chemical determines how often they are to be sampled within the plant.

      As can be noted, each of these systems represents  a methodology for chemical
selection and  presents,  at best,  a simplistic means for ranking chemicals according to
different properties. Nonetheless, it presents a large sample of properties (PEL, IDLH, etc.)
which have been used in the differentiation of chemical toxicity.
                                       A-41

-------
Other Systems

      Our research has uncovered three systems  for which we are still trying to obtain
documentation.   They are an Office of Water TRI chemical ranking system, an  EPA
compound evaluation system, and  the  National Air Toxics Information Clearinghouse
pollutant selection and prioritization method.  We also found two systems that were not
relevant to this TRI indicator discussion. The documents supporting these systems are titled
1) Existing Chemicals of Environmental Relevance (German Chemical Society, October
1985) and 2) Chemical Scoring System Development (Oak Ridge National Laboratory.)
                                      A-42

-------
                  Appendix B



Options for a TRI Indicator Ranking/Scoring System
                      B-l

-------
                                    Appendix B



         OPTIONS FOR A TRI INDICATOR RANKING/SCORING SYSTEM





I. Elements of a Scoring System	B-3



      a. Selecting measures on which the ranking will be based	  B-4



      b. Selecting a method to score the measures  	  B-4



      c. Selecting ranges over which measures are assigned scores  	  B-S



      d. Factoring data quality into the index  	B-19



      e. Using severity indices to weight chemical scores within a category	B-19



      f. Ranking individual chemicals versus forming subindices	B-19



      g. Methods of establishing the relative importance of risks among categories  . . B-20



      h. Weighting scores: an alternative to methods presented in Section I.g	B-21





n. Options for Ranking of Chemicals	B-23



      Option 1	B-26



      Option 2	B-35



      Option 3	B-45
                                       B-2

-------
 I.     Elements of a Scoring System

       A  separate memorandum summarizes a number of chemical  scoring and  ranking
 procedures used by Offices within the Agency and by organizations outside of the Agency.
 From the review of these scoring systems, several common issues emerge. These issues must
 be addressed in the development of a ranking system for the TRI index.  These issues include:

       a. Selecting measures on which the ranking will be based
             Choosing measures to describe a chemical's toxicity and potential exposure

       b. Selecting a method to score the measures.  Options include:
             Qualitative - high, medium or low
             Ordinal- 1,2,3
             Weighted - 10, 100, 1,000
             Calculated - continuous values

       c. Selecting ranges over which measures are assigned scores
             For example, an RfD may be scored a 1 if it ranges from 5 to 0.5 and a 10 if it
             ranges from 0.5 to 0.05
             Weight-of-evidence categories might also be scored

       d. Factoring data quality into the index

       e. Using severity indices to weight chemical scores within a category

       f . Ranking individual chemicals or forming sub-indices
             Each chemical is described  by scores  in a variety of categories (e.g.  acute
             toxicity, neurotoxicity, cancer).  If we fsrablish the relative importance of risks
             among these categories, a chemical's scores can be combined across  categories
             to form a chemical rank. We can also choose to not judge the relative importance
             of the risks. Instead, we can generate an indicator for each category.

       g. Methods of *«tahii«hitig the relative importance of risks among categories
             Relative importance is reflected by the methodology used to combine a chemical' s
             scores  HCTOSS categories.    Various   niffthotff   include  simple summation,
             multiplication, other mathematical functions, matrices, taking the worst score, and
                        decision rules
       h. Weighting scores: an alternative to methods presented in Section I.g.
             One alternative method to those presented in I.g.
      The review of the scoring systems within and outside of the Agency has suggested a
number of approaches for handling each of these issues. Several alternative approaches for each

                                         B-3

-------
 issue, and their advantages and disadvantages, are described below.

       a. Selecting measures on which the ranking will be based

       Measures include all of the parameters that will be incorporated into the scoring system.
 Some will describe the toxicity and physicochemical properties of a chemical (e.g., LDM, RfD,
 solubility), others  will describe exposure at a site (e.g., volume of release, population, site
 environments.)  A decision will need to be made concerning which chemical properties to
 incorporate into the scoring system. The Section 313 criteria lists ten parameters that EPA must
 consider when evaluating a chemical for addition to TRI: carcinogenicity, chronic toxicity, acute
 toxicity, reproductive toxicity, heritable gene  and chromosomal mutations, developmental
 toxicity, neurotoxicity, environmental toxicity, persistence and bioaccumulation (these parameters
 are defined in Appendix A.) Most of the scoring systems we reviewed consider at least some
 of these categories, although they are frequently merged into fewer parameters. The categories
 should be chosen to reflect different risks posed by the chemicals so that a particular risk is not
 overstated by virtue of being represented in more than one category.

       The index will also incorporate measures of potential exposure including media-specific
 emissions volumes, site characteristics and physicochemical properties.   Site characteristics
 include the potential population exposed through different media, and factors such as stream
 volume and wind speed  that  influence the transport and dispersion of a  chemical in the
 environment. Physicochemical properties typically include !*••*••**«""£; dilution, and dispersion
 coefficients of contaminants.

       b. Selecting a oitthod to score  the measures

       Once measures for describing toxicity and exposure have been selected, a  system for
 evaluating these measures must be chosen. The goal is to derive some way of scoring chemicals
 relative to  one another  within  each  category.    Possible  categories  might   be human
 carcinogenicity, human chronic toxicity, mammalian acute toxicity, chronic toxicity for aquatic
 species, and physicochemical exposure potential.

       One system uses qualitative divisions to score chemicals within a category. For example.
the carcinogenicity of a chemical might be scored "high", •medium", or "low."  An advantage
to using qualitative scores  is that structure activity relationships can be used to assign  scores to
chemicals without specific  toxicity or exposure data. A disadvantage of qualitative scores is that
they only broadly distinguish toxicity and exposure potentials and do not allow for more refined
consideration of potency or exposure factors. Thus, two carcinogens such as benzene (Cj*  =
0.029) and dieldrln (q,*  «= 20) could both be scored "high," despite the fact that they have very
different potencies.

       Ordinal systems (e.g. 1,2, or 3) group chemicals in a similar fashion. Note that ranking
formulas that incorporate ordinal scores should not be used to attribute proportional meaning tc
the ordinal scores.  Fftcauw assigning an ordinal rank of 3 to chemical A and 1 to chemical B

                                          B-4

-------
 does  not mean chemical A is three times worse than chemical B, mathematical functions
 involving these two scores only convey information on order, not on proportional magnitude.


       Unlike ordinal systems, weighted scoring systems (e.g. 1, 10, 100, 200) use numerical
 scores that reflect the  proportional  differences between chemicals.  For example, within a
 category like physicochemical exposure potential, weighted scores could reflect the proportional
 magnitudes of volatility among chemicals.

       Another way to score chemicals within a category is to use the actual value of a measure
 or mathematical function of the measure.  For example, carcinogenicity might be scored by
 using the actual qi* of each chemical.  Unlike systems that assign scores to categories of
 chemicals (e.g., low, medium, high) and thus do not differentiate between chemicals with the
 similar properties, this kind of system compares chemicals on a continuous scale.

       Unfortunately, rankings based upon  more specific scores (based on q,* or on chemical-
 specific decay rates,  for example) require data that is available  for only a limited number of
 chemicals, thereby restricting the number of chemicals that could be considered in the index.
 When specific values are not available, other scores that consider relative potency in a general
 way (such as RQ values) can be used.  Adjusted RQs consider exposure potential as well by
 adjusting the toxichy score by a degradation factor based on biodegiadation,  hydrolysis and
 photolysis (BHP).  Using RQs would allow us to take advantage of work that the Agency has
 already done to categorize and score chemicals based on tenacity and exposure considerations.

      More refined exposure scores can be obtained using simplified exposure modelling. One
 measure is site-specific population-weighted f*it|*an"*tant concentration.  Concentration can be
 fsrimatfd using physicochemical properties such as solubility coefficients and environmental site
 characteristics like stream flow rates and  distance*  to drinking water uptakes.  Population
 densities are used to weight contaminant  concentrations.   Typically, scoring is often done
 separately for different exposure pathways and a  chemical often scores very differently
depending on the pathway (e.g.-, low for drinking water, high for fish consumption.)

      c. Selecting ranges over which measures are ??sigiMxl scores

      If a  scoring system is used to rank chemicals within a category, each  score must be
assigned  to a range of values of the underlying measure.   For example, the 307(a) Priority
 Pollutants Chemical Ranking methodology used the following ranges to score the aquatic toxicity
of chemicals!
                                         B-S

-------
       Score LCJO(mg/L)
       12     < 0.1
       10    0.1 - 1.0
       5      1.0-10.0
       3      10.0 - 100
       0      > 100
Other types of data used to determine the cutoffs include RfDs (non-carcinogens) and  q,*
(carcinogens), RQs (or TPQs where RQs not available), and occupational levels.1  The selection
of ranges forces a tradeoff between 1) using a large number of narrow ranges, which might
imply that the data is more refined than it really is, and 2) using a small number of broad ranges
which inflates or diminishes the importance of the boundaries and the measures that fall near
them.

      More than one kind measure can be used to score chemicals within a category.  This
approach takes advantage of a broader data set to score chemicals, including structure activity
relationships.  For example,  for acute mammalian toxicity,  we may have several kinds of
toxicity «fata that* describe a chemical's potency, such as acute oral LDjo aiM* acute dermal LDso*
If only one measure were available, it would be used to determine the chemical's rank in that
category.  If both were available, the more restrictive value could be used.  Alternatively, we
could create a hierarchy of preferred measures; in this case, we may prefer to use oral toxicity
over dermal toxicity for the drinking water exposure pathway, where both are available.  The
           of *hi« mCthfld are tnat ^faf81 gang ajg minitnirarf
       The selection measures, boundaries for scoring measure ranges, and category scores are
presented in Tables 1, 2, 3 and 4 for selected scoring systems reviewed in this memo.  Our
review demonstrates that vast effort and expertise has already been devoted to scoring  and
categorizing chemicals, both within the Agency and externally.  This expertise could be built
upon in the development of the TRI index.
    1 Edward J. Calabrese and Elaina M. Kenyon, "The Perils of State Air Toxic Programs,'
Environmental Science and Technology, Vol. 23, No. 11 (November 1989), 1326-9. This
article warns against using occupational levels for general population risk screening, for
several reasons: (a) occupational levels consider a recovery period between exposures;  (b)
occupational levels consider the "healthy worker" effect (that is, the levels  are set for
protection of relatively healthy populations), (c) the ACGTH  levels are set based on data of
unknown quality (d) the levels do not account for environmental rate (persistence,
bioconcenmtion) and  multiple exposure sources.

                                         B-6

-------
                                              Table 1: Human Toxicity Parameter Ranges
                                                HaBMAcMtftToxkirv
                                                                               HUIBMI Chronic Toxicity
(USEPA. data uakaowi,
prepared for OTS)
                                                        high -3
                                                        med-2
                                                        low-I

                                                       •11 B2carc.
                                                      given a score
                                                          of3
        high = 3      high = 3
        raed = 2      med = 2
        low - I      low = I
TSCACbi
Syrtem for Hi
Exposure Ideatiffestion
(O'Bryan. T. R. and
R. H. I98S. Journal of Tox-
ical9gy vid EaviroaraeaUl
HMtth, Vo
LC50
50-500
>500
Dermal      Oral     Exposure
 LD50       LD50      Levd      Scow
200mg/k  <50mg/kg    Low        7-9
200-500     50-500     Medium      4-6
 >500      >500      High        1-3
Score Oeoatotucjty:
    9 Evidence of mammalian rauUgenicity/clutogcaicity. interaction with maramaluut
        germ cell DNA, or epidemiological data Miggerting gcnotoucity in humani
    I Evidence of geootoucitjr ia non-mamriialian germ cell amyi. or evidence of
        mammalian dominant lethality
  5-7 Evidence of gcaotoxkify ia more than one tert lyilero. other than above
  2-4 Limited evideace of gcaotoucity. including mixed positive and negative rcaulta
    I Limited evidence of noogenotouctty
    0 Negative teat rewlu indicating lack of known genotoucity

Scoic Ctfcwogoncmy;
  1-9 Evidence of oncogcakity From epidemiological Mudiea or pouUve icwilti
        in two or more mammalian species
  6-7 Evidence of oneogenieily in either aex of a single mammalian specie*
  4-5 Suggestive evidence of oneogenic potential from epidemiological ctudics,
        mammalian bioaasays. cell transformation in vitro, or
        promoter/carcinogenic activity
    3 Evidence of gcnotoxic potential
  1-2 Limited evidence of lack of oneogenic potential
    0 No evidence of oncogcnic potential from well-conducted and well -designed
        mammalian studies in two or more animal species

-------
Table 1: Human Toxicity Parameter Ranges
•m iTi •. m
nung tfymeas
T9CACImkdaeoti«|
Sy*n for Hand ud
•• 	 - •* — *•» — *• 	
bj^Mura looninBKKHi
(ogaduded)
Talk Cbomirel Reinaat
(USEPA 1989. prepared by Ibe
Office of TO»M Substance*.
Veteran I, July)
Ranking Ibe ReUtiM Hundi
oT bHhMtiMl Daebu|« to
PQTWt ud Siafrec W*cn
(USEPA 1991. pnpmdfer
OPA. Febi vuy)
HiomAcaUTaikiv

Acute
RQ Ranking
<• lOOIto Onupl
1,000 Onupl
5.000 Onxip)

HUM! Chrone Toxkitjr
Score Dtvriopmtwtfl EffeeH:
•t InM two othcf nwmnwlwa tpeeict
numnulua qnein
S DcvdopmcoUJ efTeti at docei Mcompuied by nuterntl
loucity or otherwise equivocal lert retulu
4 Advene devclopmenUl cfTecU in nonnwmmaluui tpecie*
or in vitro tea tyrtenu
3 Indirect evidence luggerting pouilbe adverie
developmental effects
2 Indirect evidence of Uck of advene developraenul effecU
1 Limited evidence of lack of developmental effect*
0 No evidence of developmental toxicity pntmtial
Inhalation Cancer or
orOralRfd Ql» chronic RQ TPQ Ranking
"1.0 5.000 ><= 1,000 Group)
OuxincfoaJciry: rVon-caaccsr chronic:
Cancer RQ Chronic RQ
Value Uaed Value Used
Directly Directly

-------
Table 1: Human Toxicity Parameter Ranges
Ranking SyflteiM
Hoard Ranking Sjr*tM»:
FcttlRul*
(5$ Federal Reftitfa No. 241.
Pp,5IS32467.|lf!*V90)












A Ranking Syt&ea fix deu
Wafer Art Sean 307(a) JUnt
orfrtorty PoUrtaati
(U9EPA 1985. July)





HioBBiAcateTaxiaiy

LOSO
(onl)
< 5 of/kg
5-50
50-500
>soo
MI available
LCSO
[duil or mint)
< 0.2 mg/1
02-2
2-20
>20
not availible


LOSO
(tenul)
< 2m|/kf
2-20
20-200
>200
•olivuhbto
LCSO
(gM or vtpor)
<20n|/l
20-200
200-2.000
> 2,000
not Mutable



Ranking:
1.000
100
10
1
0

Ranking:
1.000
100
10
1
0


Hnaua Ckraoic Toxicity
C««**d,r:
CU*t A.
Slope Factor
0.5 <
0.05-O.S
<0.05
.
MtavailaMe
Hom-euaaer cAraaie;
RID

-------
Table 1: Human Toxicity Parameter Ranges
lUakng System
JSEPA Uefiniihed BUMMM
Report: A Cotopcntiv*
gfc .fcl»«M«i
rVOBMIM
(USEPA 1987. jmparad kjr
OPA.OAR.OAQPS.OW.
•ndOSW.Pet.rouy)
AiNMnMBl of Air ESMQM
fradi Huudoitt Wuie Tmt-
IDCBR0 SHOCBfOK ftBO E/UpQMl
Fadtttt. (USEPA 1986)
AirToiiu 'llol Spo-j*
Progrun Ruk AMM*meat
GiwJdinM
(CAKOA. Much 1990)
i — *-' — •- •» -* 	 — -•
UDWIBIIH • nOWmiDIBCBHH
ActfH nn -La^lo2aOir
(PdUk Advimy ud Stecriii|
CaMnittee Ride Rnking
Rctmt Briefing Mrtetiii
M«ph26, 1991)
HKOMAc«toT 1.000 4
Threshold Limit Value (TLV)
U«ed Directly
(Concentration Units)
Air:
q» RIB
UMd Uied
Direcdy Directly
Doee/Rfd Score
1-2 1
2-10 2
10-100 3
> 100 4

-------
Table 2: Environmental Toxicity Ranges
p-**.
TSCACkenkelSMtfaf
Syrtes for Hoard oBd
(O'Brjnja. T. R> and Ron.
R.H. IWS.JoomalofTo*-
tcology MM BoviiQcmcptM
Health, Vol  1.000 > 100 0
AqtMtk
WQC RQ Ranking
< • 100 MM < • 100 Ibs Group 1
500 1,000 Group!
>- 1,000 3,000 GroupS
RQ
l)Md
Directly

•oOflBOXedjf



AufiwHUnr:
Acute Chronic
AWQC or AWQC or Auigned
AALAC AALAC V«lue
< 1 ug/l . < 100 ug/l 10.000
1-10 100-1.000 1,000
10-100 1.000-10,000 100
100-1.000 10.000-100.000 10
> 1.000 > IQO.QOO 1
Mmnuliu Toxichy


TPQ Ranking
< = 100 Ib* Gioup 1
500 Group 2
>= 1,000 GroupS



-------
Table 3: Exposure Parameter Ranges
Rankhf Sytfaaj
TSCA'eTRJCheakal
fcnodn Methodology
(USEPA, date nnlmowt.
memo from OTS)










TSCACbemkalSoorhc
3yateeB for Hanud aad
Rvnnmuv I " tM^r«ttn%
(O'Bryan.T.ltamJIfeM,
ft. H. 1988, lournalof Tox-
icology and EDvironnMBtal
Health. Vo!(l):l 19-134)




L.
— -
-~™-













Half-life Scon
> lyr S
•-S2 wk 4
2-8 wk 3
1-14 dayi 2
< Iday 1

BCF Log P Score
> 1.000 >4.35 9
2001.000 3.5-435 7
100-200 3 18-3.5 5
10 100 2.0-3 18 3
< 10 < 20 0
Efjwaure Level
Criteria Score
^ 700 ma/yr 3
70 to 700 2
<70 1























Population Level
Surface Water:
Criteria Score
> IOE6 people 3
IOE5-10E6 2
< IOES 1
Criteria Score
> IOES people 1
IOE4-IOE5 2
< IOE4 1
Orotant Water.
Criteria Score
> 25.000 people 3
5.000-25.000 2
< 5,000 1













-------
Table 3: Exposure Parameter Ranges
RaakfegSvatttM
Toxic Chemical RdeM*
bveatary Ri* Senwb|  IOB-2*n-n3/mol < 1.5 > 1.000 > 1 yew High Concern
< ICB-6 >4.S <250 < 1/2 day Low Concern
Air Water Rate of
Aquatic Degndatin Degradition Removal in
Half-livca Rate Rata bio. treatment Ranking
>lyew > mootlu > months LogKow kI«MlV«a>
-D lor oioocgr*
5orAe0 Wmtar:
Half Life Half Life Aaiigned
(Lain) (Other) LogKow Value
< 0.02 daya < 0.2 daya <3.5 0.0007
0.02-2 0.2-0.5 3.5-4 0.07
2-20 0.5-1.5 44.5 0.4
> 20 > 1.5 > 4.5 1
Eipoftm ftjcvcl


Populflboa L0vd



-------
Table 3: Exposure Parameter Ranges
Raakag SjratMM
1^1 Rule
(coaduded)






















— —•
Uee priority: avaiUblirjr of BCP.
LogKow. water aolubilirjr
AnigMd
Value BCF LogKow Water Solubility
50.000 > 10,000 5.5-6.0 < 25 ng/1
5,000 1,000-10.000 4.5-5.5 25-500
500 100-1,000 3.2-4.5 500-1.500
50 10-100 2.0-3.2
5 MO 0.8-2.0
0.5 < 1 < 0.8 > 1.500
Ait:
Auigned
Vapor PrcMure cnry'i Conttaa Value
> 10 Ton 0.001 atm-raV 3
10-0.001 IOE-S to 0.001 2
0.001-0.00001 IOB-7tolOB-5 1
< 0.00001 < IOE-7 0
Water Dirtributioo Coefficient (Kd) (ml/g)
Solubility Karat < 10 10-1.000 > 1.000
Liquid 1 1 0.01 0.0001
> 100 rag/1 1 1 0.01 0 0001
MOO 0.2 0.2 0.002 2.0E-05
OOM 0002 0002 2.0E-OS 2.0E-07

-------
Table 3: Exposure Parameter Ranges
feoluf Sy«OBM
A lUattftg Syatoai for Cbu
Watar Act Sectioa) 307M La*
_* ffcj^^j^ ••*. •*- «. — »-
• movHy ranmDB
(USBPA I9U, July)













ScremiDEPnKttlMfcr
r^«»u.t. of fapoitMM M
«»Offiee«fW«tar
(USBPA I9M. fWCfttNd by
OHEA, Novorabfv)
USEPA Unfiusbed BM!MM
Report: ACoopmradve
AMcauncat of Envirauncotal
Priihtenii
(USLPA 1987. prepared by
CV.'A. O\H. OAQI'S. OW.
tn.l «JSW. | eJ.ruory)

••^^^•••K Aa«A««jBl
BipMun rtXMOU
Hydrolysis
Half Life lUto Scora
> 12 mo . I
6-12 no . S
34 no >3no 2
4lhr-3no 4lhr-3no 0
24-akr <4lfcr -5
<24kr - 4
Heary's
Coartutt KD vtlue Score
< IOE-3 < 0.01 2
0.0014.01 IOE2-IOE4 0
> 0.01 > IOE4 -S
BAF Log P Score
< 4,000 < 6 1
7004.000 4.S4 S
300-700 44.5 2
>300 >4 0
For human anal aquatic
populations:
BCF Score
> 1,000 High
< 1,000 Low








Exposure Level






























Populataoa Levd






















Noo-Cmocer Effect*:

People
Exposed Score
0.000 1
t.OOO IOES 2
IOES-IOE7 3
> IOE7 4

-------
Table 3: Exposure Parameter Ranges
•nlfal SJTMMM
LMt*kft«'« BcvirwuMMtal
ActiM fUa 'Leap to 2000*
(Pttblk AdviMiy Md *wrin|
CommtaMRwklUakbl
Kctic* Briefing MMrid
Muck 26. 1991)
OJifemuAirlteMaMe
Baud Tfl-k O«wi«l L^
A NIOSH/OSHA Ftodnt OnUe
(Air ResourcM Board of the
Suie of CaliToraU)
••MMMMA ^*m*»lmM
mpoaov mBBDH

Air:
Dangeroui:
IDLH < 2000 ppm
•ml
vapor prci. > 20 mnHg
Expoure Level


FtofNb&aLcvd
PopuktkM Eipoaed Score
1-400 I
400-4.000 2
4.000-40.000 3
40.000-400.000 4
> 400.000 S


-------
                             Table 4:  Severity of Effect Measures
      Ranking SyetoBB
                                 Severity of Effect
DSEPAUnfBiahcd
Report: ACompantivia
(USEPA 1987. prepand by
OPA.OAR.OAQPS.OW.
and OSW. February)
Category I
ladudei organs, impairment at low of which it bid and cannot bo conpenteied for.et til. or only
        canine (Le. expeniive mirhaairel device*, tranepltntatino). Aln indudee gonadt. IOM of
Lung. hcuf , bt«M/ipiMl cord, ludaey. liw. bone ounaw.
                             Category U
                             Includes orguM who«e IOM or impairaenl may be fattl, but which caa be conpeaialod for by
                                           •py.  Alw include* orgaae, impeiracol or IOM of which 8ndif«lfe ea advcrM effect
                             oa immime fuactioa or benutopoietic function which may be life Ihnetcaiag.
                             Adreoal. thyroid, parathyroid, pituitary, pancreatic ideti. paocrcaa. eaophagin. Moraacb. •mall into
                             large inteetine. lymph node, eplecn. Ihymua. trachoi. phujmx. oriMiy bladder, ikin

                             Category III
                             Impairment or IOM of any of iheae orgeat it MI life ihnateBiag but may reauta IB aevere fuactional
                             emotiooal handicapa.
                                    ry reproductive orgtat (oviduct, cpididymia. utem, proctate, eoagulatiag gland,  aeminal
                             veaical. ductua deferent, pcnit. vagina), eye, bone. BOM. nerve, mutcle. urinary bladder, blood vca
                             ear. gall bladder, harderian and Incrimal gland. Uryai, mammary gland, aalivaiy gland, tongue, loo
                             ureter, urethra

                             Category IV
                             Theee ergant an not found in huratai and louc Icaioot (noocarctnotenk) in Ihete orgut are not re
                             extrapolable to hunaaa.
                             ailoral/preputial gland. lymbal't gland, anal gltndt

-------
                             Table 4:  Severity of Effect Measures
      Hinting Sy*eaa
                                 Severity of Elfect
ofToxicEITecai
Bflecta
(USBPA I9M. prepared for
BCAO. March)
   Lose of which hi fatal end
     at* irreplaceable (I)
           -1.3
 Leu ef which BMy be fetal yet
   era replaceable or organs
    _-L*_L S_       	f__
    WBim IV ^VGVHHBvy IfM
proper function of immunity (II)
           - 1.0
 Lees of which is not fatal but
   nay mult b fuactkMMl or
   ciMtfiooal kandkap (III)
           -05
 Not found n lumuu tod tout
 lotion! found may Mt transfer
       tokuiMM(IV)
           • 0.2S
                                                                   • 1.0
                ytfEM
          level
          • 2.0
Swelling, degeneration, fatty
     change, pigment
          • 3.0
   Atrophy, hypertrophy,
  cytomegaly, hemorrhage
          • 4.0
  Necroats, minrralirntion,
   emphysema, infarction
          -5.0
 Fmraia/regenrelioa. atypie
  hyperplaaia/pfol iteration
          • 6.0

  toiletry, fetotoucrty w/o
     maternal touchy
          »7.0
 Terntogcnesis w/o maternal
         touchy
          • 1.0
        Taiicily Emjuiat

   Body ««t. change, food uuVor
 wMar COM. change, impairment of
          org*n> (IV)
             • 1.0
   Small •ematological changei.
 irapaif meat of organs (III), weight
   change in organs (II.  Ill, IV)
             •2.0
  mild impairment of organs (II),
 •even impairment of organs (III),
   minor organ weight change (I)
             • 1.0
   nQd impairment of organs (I),
  major impairment of organs (II),
   major organ weight change (I)
             • 4.0
Functional impairment of organs (I).
             •S.O
 Major degree of fuactl impairment
          in organs (I)
             • 6.0
  Nervous System, respiratory, or
cardiovascular depression, mortality
 devtopmeiitaJ touchy w/o maternal
             touchy
             = 7.0

-------
       d. Factoring data quality /uncertainty into the index

       There are differences among chemicals in the supporting health effects and exposure data.
Health data for one type of effect (e.g., cancer) may be based on animal studies, while evidence
of other types of effects may be derived from epidemiology (e.g. neurological effects of lead).
Even specific numerical estimates of a single type of effect, cancer potency, have varying levels
of evidence to support the estimate.  For some chemicals without any specific toxicity data, we
may have to use structure-activity relationships to estimate the relative rankings. There will also
be differences in levels of uncertainty associated with exposure scenarios. For example, we may
be able to model air and water emissions from certain facilities, but have less information on
releases from TSDFs and POTWs.

       The only system we  reviewed that attempted to measure and incorporate any element of
data uncertainty was the method for determining carcinogenicity RQ.  This system employs an
ordinal scoring for carcinogenic weight-of-evidence. This score is combined with a score based
on q,* using a matrix in which each cell is assigned a high, medium or low rank. This same
approach  could be  used to weight ranks in the noncancer toxicity categories, as well as  in
exposure  categories.   Alternatively,  numerical uncertainty scores could be  used to  weight
chemical scores within a category.

       e.  Using severity indices to weight chemical scores within a category

       Several systems develop human health effects scores that are comparable across different
kinds of  non-cancer risks.  These systems employ effect severity  indices to weight different
effects by the relative risks they pose.  For example, a report done for EPA/ECAO develops two
scales that ordinarily rank noncarcinogenic toxic effects, one by lesion severity, another by type
of effect.  Both scales  rank the effects relative to each other, but do not measure the magnitude
of the overall risk.  No attempt was made to rank these effects relative to cancer, nor did the
report focus on reproductive or mutagenic effects. These scales would therefore be useful for
ranking only noncarcinogenic  human health risk*.
       f . Ranking individual rk^flvriM* or forming subindices

       Once chemicals are scored relative to one another within each category, each chemical
can be characterized by its profile of scores.  At this point, a chemical's scores can be combined
across categories to form a rank for that chemical in each area of interest (i.e. human health
risks, environmental risks.) These ranks would be used to calculate the index.  One advantage
to *h" method is mat such ranks indicate the relative importance of a chemical with a single
number.  Many systems, however, do not aggregate scores across categories (see the Region 7
and the OTS/ORNL scoring systems) because this requires making the difficult judgement about
die  relative importance of risks posed by different categories.

      . Alternatively, scores  can be aggregated within  a category across chemicals to form a
category  subindex.  For example, mammalian acute toxicity scores of all chemicals might be

                                         B-19

-------
 added together (possibly weighted by exposure scores) to.calculate the 'mammalian acute toxicity
 subindex.' This could be done for each category, creating an aggregate profile of all of the TRI
 chemicals.   Movements within these subindices would provide  measures of  environmental
 improvement.

       g. Methods of establishing the relative importance of risks among categories

       If a single rank is to be calculated for each chemical from the various categorical scores,
 one of several calculation methods could  be used.  The simplest ways to combine numerical
 scores is to multiply or add them together.  The flaw in this approach is t*»at ordinal scores have
 no specific numerical meaning except within the categories, and even tr .n they do not reflect
 the magnitude of the  differences, but only the order of the ranks (see above.)

       Another approach is to scale the scores then multiply or add them together so that the
 scores have a common denominator.  For example, we could divide the exposure value at a
 facility by the maximum exposure value observed over all facilities. We can then  add the scores
 in different categories because they have a similar scale.

       A third approach is to create a matrix of categories and then rank each cell of the matrix
 separately. The cells may (but do not have to) reflect a mathematical function of the individual
 ranks of row and column that make up the cell.  In this approach, individual chemicals would
 not be ranked; only  the categories into which  they fell would have ranks.  This method is
 particularly appropriate for combining several qualitative (i.e. high, medium, low) scores. For
 example:
Aquatic Risk Rank

Acute
Aquatic
Toxicity


Low

Medium

High
Very High

Persistence
0
0

3

6
9
1
0

6

9
12
2
0

9

12
15
3
0

12

15
18
       A fourth option is simply to select die worst score that a chemical has in any category
and use that value as the chemical's rank.  This would require that all of the scores be of the
same type, i.e. qualitative or numerical.  It also implies that scales of the scores can be equated.
The methods for determining scores in each of the categories would have to meet these criteria.
                                          3-20

-------
       Ranks in one category could also be conditional on a rank in a different category.  For
 example, noncarcinogenic chronic  toxicity might only be meaningful if exposure is  above
 threshold RfD.  Criteria for ranking a chemical might require that the noncarcinogenic toxicity
 score and exposure score  meet separate criteria at the same time.

       We can also apply special decision rules in conjunction with the  overall scoring system.
 This may be useful in cases in which a particular score category is of overwhelming importance
 given certain conditions.  For example, an extreme carcinogenicity score, regardless of other
 scores, might automatically classify a chemical as "high".  A de minimis emissions score  might
 eliminate the chemical from further consideration regardless of toxicity scores.  Chemicals
 with very low toxicity in  all categories might also be eliminated.

       h. Weighting scores: an alternative to methods presented in Lg.

       One option discussed in Section I.e. was to combine scores across categories to derive
 a single score for the chemical. A scoring algorithm to combine a chemical's scores across
 categories into a single  rank requires the assignment of weights to each of the scoring
 elements. This is probably the most controversial and difficult step in the process because
 of the difficulty in evaluating the relative importance of different kinds of risk. In fact, some
 of systems we reviewed avoided this step altogether. However, in order to develop a single
 index that encompasses different kinds of risk (e.g. a human health index which incorporates
 both carcinogenic and noncarcinogenic risks), a weighting system which implies relative
 importance of effects will have to  be used.

       The primary issue in comparing two risks of different nature  centers on attributing
 a common unit of value to the risks so that their relative magnitude  **" be compared. Of
 the EPA and non-EPA ranking systems reviewed under this assignment, only the  Office of
Toxic Substances Production-Based Targeting Methodology explicitly assigns relative values
to different kinds of risks. Risks from oncogenicity, reproductive and neurotoxicity, chronic
toxicity, and ecotoxitity were assigned relative weights of 3,1,2 and 2, respectively. Outside
of the Agency, I Louisiana's Environmental Action Plan gave equal weight to human cancer
and non-cancer risks.

       Other ranking systems implicitly weight different toxicity risks.  For example, RQs
indirectly address disparate risk comparisons by restricting the possible scores depending on
the particular RQ being  developed: cancer RQs can only range from 1-100, while aquatic
toxicity RQs can range from 1-5000.  The Hazard Ranking System employs a toxicity scale
from 0 to 10,000 that enters into the calculation of site ranking without adjustment for the
kind of toxic risk measured. The scale is based on various measures depending on the kind
of toxicity being incorporated:
                                        B-21

-------
Chrooie
Toudty
Reference dote
flUD) (mg/kg-

-------
 II.    Options for Ranking of Chemicals

       Section I has described the elements of a scoring system. The components described
 in that section can be combined  in numerous ways to produce an index. The following is
 a discussion of three possible options.  The options presented below should in no way be
 considered the universe of possible options.  Rather,  they should be considered as points
 of departure for discussion of an appropriate algorithm for constructing the TRI index. The
 elements of each of the options were drawn from (or are modifications of) scoring systems
 discussed in our review memorandum entitled "Previous  Work on Scoring Systems and
 Chemical Indices." However, none of the options presented below follows one system in its
 entirety; the specific combinations of components are original to this exercise. Option 1
 ranks chemicals ordinally, based on selected measures of the toxicity and exposure potential
 of a chemical.  These ranks are combined with population and emissions data to determine
 the final TRI indicator.  Option 2 takes the same general approach but instead of ordinal
 ranks uses actual toxicity data values to develop  unique rankings for each chemical.  Option
 2 also uses modelling to evaluate exposure potential.  Option 3 describes an approach where
 categories of chemicals are defined based on relevant toxicity and exposure potential
 combinations.  The categories (rather than the chemicals themselves) are assigned relative
 ranks. Chemicals are then assigned to the categories. Site-specific population and emissions
 data are then combined with the categorical ranks to  calculate the indicator.

      Step-by-step descriptions of each of these options are presented below. For each
 step, we identify previous EPA or other scoring  systems that have used similar approaches.
 Summarizes of other EPA and non-EPA scoring systems are presented in the memorandum
 entitled "Previous Scoring and Ranking Systems" (hereafter referred to as the scoring system
 review memo).  To illustrate the use of these options, we have created a sample data set of
 six hypothetical chemicals and three hypothetical facilities.  The chemical-specific and site-
 specific data for these six chemicals are shown in Tables 5  and 6. For each of the options
 proposed, we provide an example of how the indicator would be constructed based on the
sample data set2 The sample data set is kept simple intentionally, since our current focus
is the conceptual structure of the  indicator rather  than the vagaries of  our data  set.
Furthermore, we have generalized the discussion of evaluating potential; more detail on the
mechanics of evaluating exposure  potential is provided  in the memorandum  entitled
"Mechanics of Evaluating Exposure for the TRI Index." Of course, the actual data set will
be far more complicated, uncertain and incomplete than the sample data presented here.
Once the Work Group has had the opportunity to  review and discuss the conceptual
approaches, we can explore the details of implementing potential options using an actual
subset of the TRI data set
    2 While the examples provided show how a human-health based indicator would be
developed, the same principles can be applied to the development of an ecological
indicator.
                                       B-23

-------
                                                 TABLE 5 - CHEMICAL-SPECIFIC DATA
Chemical
A
B
C
D
E (metal)
F (metal)
ToikfeyDau
Cancer
WOE
B2
B2
B2
A
C
B2
ql»
(kg-day/mg)
10
0.001
1
003
3
4S
-------
                                     TABLE 6 - SITE-SPECIFIC EXPOSURE DATA
00
KJ
Facility
•ad
Oir alkali

Faculty 1
A
B
C
E
Facility 2
C
D
F
Facility 3
A
C
D
E
EmiMloM
Air Water
Obi/yr) (IWyr)
1000 6000
2000 4000
2000 '1000
•^QQQ JOOO
3000 1000
4000 5000
10000 2000
2000 4000
4000 2000
6000 10000
1000 6000
PopulitkM Etpoeed
Air Water
(no. people) (no. people)
3000 500
3000 500
3000 500
3000 500
1000 6000
1000 6000
1000 6000
2000 2000
2000 2000
2000 2000
2000 2000
Character ink* of Facility
Air
High
DUpenkm
Low
f*i_____|__
uupcmon
Medium
DbpenkM
Water
Low
Stream
Flow
Medium
Stream
Row
High
Stream
Flow

-------
 Option 1.

 Step 1. Using an ordinal scale, rank chemicals within each toxicity evaluation criterion.
 Ordinal ranking is a common approach in a number of ranking systems. Often, ranks are
 assigned on an ordinal scale (from 0-10, for example) rather than assigning unique values
 to each chemical.   The ranking of the chemicals is based on quantitative dose-response
 information if possible. Several systems we reviewed used ordinal scales for ranking toxiciry,
 including the TRI  Risk Screening Guide,  OTS  pollution  prevention  screening, the
 OTS/ORNL chemical ranking scheme, and the Louisiana Environmental Action Plan.

 Step 2a. Within each of these toxiciry categories, assign severity rank (e.g.,  cellular change
 versus organ damage) for noncarcinogens. Chemicals that have similar reference doses may
 pose dissimilar health risks. Severity ranking attempts to weight chemicals based on the
 relative gravity of the noncancer health effects risks posed. Severity ranking has been used
 in several previous ranking/scoring efforts, such as the OTS pollution prevention screening,
 the  Integrated Environmental Management Program,  and the Louisiana  Environmental
 Action Plan.  A scheme for severity ranking was presented in the ECAO report entitled
 "Examination of the Severity of Toxic Effects and Recommendations of a Systematic
 Approach to Rank Adverse Effects," which is presented in detail in the scoring systems
 review  memo.

 Step 2b.  Assign ranks based on weight-of-evidence  (e£* substantial evidence versus
 suggestive evidence) ranks for carcinogens.  This step is an  attempt to recognize the
 uncertainty in the classification of a chemical as a human carcinogen.  This step uses the
 GAG  weight- of-evidence (WOE) classification scheme (where A  c  known  human
 carcinogen;  B = probable human carcinogen; and  C  • possible human  carcinogen) to
 weight carcinogens.  Ranking based on weight-of-evidence classification has been used in
 the OTS-pollution prevention screening and in the Integrated Environmental Management
 Program, and has played a role in other schemes that use "best professional judgment" to
 assign ranks to chemicals (such as the Unfinished Business report).

 Step 3. Determine relative weights for each toxiciry category relative to other categories
 (e.&, hepatic effects versus cancer). This is likely to be  among the most controversial steps
 in the process. Many scoring systems have avoided combining dissimilar risks and have
 instead developed separate scores for different types of  risks. For example, the Region VII
TRI strategy is to  derive  separate indices for chemicals based on acute  effects, chronic
 noncancer, cancer and aquatic toxicity. However, a few weighting schemes (notably, two
 regulatory efforts) have compared different types of toxicity. The Hazard Ranking System
 (used to place sites on the NFL) implicitly assigns relative weights to cancer  and non-cancer
 effects by using the same scale  to score chemicals  on these attributes (see the scoring
systems review memo for further detail).   Also, OAQPS has proposed a scheme for
establishing off-setting emissions credits in the program governing early emissions reductions
of hazardous air pollutants. The scheme explicitly allows emissions trading among
                                       B-26

-------
 carcinogens and  other  chemicals, where emissions from  carcinogens are (numerically)
 weighted more heavily than noncarcinogens.

 Step 4. The categorical toxicity rank for each chemical is the product of the raw toxicity
 rank, the severity/WOE rank and the categorical rank. The overall toxicity rank for a
 chemical is the average of its ranks in the four toxicity  categories.  Another possible
 approach would be to take the root mean square of the four toxicity category  ranks (an
 approach used in the  Hazard Ranking System).

 Step  5.  For  the exposure  evaluation criteria, use  photolysis  rate,  solubility,  and
 bioconcentration  factor to rank chemicals for the inhalation, drinking  water, and  fish
 ingestion  exposure   pathways,  respectively.    A  number  of systems  use   relevant
 physicochemical values to evaluate exposure potential in various media. The Risk Screening
 Guide used selected  physicochemical  parameters  to qualitatively evaluate mobility of
 chemicals in each media.  The Hazard Ranking System also uses selected parameters to
 score exposure potential, although a greater number of parameters are included in the HRS
 exposure evaluation because  some site-specific  data are  generally  available  for HRS
 evaluations.

 Step 6. Multiply the media-specific exposure rank and toxicity rank by population exposed
 and emissions for that pathway for  each facility.  This  step combines the toxicity
 considerations with the factors that determine  exposure  potential (i.e.,  the chemical's
 exposure rank and emissions, and population size).  Size of exposed population is used as
 a ranking criteria in  many of scoring systems we reviewed, including:   the  PPD TRI
 pollution prevention targeting; OPA ranking of discharges to POTWs and surface .waters:
 OTS TSCA prescreening of TRI  chemicals; the Hazard Ranking System; the Integrated
 Environmental Management Program; the i^nnfciana Environmental Action Plan; and the
 California Air Toxics  Hotspots Program.

The use of population size as a prominent weighting factor may be unacceptable to those
who feel that such an emphasis undervalues risks to rural populations. Furthermore, various
regulatory efforts  in the Agency focus risks to the Most Exposed Individual (MEI); a TRI
indicator method  which does  not  consider MEI risks would conflict with this philosophy.
There are also difficulties associated with characterizing the size of exposed populations for
certain exposure pathways (such as solid waste disposal).  These difficulties will result in
unequal levels of uncertainty in the exposure potential evaluation across exposure  pathways.

On the other band, overall population risk has been used elsewhere (notably, in the
Unfinished Business report) to characterize general environmental progress; avoidance of
population risk, not MEI  risk, is  also used in cost-benefit  analyses to describe potential
benefits of implementing environmental regulations.
                                       B-27

-------
Step 7. The final index is the sum of the weighted volumes for all TRI chemicals for all
pathways across all facilities.

A step-by-step example demonstrating Option 1 for the sample data set is found in Figure
1.

Advantages • This option allows fine-scale tracking of subtle differences among chemicals.
Importantly, by calculating media-chemical-facility  subindices, we  can  easily  identify
underlying reasons for changes in the overall index by tracking individual media, industries,
or chemicals.   However, the final calculation yields a single index rather than a series of
subindices  across categories  that may be hard for the public to interpret.

Disadvantages - Determining appropriate and sensible weighting factors for the different
elements is difficult Retaining a proportional scoring system based largely on ordinal ranks
and performing mathematical  functions on them may give the false  impression that the
absolute magnitude of  the ranks have numerical meaning.
                                       B-28

-------
Figure 1. Example Calculation for Option 1 Ranking System





Step 1. Ueiag as ordinal Kale, rank Thrmr"1* within each selected loucity evtluaooa entena.





For thu and subsequent steps, ranks are ordered low to high.
Chcoucal
A
B
C
D
E(BCtal)
F(meul)
Cancer
S
I
3
2
4
6
Chronic Toxiciry Other Than Cancer
Liver
1


2


Neurologic

1


2

Reproductive


1


2
Step2. Wahiaeachoft





2.a. For this step, we me weighu from I to 3 to rank the relative severity of chronic effects.
Chemical
A
B
C
D
E (metal)
F (metal)
Chronic Toxiciry Other Than Cancer
Liver
1


3


Neurologic

3


1

Reproductive


2


1
                                                 B-29

-------
 2 b  We UK weight! from I to 3 for assigning carcinogen! by their weight of evidence classification
Chemical
A
B
C
D
E(fflcul)
F (metal)
Cancer
(WOE)
2
2
2
3
I
2
 Step 9. rVtfirmiaf weight* for etch touctty category.

 For the purposes of this example, the relative weight* arc:
Reproductive Effo
Neurological Eflo
Other Chronic Effects
10
 7
 S
 2
Step 4. Derive categorical toxictty rank by multiplying toxicfty rank. cflcct-«pocinc
cvirliiBfr rank and rrosi ratj/nry severity rank. To fM overall nak, average the
                                 neater
                        '• nak la each category.
Chemical
A
B
C
D
E (metal)
F (metal)
(•)
5 x 2 x 10 - 100
1 x 2 x 10 - 20
3 x 2 x 10 - 60
2 x 3 x 10 - 60
4x1x10-40
6x2x10-120
Chronic Totictty Other Than Cancer
(b)
Liver
1x1x2-2


2 < 3 x 2 - 12


Neurologic

1 x 3 x 5 - 15


2 x 1 x 5 « 10

Reproductive


1x2x7-14


2 x 1 x 7 - 14
OVERALL
AVERAGE
(***V2
51
17.5
37
36
25
67 |
                                                     B-30

-------
Sup 5 Derive rank for each exposure puhwty baaed on nbeot pfcyaeochemical pamnacr
Chemicil



A
B
C
D
E(aeul)
F(aeul)
Air

BtMdoa
PhocolyiU
1
4
2
3
5
S
Drinking
Water
Buedoa
Solubility
6
5
3
1
2
4
Fich
logeaioa
B«iedoa
BCF
3
4
5
6
1
1
                                                B-31

-------
      Combine exposure and toxxtfy ranks with population tad fmif"«* d»u to obuia media  ipettfic
FOR AIR:

Facility


Facility 1
Facility 3
Facility 1
Facility 1
Facility 2
Facility 3
Facility 2
Facility 3
Facility 1
Facility 3
Facility 2

Chemical


A
A
B
C
C
C
D
D
E
E
F

Emission*
(Iba/yr)
(•)
1000
2000
2000
2000
3000
4000
4000
6000
4000
1000
10000

Pop Expoaed
(no. people)
0»
3000
2000
3000
3000
1000
2000
1000
2000
3000
2000
1000
Touctty
Rank

(e)
51
51
17.5
37
37
37
36
36
25
25
67
Exposure
Rank

(d)
1
1
4
2
2
2
3
3
5
5
5
TOTAL:
AIR
INDEX

e=axbxcxd
1 5E-08
2.0E*OS
42E«0«
44E-08
2.2E*08
59E-08
43E-OS
I.3E*09
l.5E«09
2.5E*08
34E*09

                                               B-32

-------
FOR WATER:
We obuin an average rank for water exposures using the following formula:
Total exposure to water aoureea it expressed as : 2L drinking water « (0.14 kg fUh *BCF (Ukg)|
Average rank for water • (Rank for drinking water »(2 Lftotal «p.)) * (Rank for fish • (0.14 x BCFVtoul eip.)

Facility


Facility 1
Facility 3
Facility 1
Facility 1
Facility 2
Facility 3
Facility 2
Facility 3
Facility 1
Facility 3
Facility 2

Cheated


A
A
B
C
C
C
D
D
E
E
F

EwtttsUteaU

32E«09
1 9E*IO

-------
Sup 7 Sum Bcdu-*pecJic indicc* for overall TRI index
Facdjty

Facility 1
Facility 3
Facility 1
Facility 1
Facility 2
Facility 3
Facility 2
Facility 3
Facility 1
Facility 3
Facility 2
Chemical

A
A
B
C
C
C
D
D
E
E
F
TOTAL
AIR
INDEX
(•)
I.5E-08
2.0E*08
4.2E«08
4.4E«08
2.2E*08
S.9E«08
4.3E«0«
1.3E-09
l.SE«09
2.SE*0>
3.4E*09
8.9E«09
WATER
INDEX
o»
73E*08
19E*09
1.5E*08
90E*07
1 1E*09
7.2E*08
6.4E«09
4.3E+09
7.5E«07
6.0E«08
3.2E*09
1.9E»IO
TOTAL
TRJ INDEX
c *> («*b)
8.8E*08
2.IE*09
s.Tmn
S.3E«08
1.3E«09
1.3E«09
6.8E«09
5.6E«09
1.6E«09
8.SE<08
6.6E«09
2.8E*IO
                                              B-34

-------
 Option 2.

 Step 1. Rank chemicals using actual proportional measures for the categories of concern.
 For carcinogens, use q,* values. The q,' expresses risk to an individual per milligram (mg)
 of chemical per kilogram of body weight per day (mg/kg-day). For noncarcinogens, use the
 inverse of the RfD. The RfD is the dose (expressed as mg of chemical per kg body weight
 per day)  below which  no adverse effects are expected to occur.  Using proportional
 measures for toxicity ranking is a common approach in other ranking systems. For example,
 RQs were used by OPA in ranking discharges to POTWs and to surface water bodies; OTS
 TSCA prescreening of TRI chemicals used RQ as a cutoff for high concern chemicals. RfDs
 and Q' are proposed as the basis for toxicity ranking in Region VII's TRI strategy.  Outside
 the Agency, the California Air Toxic Hotspots program uses actual dose-response data (in
 conjunction with exposure modelling - discussed below) in their identification and ranking
 of air toxics problems in the state.

 Step la. Since toxicity  values in different categories have  dissimilar units (e.g., cancer
 potency estimate versus an RfD), normalize the values by expressing the chemical's toxicity
 value in a given category as a fraction of the maximum value possible in that category. The
 resulting fraction is the chemical's rank in that  category.  Expressing the-ranks in this
 manner will also allow us to combine the ranks with exposure potential ranks that have been
 normalized in a similar manner (see below). This normalizing  approach was used in
 OAQPS' Source Category Ranking System, which ranks potential air toxics problems across
 industries.

 Once the toxicity ranks within categories are determined, the next three steps are the same
 as those described in Option 1.

 Step 2a and 2b.  Within each toxicity category, assign severity and weight-of-evidence
 (WOE) ranks to each chemical.

 Step 3. Determine relative weights for each toxicity category relative to other categories.

 Step 4. Determine the categorical toxicity rank for each chemical. The categorical rank
 is the product of the raw toxicity rank, the severity rank, the WOE rank and the categorical
 rank.  The overall toxicity rank is the average of its ranks in the four toxicity categories.

 StepS. For the exposure evaluation, model the fate and transport of the chemicals. To do
so,  use the emissions data, site-specific environmental characteristics (or default values
where  these are not available), and  physicochemical properties to obtain ambient media
concentrations at specified distances.  These data can be weighted by the number of persons
at each distance (that is, the number of persons exposed to each estimated concentration)
to obtain population-weighted average exposures  for each site where chemical is emitted.
                                       3-35

-------
 As mentioned earlier, specific methods for applying exposure modelling to the TRI database
 are discussed in a separate memo and will not be expanded on here.  However, it should
 be noted that generic exposure modelling to rank exposure potential is used by a number
 of other scoring/ranking systems.  For example, Appendix B of the Risk Screening Guide
 presents results of generic air modelling to assist readers in the evaluation of air releases.
 OTS' TSCA prescreening of TRI chemicals used generic air and water exposure modelling
 to place chemicals  in categories of low, medium and high concern.  Furthermore, generic
 air modelling was used by OAQPS to identify high risk chemicals as pan of defining offsets
 credits for early emissions reductions of hazardous air pollutants. Other scoring methods
 using generic modelling approaches include the California Air Toxics Hotspots program and
 OAQPS' Source Category Ranking System.

 Step 6.  For each chemical-facility combination, express the exposure estimate as a fraction
 of the maximum exposure observed to obtain an exposure index. Normalizing the exposure
 values allows us to combine the exposure ranks with the toxiciry rankings in  later steps.
 Otherwise, we would be combining ranks with dissimilar scales. The exposure index is then
 combined with the  toxiciry rank to  derive the medium-specific index. The final index is the
 sum of the media-specific indices.

 (A modification to this approach would be to use  the RfDs  and q,*s in concert with the
 exposure models to estimate cancer cases and/or number of individuals above the RfD.
 The  "cases" could then be scaled  by the maximum number  of "cases" observed at each
 facility to obtain a unique subindex  for each chemical-facility combination by exposure
 pathway. The index for the chemical would be the sum of the subindices across all facilities.
 The  overall index would be the sum of the chemical indices.)

 An example demonstrating Option 2 for the sample data set is found in Figure 2.

Advantages - The use of location-dependent exposure indices allows  the index to reflect
changes in where chemicals are released, as well as changes in volume. Normalizing toxicity
ranks allows the use of structure-activity relationships to  fill in data gaps; if a particular
toxiciry value is not known, the chemical can still be assigned a rank relative to  the highest
value in the category.

Disadvantages - The lack of toxicity data for many of the TRI chemicals would hinder this
approach. This approach presents some programming challenges for performing multiple
chemical, multiple site analyses.  This option has the same difficulties as Option  1  in
assigning appropriate sensible weighting factors to different elements.  Furthermore, the
option relies on normalizing the  ranks based on  a "reference  chemical" which has the
maximum value in the ranking category.  A danger in this approach is the possibility that
the underlying data (toxiciry or physicochemical information) may change over time. Since
all other chemical ranks are keyed  to the values for this chemical, a change in the reference
chemical would change the entire index. Therefore, rather than selecting the chemical with
the maximum value, we may want to  select as the reference chemical a well-known, -.veil

                                       B-36

-------
characterized chemical for which underlying data is unlikely to change. Using this approach,
the reference chemical rank would still be 1, while chemicals with values greater than the
reference chemical would be assigned ranks proportionally greater than 1.
                                        B-37

-------
Figure 2. Example Calculation for Option 2 Ranking System
Step 1. Urio| nvene of RID value tad •COM! q* value*, rank chcmicali within each eeleoad touory
evaluata criteria.

For Out and fubieqiient itepi. ranki are ordered low to high.
Step la. Since the raw tmictty
at a fraction of the maximum r
Chemical
A
B
C
D
E (metal)
F (metal)
Cancer
(q*)
10
0.001
1
0.03
5
45
Chronic Toxicity Other Than Cancer
(I/RFD)
Liver
10


20


Neurologic

S


200

Reproductive


SO


1000
• different ecalei
rim that category, lie
rank to 1.
Chemical
A
B
C
O
E (metal)
F (metal)
C—
2.2E-01
2.2E-03
2.2E-02
6.7E-04
I.IE-OI
1.0E«00
Chronic Toxktty Other Than Cancer
Liver
O.S


1


Neurologic

0.02S


1

Reproductive


O.OS


1
                                                 B-38

-------
 Step 2  WHJun each of these categories auign severty sod weight of evidence rans, to each

 2.t. As in Option I. *e use weight! from 1 to 3 to rank the relative leverity of chronic effecu
Chemical
A
B
C
D
E(ffleul)
F (metal)
Chronic Touciry Other Than Cancer
Liver
1


3


Neurologic

3


1

Reproductive


2


1
2.b. We use weight* from 1 to 3 for Assigning carcinogens by their weight of evi
Chemical
A
B
C
D
E(aeul)
F (metal)
^SJtPTT
(WOE)
2
2
2
3
1
2
Step 3. Determine •evertly weight* for each traictty category.

Thii step U alao the tame ai Optioo 1. For the purpose* of this example, the relative weights
                                                        10
                                                         7
                                                         5
                                                         2
Reproductive Effect!
Neurological Effect*
Other Chronic Effecu

-------
                 Derive categorical louctfy rank by multiplying louciry rank, wventy rank tod category rank.
          To get overall rank, average the chemical'« rank is each category.
Chemical
A
B
C
D
E(meul)
F (metal)
Cancer
(•)
2e-lx2x 10 = 4
Ze-S x 2 x 10 - 4e-*
2e-2 x 2 x 10 » 4e-l
7e~4 x 3 I 10 • 2e-2
le-lil»10» 1
1 x 2 x 10 = 20
Chronic Toueity Other Than Cancer
0»)
Liver
0.5 * 1 x 2 - 1


1x3x2-6


Neurologic

0.025*3xS°4e-l


1x1*5=5

Reproductive


O.OS x 2 x 7 a 7e-l


1x1x7=7
OVERALL
AVERAGE
(a*bV2
2.7
0.2
0.6
3.0
3 1
I3.S
Slop 5. Derive rank for each
                                    fthwiy tuiaf modelling approach.
For this atep. we me computer program* to eitimate population-weighted average
in each Medium, lor OBCA chtiiiical ai each facility
The «cpe ere e> followt:
          INPUTS:
                   (Ibs/yr)
    Chemical-tpeciAc model iapun
    Ste-epeciflc model perapmm
      Default model paremeten
        Population rxpoted at
            each *tir*in***
                                                                                       OUIPUI S;
                                                                                   Media concentration! at varying
                                                                                        distance* from touree
                                                                                         Population-weighted
                                                                                          average exposure

-------
For the purpose* of thif example, we assume thai these modeli yield the following results.
FOR AIR:
Facility
Facility 1
Facility 3
Facility 1
Facility 1
Facility:
Facility 3
Facility:
Facility 3
Facility I
Facility 3
Facility 2
Chemical
A
A
B
C
C
C
o
D
E
E
F
Emissions
(Ibs/yr)
1000
2000
2000
2000
3000
4000
4000
6000
4000
1000
10000
Pop. Exposed
(no. people)
3000
2000
3000
3000
1000
2000
1000
2000
3000
2000
1000
Population-Weighted
Average Exposure
(calculated with model)
S.OE-04
3.3E-03
9.0E-03
2.0E-03
3.3E-03
8.0E-03
3.3E-02
2.0E-02
2.0E-42
1.7E-02
1.7E-OI
FOR WATER:
Facility
Facility 1
Facility 3
FacUlty 1
Facility 1
Facility 2
FacfliryS
Facility 2
FacflltyS
Facility 1
Facility 3
Facility 2
Chemical
A
A
B
C
C
C
D
D
E
E
F
Emissions
Oba/yr)
6000
4000
4000
1000
1000
2000
5000
10000
3000
6000
2000
Pop Exposed
(no. people)
300
2000
500
500
6000
2000
6000
2000
500
2000
6000
Population-Weighted
Average Exposure
(calculated with model)
3.5E-02
9.4E-03
1.2E-02
2.9E-04
7.1E-0*
4.7E-04
2.8E-02
4.7E-04
1.8E-04
7.IE-03
7.1E-02

-------
Step 5*. Take the expowrea a§ • fraction of the maximum in order to get exposure indices for the





          FOR AIR:
Facility
Facility 1
F«eUity3
Facility 1
Facility!
Facility!
Facility 3
Facility!
Facility 3
Facility J
Facility 3
Facility 2
Chemical
A
A
B
C
C
C
D
D
E
E
F
Exposure
Index
3.0E-03
2.0E-02
5.4E-02
I.2E-02
2.0E-02
4.8E-02
2.0E-01
1.2E-01
1.2E-01
l.OE-01
l.OE-KJO
          FOR WATER:
Facility
Facflkjl
Facflity3
Facflftyl
FacflMyl
Faeflliy2
Facility 3
Facfltty2
Facility 3
FacQlty 1
Facility 3
Facility 2
Chcnicfll
A
A
B
C
C
C
D
D
E
E
F
Expoaure
Index
5.0E-01
1.3E-OI
I.7E-OI
4.2E-03
I.OE-02
6.7E-03
4.0E-01
6.7E-03
2.5E-03
l.OE-01
1.0E«00
                                                       B-42

-------
Step 6.  To derive oaedia-tpecific indicci, multiply toucity ranks ud expacure inJicc*.
To derive final index. add medU-ipecific mdieei.
Facility
Facility 1
FaeUlty 3
Facility 1
Facility!
F«cility2
Facility 3
Facility 2
Facility 3
Facility 1
Facility 3
Facility 2
Chemical
A
A
B
C
C
C
D
D
E
E
F
Air
Exposure
Index
(from Step Sa)
(•)
30E-03
2.0E-02
5.4E-02
1.2E-02
2.0E-02
4.8E-02
2.0E-OI
1.2E-OI
I.2E-OI
l.OE-01
I.OE«00
Toxic try
Rank
(from Step 4)
(b)
2.7
2.7
0.2
0.6
0.6
0.6
3
3
3.1
3.1
13.S
TOTAL:
AIR
INDEX
c=(txb)
8 10E-03
272E«00
2.54E-01
6.I2E-OI
6 20E-OI
6 48E-01
320E«00
3.I2E«00
3.22E-00
3.20E-KX)
I.45E«01
32.1
Facility
Facility 1
Facility 3
Facflityl
FadUyl
Facfllry2
Facility 3
FacflJty2
Facility 3
FacOlty 1
Facility 3
Facility 2
Chemical
A
A
B
C
C
C
D
D
E
E
F
Water
Exposure
Index
(from Step Sb)
(•)
S.OE-OI
I.3E-OI
I.7E-OI
4.2E-03
I.OE-02
6.7E-03
4.0E-OI
6.7E-03
2.SE-03
l.OE-01
I.OE«00
Toxicity
Rank
(from Step 4)
(b)
2.7
2.7
0.2
0.6
0.6
0.6
3
3
3.1
3.1
13.S
TOTAL:
WATER
INDEX
c=(axb)
1.3SE-00
2.83E+00
367E-01
604E-01
6.IOE-01
6.07E-OI
340E«00
3.01E«00
3.10E*00
3.20E*00
1 45E-OI
336
                                                B-43

-------
Facility
Facility 1
Facility 3
Facility 1
Facility 1
Facility!
Facility 3
Facility 2
Facility 3
Facility 1
Facility 3
Facility!
Chemical
A
A
B
C
C
C
D
D
E
E
F
TOTAL:
AIR
INDEX
(•)
8 10E-03
2.72E+00
2.54E-01
6.I2E-OI
6.20E-01
6.48E-OI
3.20E«00
3.12E+00
3.22E*00
3.20E*00
l.4SE«OI
32.1
WATER
RANK
00
1 35E«00
283E+00
3.67E-01
6.04E-01
6.10E-01
6.07E-01
3.40E+00
3.0IE-KX)
3.10E*00
3.20E+00
1.45E+01
33.6
OVERALL
INDEX
c=(a«*)
1.4
S.6
0.6
1.2
1.2
1.3
6.6
6.1
6.3
6.4
29.0
6S.7
B-44

-------
 Option 3.

 Step  1. From among the various toxicity categories, choose the category which yields the
 lowest dose.  This is  the limiting dose.  This decision rule was used in the ranking of
 chemicals for inclusion as priority pollutants under the Clean Water Act.

 Step  2. Establish criteria for placing chemicals in  categories of low, medium  and high
 toxicity based on the limiting dose, and classify chemicals based on these criteria.  A
 number of scoring systems have provided criteria that could be used to place chemicals in
 categories of low, medium and high concern.   The human and  environmental  toxiciry
 categories into  which  chemicals were divided and the criteria used to place chemicals in
 these categories for each scoring system were summarized in Tables 1 and 2 of this memo.

 Step 3. To assess exposure potential, use photolysis rate, solubility, and bioconcentration
 factor for the inhalation, drinking water, and fish ingestion exposure pathways, respectively
 to place chemicals in categories of low, medium and  high for exposure potential. Classify
 chemicals based on these criteria.   As with the toxicity  ranking, a number of  scoring
 systems have provided criteria that could be used to place chemicals in categories  of low,
 medium and high exposure  potential.  The  exposure potential  categories into which
 chemicals were  divided and the criteria used to place chemicals in these categories for each
 scoring system were summarized in Table 3 of this memo.

 Step 4. Construct human hazard and exposure potential  matrices for  each medium of
 concern; assign chemicals to each cell according to their toxiciry and medium-specific
 classifications.  An example of such a matrix is given in ORD's "Simplified Approach for
 Screening and Categorizing Toxic Chemicals."  A toxitity/exposure matrix was also  used in
 the University of Michigan's application of the  Hazard Ranking System to the prioritization
 of organic compounds at hazardous waste sites.

 Step 5.  Assign weights to the  low, medium and high categories for exposure potential and
toxicity.  In our example, the rank for each cell in the matrix is the product of the  toxicity
weight and the  exposure weight for the row and column that define the cell. The ORD
simplified approach to classifying toxic chemicals provides an example of values assigned to
matrix cells. OTS's TSCA prescreening of TRI chemicals also presents an exposure/toxicity
matrix, but assigns ranks of low, medium or high to each cell, rather than numerical weights.

Step 6. Individual chemical-facility indices  are derived for each medium by multiplying the
rank for the cell in which the chemical falls, the population exposed via that medium, and
the emissions to that medium.

Step 7. The overall index is the sum of the  media-specific indices across all chemicals and
across all facilities.
                                       B-45

-------
An example demonstrating Option 3 for the sample data set is found in Figure 3.

Advantages • This method avoids combining toxicity categories.  It provides a simple but
informative rank  for each chemical based on a two-way classification scheme.  The  final
index weightings are explicit and understandable.

Disadvantages - This approach assumes that all of the toxicity categories are of equal
importance. In this approach, chemicals do not get specific exposure-toxicity ranks; only the
categories to which they belong are ranked.  The use of three broad categories  within the
scoring elements does not allow fine-scale differentiation among values for chemicals within
a scoring element.  This particular flaw would prevent  us from  distinguishing changes in
chemicals with very high toricities from changes in "border" chemicals with marginally high
toxicities.  Options to address this problem include (a) eliminating "border" chemicals from
the index calculation; and (b) performing more explicit analysis on the "border" chemicals
to evaluate how different the index would be if they switched into different categories.
                                       B-46

-------
 Figure 3 Example Calculation for Option 3 Ranking Syoem
Seep I. From among the toxiciry criteria of interea. ehooM the lowest doie for each chemical
among all the categoric*. Thii if the limiting do*e.
Chemical
•
A
B
C
D
E
F
Cancer
Risk-specife
Dote at 1E-4
RiikUvel
(mg/kg-day)
(IE-4/q«)
IE-OS
1E-01
1E-04
3E-03
2E-05
2E-06
Chronic Toiicity Other Than Cancer
Liver
RID
(mg/kg-day)
1E-OI


SE-OZ


Neurologic
Rfl>
(mg/kg-day)

2E-01


5E-03

Reproductive
RfD
(mg/kg-day)


2E-02


1E-03
LIMITING
DOSE
(mg/kg-day)
IE-OS
1E-01
1E-04
3E-03
2E-OS
2E-06
Step 2. Place chemical* into high, medium and low categoric*.
For this Hep. we need to develop criteria for what coMMrulm a high, medium or low toxiciry.
For the purpose* of this example, we assign the following value* to these categories:
             Category      Rang*

             High         Dow < 1E-4

             Medium      1E-4 < Dow < 1E-2
             Low
IE-2 < Dow
                                                           B-47

-------
tiling thcac cnteru. we claitify the chcmiuU:
Chcmicftl

A
B
C
D
E
F
LIMITING
DOSE
(mg/kg-day)
IE-OS
IE-01
IE-04
3E-03
2E-05
2E-06
TOXICITY
CATEGORY

High
Low
Medium
Medium
High
High
                                                            B-48

-------
Sup 3. Baaed oa salient pbyiicochemical properties, assign chemicals to
high, medium sad low exposure p*"-*-' categories.

For Uui step, we miut establish media-specific criteria for assigning chemicals
10 high, medium and low categories.
For the purposes of ihu eumple. we make the following auignmeau:
Exposure
Medium
Air
Drinking
Water
Fish
Criterion
Low
photolysis < IE-7
Kriubiliry < 10
BCF
-------
    4 Using the exposure and loxicMy ranks, create • toxicity-cxposure matrix for each medium.
                                                         TOXICrTY-EXPOSURE MATRIX
TOXICITY
LOW
1EDIUM
HIGH
AIR EXPOSURE
LOW
B

E.F
MEDIUM

D

HIGH

C
A
DRINKING WATER EXPOSURE
LOW

C
E
MEDIUM

D
F
HIGH
B

A
FISH INGESTION EXPOSURE
LOW


A.E.F
MEDIUM
B
C

HIGH

D

Step 5. Assign value* to each cell in the matrix.

For this itep. ranks are assigned the following values:
Category

High
Medium
Lew
Exposure
Rank
0.4
0.2
0.1
Toxtctty
Rank
S
3
1
The value for the cell is the product of the toiictty limes the exposure rank.
                                                    Toxicmr-EXPOsuRE MATRIX VALUES
TOXICITY
LOW
MEDIUM
HIGH
AIR EXPOSURE
LOW
0.1

0.5
MEDIUM

0.6

HIGH

1.2
2
DRINKING WATER EXPOSURE
LOW

0.3
0.5
MEDIUM

0.6
1
HIGH
0.4

2
FISH INGESTION EXPOSURE
LOW


OJ
MEDIUM
0.2
0.6

HIGH

I 2

                                                             B-50

-------
Step 6 Combine f«ciUy-«pecifie ""•*-«'" •*< popiilinoa dau to obuin
                         EMISSION-EXPOSURE SCORES
(FOR AIR.)
Facility
1



2


3




Chemical
A
B
C
E
C
D
F
A
C
D
E
Air
Emiuioaf
Ob/yr)
1000
2000
2000
4000
3000
4000
10000
2000
4000
6000
1000
Population
Exposed
via Air
3000
3000
3000
3000
1000
1000
1000
2000
2000
2000
2000
Matrix
Value
2
0.1
1.2
O.S
1.2
0.6
O.S
2
1.2
0.6
0.5
AIR
SCORE
6.0E«06
6.0E+05
7.2E«06
60E«06
3.6E«06
2.4E«06
5.0E«06
8.0E«06
9.6E«06
7.2E«06
I.OE«06
TOTAL: 5.7E+07
(FOR WATER):



Facility
1



2


3







Chemical
A
B
C
E
C
D
F
A
C
D
E

Air
FfHJtT"yiT
(IWyr)
6000
4000
1000
3000
1000
son
2000
4000
2000
10000
6000

Population
Exposed
via Water
300
500
500
500
6000
6000
6000
2000
2000
2000
2000
Drinking
WltfaW
Matrix
Value
2
0.4
0.3
0.5
0.3
0.6
1
2
0.3
0.6
0.5

Fish
Matrix
Value
0.5
0.2
0.6
0.5
0.6
1.2
0.5
0.5
0.6
1.2
0.5

Average
Matrix
Value
1.3
0.3
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.9
0.8
1.3
0.5
0.9
O.S


WATER
SCORE
3.8E*06
6.0E«05
2.3E-05
7.5E*OS
2.7E*06
2.7E«07
9.0E«06
1.0E«07
I.8E*06
1.8E«07
6.0E*06
TOTAL: 8.0E*07
                                               B-S1

-------
7 Combine (he medi*-*pec\Tic ranki to obutn overall rank.
Facility
1
2
3
Chemictl
A
B
C
E
C
D
F
A
C
o
E
TOTAL:
AIR
SCORE
6.0E«O6
6.0E+OS
7.2E+06
6.0E«06
3.6E*06
2.4E«06
S.OE+06
8.0E«06
9.6E*06
7.2E«06
1.0E*06
S.7E-07
WATER
SCORE
3.8E*06
6.0E*05
2.3E*05
7.SE«05
2.7E«06
2.7E*07
9.0E*06
I.OE-KJ7
I.8E«06
1.8E«07
6.0E*06
80E«07
OVERALL
SCORE
9.8E«06
1.2E*06
74E*06
67E«06
6.3E*06
2.9E«07
1.4E«07
1.8E+07
I.IE«07
2.5E«07
7.0E«06
1.4E*08
                                          B-52

-------
             Appendix B-a.
            Briefing Paper
         Section 313, Title III
     Reporting Toxicity Information
  for Trade Secret Claimed Chemicals

               USEPA
Office of Pesticides and Toxic Substances
  Economics and Technology Division

-------
                          Briefing Paper
                      Section 313, Title III
                  Reporting Toxicity Information
                for Trade Secret Claimed Chemicals


 I.   Introduction

     Section  322  (h)(2) of Title  III requires EPA to  identify the
 adverse health and environmental  effects associated with a
 section 313 chemical which is claimed trade secret under section
 322  and assure that such  information is included in the computer
 database.  The legislative history associated with this provision
 further explains  that the adverse effects identified  should be
 described  in  general terms so as  not to provide a unique
 identifier of a particular trade  secret chemical.

     EPA,  in  its  final rule  (40 CFR part 372 (XX)(B)), briefly
 discussed  its approach to the problem of balancing trade secret
 protection versus providing adverse health and environmental
 effects information for section 313 chemicals.   EPA developed a
 screening  matrix  of the 309 listed chemicals against  the 10
 health and environmental effects  specifically mentioned in
 section 313.  Toxicity data were  gathered from selected
 information sources.  The matrix  was developed to aid in
 exploring  various options for meeting the requirements claiming
 section 313 chemicals as trade secret.  No detailed hazard
 assessment or literature evaluation was conducted during this
 exercise.

     As described in the final rule, 70 chemicals exhibited
 unique toxicity patterns and thus, divulging such information
 would not  protect trade secret claims.  Xn its effort to
 adequately protect chemical identity when claimed trade secret,
 EPA began  consolidating the toxicity categories in a  sequential
 fashion until there were no unique patterns of toxicity for any
of the 309 listed chemicals.  The final result yielded only four
general toxicity  categories: carcinogenicity, acute toxicity,
other human health effects, and environmental toxicity.

     There are three other sections to this paper.  Section II
describes  in  detail the construction of the toxicity  matrix and
the health and environmental endpoints used to put an "X" in a
box.  Section III deals with the  consolidation of the toxicity
categories a's described in the final rule as well as  additional
analyses done since that writing.  Finally, section IV is a
discussion of potential options based on the analyses in Section
XXI.  The  Agency  is seeking comments on the approach  it used to
attempt to balance trade secret provisions with disclosing.of
toxicity data as  well as comments on the options presented in
section IV.

-------
 II.  Background

 A.  Construction of the Matrix
     In an effort to analyze the possible options available under
 the constraints of section 322 of Title III, the Agency utilized
 the results of a limited screening exercise conducted by EPA in
 October 1986 to capture and describe the rationale used by New
 Jersey and Maryland in the development of their respective lists.
 Based on an analysis of this exercise, the Agency developed an
 expanded toxicity data matrix for the combined list of 329
 chemicals and categories (EPA 1987).  The matrix is intended to
 identify those adverse health and environmental effects that have
 been reported to be associated with each section 313 chemical.
 The health and environmental endpoints included in this matrix
 are limited to those specifically mentioned in section 313:
 carcinogenicity, heritable gene and chromosomal mutations,
 developmental toxicity (including teratogenicity), reproductive
 toxicity, acute toxicity, chronic toxicity, neurotoxicity,
 environmental toxicity, and persistence and bioaccumulation in
 the environment.  Appendix A contains the toxicity matrix for the
 309 listed section 313 chemicals.  Appendix B contains the same
 toxicity matrix including the information sources used to
 identify data indicating potential human and environmental
 toxicity for each chemical.

     The toxicity matrix is a summary presentation of information
 publicly available through a number of accessible databases:       ,
 Hazardous Substances Databank (HSOB), RTECS, GENETOX, AQUIRE,
 ENVIROFATE, Log P database, and CHEMTRACK.   Although the data
 from these sources have not been evaluated, the data serve the
 purpose of analyzing potential approaches for disseminating
 toxicity information for trade secret claimed chemicals.
 Endpoints for which available data suggest evidence that there
may be a causal relationship between exposure and the observed
 toxicity are indicated with an "X" in the appropriate fields on
 the matrix.  The absence of an "X" for a particular effect does
not indicate that a chemical is known to be safe for the
 indicated effect.  Rather,  absence of an "X" indicates that
either data to support a concern were -not found in the database
 reviewed, or were not available at the time the matrix was
constructed, or that the available data did not suggest
sufficient evidence of potential toxicity.   The source(s) of data
 from which each "X" is determined is documented so that it will
be possible to alter the list if new data are identified, or if
 it is determined that any particular data source is inappropriate
or inadequate.

     It should be noted that this is only a screening exercise.
The data sources used to construct the matrix were readily
available but may not be the only sources used to construct a
toxicity matrix.  Validation of the data reported in the database.
sources has not been performed and some of the databases are not
peer reviewed.  An "X" indicates the availability of data
relative to an effect; it does not indicate severity or validity

-------
 of  concern.


 B.  Health and Environmental Endpoints
      For the purposes of generating a toxicity matrix  for section
 313 chemicals, thresholds or limitations were established for the
 health and environmental endpoints evaluated.  These thresholds
 or  limitations were used to make rough determinations  using the
 data  within this limited search.  Underlying studies were not
 collected, reviewed, or validated as the objective of  this
 exercise is to determine which approach might best balance trade
 secret provisions and the dissemination of toxicity data in the
 database.  It is also important to note that the matrix does not
 necessarily reflect Agency limitations and thresholds  which would
 satisfy the listing and delisting of substances from section 313
 reporting since each chemical would need to undergo a  detailed
 hazard assessment.

 1.  Carcinoqenicitv
      This category provides information on the known or potential
 human carcinogenicity of a chemical.  For this endpoint, an "X"
 indicates that the available data support a concern for a
 chemical's carcinogenic potential if one or more of the following
 applied:

          (a) A positive result was reported for that  chemical in
              one or more animal species in an NCI or  NTP
              bioassay;

          (b) The IARC carcinogen classification for that
              chemical is human positive or human suspected
              and/or animal positive or animal suspected;

          (c) The EPA carcinogen classification for that chemical
              is A (human carcinogen), Bl or B2 (probable human
              carcinogen), or C (potential human carcinogen; or

          (d) the Gene-Tox carcinogen evaluation of that chemical
              is sufficient positive or limited positive evidence
              of carcinogenicity.

     The NTP results and IARC, EPA, and Gene-tox classifications
 for each chemical are presented in the toxicity matrix (Appendix
B) under the appropriate column heads.  The carcinogen bioassay
results and classifications were obtained from the following
sources: CHEMTRACK (NTP evaluation, EPA classification), RTECS
 (IARC classification), and GENETOX (Gene-tox evaluation).  The
EPA,  IARC, and Gene-tox classifications are based on weight-of-
evidence in which the carcinogenic potential of a chemical is
evaluated.  The NTP evaluation is limited to the results of
bioassays in experimental animals conducted by NTP and reflect
whether a chemical was found to be positive or negative in the
bioassay.

-------
 2.   Heritable Genetic and  Chromosomal  Mutation
      For this endpoint,  an "X"  indicates  that the  available  data
 support concern that the chemical  has  the potential  to produce
 heritable mutations in human  germ  cells.   Valid  positive  results
 from studies on heritable  mutation events (of any  kind)  in germ
 cells were sufficient evidence  to  indicate a potential positive
 response.   In addition,  evidence that  an  agent interacts  with
 germ-cell DNA or other chromatin constituents or that  it  induces
 such endpoints such as unscheduled DNA synthesis,  sister-
 chroma t id exchange,  or chromosomal aberrations in  germinal cells
 was  sufficient evidence  to indicate a  potential  positive
 response.   The criterion used to indicate a positive response for
 an agent was a positive  result  in  one  or  more of the following
 bioassays as reported in the  results table for each chemical in
 the  GENETOX database:

           (a)  Drosophila melanoaaster  sex-linked recessive lethal
               test;

           (b)  Drosophila melanoaaster  heritable  (reciprocal)
               translocation test;

           (c)  Mouse  heritable «ranslocation test;

           (d)  Drosophila melanoaaster  sex chromosome gain/loss
               (aneuploidy);
           (e)  Rodent dominant lethal test;

           (f)  Unscheduled  ONA synthesis,  sister-chromatid
               exchange,  or chromosomal aberrations in  germinal
               cells;  and

           (g)  Mouse  specific  locus  test (germ cells).


3.   Developmental Toxicity
      For this  endpoint,  an "X"  indicates  that the available data
support concern that the chemical  cause -developmental  toxicity in
humans.  Developmental toxicity is  any detrimental effect
produced by exposures to developing organisms during embryonic
stages of development and  includes  embryotoxicity, fetotoxicity,
and  teratogenicity.   The major  manifestations of developmental
toxicity include: (1) prenatal  or  early postnatal death;  (2)
structural  abnormalities;  (3) altered growth (usually  in  the form
of growth retardation);  and (4) functional deficits which may
include reduced pulmonary  function, reduced immunological
competence,  neurobehavioral deficits such as learning  disorders
or mental retardation, etc.   The exposure period may be prior to
conception  (either parent), during  prenatal development, or
postnatally to the time  of sexual maturation.  Developmental
effects, however, may be detected  at any  time in the lifespar. of
the organism.

-------
      An "X"  is  indicated  for  a  chemical  if  the  available  data
 provide evidence  that  the chemical produces developmental
 toxicity at  body  doses of less  than or equal to 1 g/kg/day.  HSDB
 was  examined for  data  on  the  developmental  toxicity  of a  chemical
 following inhalation,  oral, or  dermal exposure.  When necessary,
 exposure doses  were  converted to body doses using the reference
 value for body  weight,  inhalation rate,  water consumption, and
 food factors  for  each  species recommended by EPA (1985).


 4.   Reproductive  Toxicitv
      For this endpoint, an "X"  indicates that the available data
 support concern that the  chemical causes adverse effects on male
 or female reproductive  performance.  Endpoints  of concern
 include,  but are  not limited  to, effects on gonadal  function,
 estrous cycle,  mating  behavior, conception, parturition,
 lactation, and  weaning.

      An "X"  is  indicated  for  a  chemical  if the available data
 provide evidence  that  the chemical causes reproductive
 dysfunction or  reproduction damage at body doses less than or
 equal  to 1 g/kg/day.  KSDB was  examined,  for data on the
 reproductive toxicity of  an agent following inhalation,  oral or
 dermal  exposure.  When  necessary, exposure doses were converted
 to body doses using  the reference values for body weight,
 inhalation rate,  water  consumption, and  food factors for each
 species recommended  by  EPA (1985).


 5.   Acute Toxicitv
      For this endpoint, an "X"  indicates that the available data
 support concern that short-term exposure, at or below a specified
 level,  to the chemical  by the inhalation, oral,  or dermal route
has been determined  to  cause death in 50% of the exposed test
population.

     An "X" is indicated  for a  chemical if the available data
provide evidence  that the reported median of the lethal
concentration (LCso) tor  the chemical 'following inhalation
exposures for 8 hours or  less was less than or equal to 5
mg/liter  (5,000 mg/m3); the reported median of the lethal dose
 (LD50)  for the chemical following oral exposure was less than or
equal to 250 mg/kg;  or  the LD50 for the chemical following dermal
exposure was less than  or equal to 500 mg/kg.  RTECS was examined
 for data on the acute toxicity  of chemicals in mammals following
short-term inhalation,  oral, or dermal exposure.  When necessary,
doses expressed in ppm  were converted to mg/m3 using the ideal
gas law (PV=nRT).


6.  Chronic Toxicity
     Chronic effects for  the purposes of Section 313 reporting
are any adverse effects other than cancer observed in humans or
animals resulting from  long-term exposure to a chemical.  In

-------
 chronic  toxicity  studies, animals are usually exposed to a test
 chemical by  inhalation, dermal, or oral routes for more than 90
 days.  Thus  the observed adverse effects are due to continuous or
 frequently recurring insult of target organs with relatively
 small doses  or low concentrations for a prolonged period of time.


     An  "X"  is indicated for an agent if the available data
 p  wide  evidence  that the chemical produces adverse health
 effects  at body doses of less than or equal to 1 g/kg/day
 following inhalation, oral, or dermal exposure for wore than 90
 days.  HSDB  was examined for data on the chronic toxicity of a
 chemical.  When necessary, exposure doses were converted to body
 doses using  the reference values for body weight, inhalation
 rate, water  consumption, and food factors for each species
 recommended  by EPA (1985).


 7.  Neurotoxicitv
     Neurotoxicity is any adverse effect on the structure or
 function of  the central and/or peripheral nervous system related
 to exposure  to a  chemical substance.  Neurotoxic effects may be
 morphological (neuropathological effects, biochemical changes)  or
 functional (behavioral, electrophysiological, or neurochemical
 effects).

     An  "X"  is indicated for an agent i'f the available data
 provide  evidence  that chronic (at least 90-days)  inhalation,
 oral, or dermal exposure to the chemical is reported to result in
 morphological or  functional neurotoxic effects at body doses of
 less than or equal to 1 g/kg/day.  Reported biochemical changes
 in the absence of functional or histopathological effects was not
 considered an adequate basis for listing a chemical.  HSDB was
 examined for data on the neurotoxicity of an agent following
 long-term exposure.  When necessary, exposure doses were
 converted to body doses using the reference values for body
weight,  inhalation rate, water consumption, and food factors for
each species recommended by EPA (1985).•


8.  Environmental Toxicitv
     Section 313  of SARA allows the Agency to add a chemical to
the Emissions Inventory if it is known to cause or can reasonably
be anticipated to cause a serious, significant adverse effect on
the environment.  The judgement may be based on toxicity alone or
toxicity and a consideration of either persistence in the
environment  or tendency to bioaccumulate in the environment.  The
toxicity matrix reflects a screening of information on the acute
toxicity, bi©accumulation, and persistence of an agent.  An LC50
value of less than or equal to 100 ppm was considered to suggest
sufficient evidence that a chemical is a potential environmental
toxicant.  For aquatic species, an "X" is indicated for a
chemical based on environmental toxicity if the available data
provide  evidence  that the reported LC50 for that chemical for

-------
 less than or equal to 96 hours is  less than or equal to 100 ppm;
 if the reported LC50 for a chemical is less than or equal to 100
 ppm and the chemical has a half-life of greater than or equal to
 4 days; or if the reported LC^Q for a chemical is less than or
 equal to 100 ppm and the chemical  has a log bioconcentration
 factor greater than or equal to 3, a measured log P of greater
 than or equal to 4.35, or an estimated log P of greater than or
 equal to 5.5.

     The environmental toxicity column that indicates LC50 values
 of less than or equal to 10 ppm is included in the matrix because
 chemicals that are reported to have LC50 values of less than or
 equal to 10 ppm are of greater concern as potential toxicants,
 and this information may be used to set priorities for further
 review.  The data in this column are not included in the
 algorithm analysis.  The data for  environmental toxicity were
 obtained from the following databases: AQUIRE (acute aquatic
 toxicity), ENVIROFATE (bioconcentration factors,  half-lives, and
 measured log P values).   AQUIRE contains reviews of aquatic
 toxicity studies and ranks the reliability of each study on a
 scale of 1 to 4.  A study reliability of 1 indicates that the
 study is reliable, reliability 2 indicates that the study is
 generally satisfactory,  reliability 3 indicates that study is not
 reliable, and reliability 4 indicates that the AQUIRE entry is a
 review of a study abstract or summary from a foreign paper.  The
 reliability of the data obtained from AQUIRE used to determine an
 "X" for an environmental toxicant  is documented on the matrix;
when possible, the most reliable data were used to determine an
 "X".

-------
              Appendix C





Available Toricity Data for TRI Chemicals
                 C-l

-------
       This appendix provides a summary of available toxicity data for the TRI chemicals.
 The data entered into the tables in this appendix were obtained  primarily from EPA
 documents and were supplemented with relevant data from other sources.  Citations are
 listed in the tables for all values.  There are five major types of data provided: reportable
 quantities  (RQs), reference  doses,  cancer  potencies,  ecological  criteria, and  other
 lexicological data.  Each type of data and its major sources is discussed briefly below. The
 data sources are listed at the end of this section.

 REPORTABLE QUANTITIES

       The RQ values were obtained primarily from the Technical Background Documents
 to Support Rulemaking Pursuant for CERCLA Section 103, Volumes 1 through 3 (March
 1985 to July 1989). In some cases, the information was obtained from other sources and the
 sources are cited in the table.

 REFERENCE DOSES

       The reference dose data were obtained from a number of sources. Only one value
 is provided for each exposure route per chemical The hierarchy for selection of the most
 appropriate reference dose data was as follows: IRIS, HEAST, data from a Health and
 Environmental  Review  Division  (HERD) evaluation of TRI chemicals,  RQ support
 documents, and data from the Office of Pesticide Programs (OPP). The hierarchy is based
 on the level of review which the values received. Values listed on IRIS data base receive
 Agency-wide review and are developed using an Agency-wide assessment protocol. The
 values in the HEAST tables are also widely reviewed, but contain some values from a table
 identified as Alternate Methods. The HERD values are die result of a review of available
 literature for certain TRI chemicals.  This review was  conducted  by OPPT scientists.
 Reference doses obtained from RQ documents were generated to support the RQ quantities
 and provide only brief descriptions of the toxicity evaluations carried out to generate the
 values. These are reviewed within the agency and, in many cases, are reviewed by interested
 parties in the private sector. OPP values are generated by the Office of Pesticide Programs
 for pesticides, based on pesticide registration data and other literature sources.

 CANCER POTENCIES

      The selection of cancer potency values followed the hierarchy outlined for reference
doses.  In addition, a recently completed list of cancer potencies developed by the Office
of Environmental Health Hazard Assessment hi California's Environmental Protection
Agency was consulted to obtain cancer potencies for 22 chemicals which appeared on the
California list but were unavailable from EPA (CEPA, 1992).
                                       C-2

-------
 ECOLOGICAL CRITERIA

       Values for the protection of aquatic life were obtained from the EPA's ambient water
 quality criteria.  These values are published by EPA's Office of Water.

 OTHER TOXICOLOGICAL DATA

       Reference doses and cancer potencies were not available from EPA for a number
 of chemicals on TRI.  Consequently, other sources of information were consulted to
 determine if sufficient data were available to develop reference doses and cancer potencies
 for chemicals currently  lacking values.  Individual data searches for  lexicological  and
 epidemiological data for each chemical  were beyond the current scope  of this project.
 However, data bases such as the Hazardous Substances Data Base (HSDB) and the Registry
 of Toxic Effects of Chemical Substances (RTECS) provide succinct summaries of toxic
 effects and quantitative data, lexicological and epidemiological studies, and; in some cases,
 regulatory and carcinogenic status data.

       The two data bases differ in both the type of presentation and the scope of the
 resources from which they obtain data. HSDB provides a brief discussion  of most studies
 and  results.  It  contains physical, ecological and lexicological data for most chemicals
 included in the data base. RTECS includes a greater number of chemicals and incorporates
 information from a wider array of sources.  However, the data summaries are very brief,
 cryptic and only lexicological and epidemiological data are provided  HSDB generally
 contains fewer citations than RTECS because the literature contained in HSDB is limited
 10 that which has been reviewed and found acceptable by EPA.  However, HSDB often
 provides more detailed information on the studies than RTECS.

      HSDB on line searches have been carried out for all chemicals under evaluation in
 this report which lack reference dose, cancer potency, or RQ data.  All relevant categories
 of information were  obtained for each chemical.  An example of an HSDB printoui is
 provided ai the end of this section for 1,4-benzoquinone.

      The data bases do not provide a sufficient level of detail to choose the best studies
 or calculate reference doses or cancer potencies. However,  they can be used to identify
 ihose chemicals for which dose-response data are available and  to obtain citations. In
addition to HSDB and RTECS, other data bases such  as the International Register of
 Potentially Toxic Chemicals (IRPTC), and literature searches may be useful in identifying
 relevant dose-response data for development of health risk values.

      If dose-response data were obtained for TRI chemicals currently lacking reference
dose and  cancer potency values, the values  could be  calculated using  standard  EPA
assessment methodology. The following discussion outlines standard  methods  used to
calculate reference doses and cancer potencies utilizing dose-response data.
                                       C-3

-------
Reference Doses

       Reference doses are calculated for non-carcinogens.  It is assumed that for non-
carcinogens and non-mutagens, a threshold exists below which exposure does not cause
adverse health effects (EPA,  1988).  Thresholds for the effects of chronic exposure are
estimated from the No Observable Adverse Effects Level (NOAEL) or Lowest Observable
Adverse Effects Level (LOAEL) obtained from lexicological studies of animals and humans
or epidemiological studies of humans. To account for the various types of uncertainty
inherent  in estimating a threshold for health effects, Uncertainty Factors and Modifying
Factors are utilized. These are based on specific characteristics of the toxicological data,
and are summarized in Figure C-l. The Uncertainty and Modifying Factors are divided into
the NOAEL or LOAEL to obtain a reference dose which is an estimated safe exposure level
for the general population.  This approach parallels EPA's methodology for derivation of
RfDs.  However, an in-depth analysis of the epidemiological and toxicological literature is
conducted by EPA when developing its risk values.

       Methods

      Reference doses can be calculated for specific routes of exposure. They are generally
referred to as reference concentrations (RfCs) for inhalation exposure. There are 3 steps
to calculate an RfC:

       1.  identify the most appropriate NOAEL or LOAEL

      2.  apply relevant Uncertainty Factors and Modifying Factors

      3.  calculate media specific reference doses

1. Identify the Most Appropriate NOAEL or LOAEL

      The hierarchy used to select a NOAEL or LOAEL is as follows:

            a human study is preferable  to an animal study, when a human study is
            unavailable an animal study using the most sensitive species for the toxic
            effect of concern is preferable

            chronic (lifetime) study is preferable to a subchronic study (an acute study
            cannot be used to quantify risks associated with chronic exposure

            a study with the appropriate exposure route(s) is preferable: oral or gavage
            for oral exposure and inhalation for airborne exposure)

            a study with sufficient subjects to obtain statistical significance at relatively
            low exposure levels is required


                                       C-4

-------
     FIGURE C-l. UNCERTAINTY FACTORS AND MODIFYING FACTORS
 NUMERICAL VALUE         REASONING
 UNCERTAINTY FACTORS
 10                     INTERSPEQES: accounts for variation in sensitivity among
                       population members

 10                     INTRASPEdES:   accounts  for uncertainty in extrapolating
                       from animals tO humans

 10                     SUBCHRONIC DATA: accounts for uncertainty arising from
                       extrapolation of less than a lifetime study (subchronic) to a
                       lifetime exposure (chronic)

 10                     LOAEL:  accounts for uncertainty resulting from the use of
                       data which demonstrated an adverse effect, to estimate a level
                       at which no effect is expected to occur

MODIFYING FACTOR

0 - 10                  QUALITY OF DATA:  based on scientific uncertainties not
                       explicitly treated in the Uncertainty  Factors  such  as  the
                       completeness of the data base, concordance of results, number
                       of species tested, etc. The default value is 1.
(adapted from 1222A in EPA, 1988)
                                    C-5

-------
             a recent study identifying adequately sensitive endpoints is required (e.g. not
             mortality)

             an adequate control population is required

             in general, a NOAEL is preferable to a LOAEL. Usually, the LOAEL which
             generates the lowest exposure threshold (after the application of Uncertainty
             and Modifying Factors) is selected.

       Issues related to the quality of the study should also be considered in selecting the
 most appropriate studies. Additional information on selection criteria can be reviewed in
 the IRIS documentation file (EPA, 1988).

 2.  Apply Relevant Uncertainty and  Modifying Factors.

       Using the information in Figure C-l, factors are applied which  depended on the
 characteristics of the study and the NOAEL or LOAEL, e.g. 10 for an animal study, 10 for
 a subchronic study. The NOAEL or LOAEL is divided by the factors to obtain a reference
 dose in mg/kg-day.
       EXAMPLE: chemical X has a NOAEL of 5 mg/kg-day, based on a subchronic study
       in mice fed chemical X in their diet

       Uncertainty factors of  10 for intraspeties, 10 for intersperies, and 10 for the
       subchronic nature of the study are divided into the NOAEL:
                         5mg/kg-day
             RfD -    	  -  0.005 mg/kg-day

                        10 x 10 x 10
3. Calculate Media Specific Reference Doses

      The reference dose in mg/kg-day is used derive a media-specific reference dose. For
waterborne contaminants  the  concentration per liter of water  is used; for airborne
contaminants the concentration per cubic meter of air is used.  It is assumed that the
average water consumption in the general population is 2 liters per day and that the average
air intake volume is 20 mj  per day.  It is assumed that the average body weight of humans
is 70 kg.  The RfD in mg/kg-day is used with these values to obtain a threshold in air or
water.' It is recognized that these average values do not apply to all individuals; however,


                                       C-6

-------
 for purposes of developing TRI indices, some generalizing assumptions are used.  To obtain
 units comparable to EPA's air and water guidelines, the reference dose units were convened
 to ug from mg through multiplying by 1000.
       EXAMPLE: chemical X (above) has no RfD or RfC; therefore both airborne and
       waterborne exposure thresholds must be estimated.
       WATERBORNE EXPOSURE

             0.005 mg/kg-day x 70 kg x 1000 ug/mg


                   2 liters/day



       AIRBORNE EXPOSURE

             0.005 mg/kg-day x 70 kg x 1000 ug/mg


                      20 m3/day
  175 ug/liter
1.75 ug/m3
      The absorption and metabolism of chemicals, and, in some cases, the health effects
observed, frequently differ between routes of exposure. EPA suggests that utilization of a
study which  does not have the appropriate route of exposure contributes to the overall
uncertainty of the risk value.  Using the simplified approach taken in this work, it will not
be possible to fully evaluate the route-specific differences in response to the chemicals
unless NOAELs or LOAELS exist for both routes. In this case, individual reference doses
are calculated for each route.
Carcinogens

      EPA and most risk assessors take a probabilistic approach to estimating carcinogenic
risks based on the general assumption that any exposure to a carcinogen will generate some
cancer risk.  Consequently, carcinogens are not considered to have a safe  threshold for
exposure.  The risk is proportional to the cumulative exposure, and at low exposure levels
may be very small.  Carcinogenic risk is usually expressed as a slope factor or q,* value  with
units of risk per mg/kg-day. Risk may also be estimated for specific media. When risks in

                                       C-7

-------
air and water are provided these are referred to as unit risks because they are expressed per
unit of air or water.

      EPA utilizes  various methods to estimate  carcinogenic risk for individuals and
populations. For most chemicals, it is necessary to estimate risks at low exposures from data
which is obtained from high exposure studies.  The required extrapolation may be carried
out using a variety of models.  Generally EPA uses a linearized multistage model, in the
absence of information requiring other approaches (51 FR (185) 33997).  The use of this
model generates a plausible upper limit risk estimate. The multistage model has the general
form:

      P(d)  = 1 - exp - (q0 + q,d + q,d2 + ... + q^f)

where:

      d    =  dose
      P(d)  =  the lifetime risk of cancer at dose d
       Epidemiological and toxicological dose-response data are used to provide the dose
and probability inputs to the model A upper bound estimate of response is calculated and
a modification to equalize doses between species is applied when non-human studies are
used.  Unless a large amount of dose-response data is available, the q, value is often the
only data point obtained from the equation.  This is usually referred to as the cancer
potency or slope factor and estimates upper bound risk per mg/kg-day. The methods used
to estimate cancer risk are discussed in detail in the IRIS documentation (EPA, 1988) and
EPA"s "Guidelines for Cancer Risk Assessment (51 FR (185) 33992-34003 (9/24/86)). This
model does not necessarily provide a realistic risk prediction. Rather, it provides an upper
estimate of risk. The actual risk may be rignifi«M«tiy lower.

       Methods

       Cancer potencies may  be calculated for both oral and inhalation exposure.  There
are 4 major steps to calculate cancer potency.

       1. identify most appropriate dose response data

       2. modify dose data for interspecies differences

       3. calculate the 99% upper confidence bound on the data

       4. develop an equation describing the dose  response relationship
                                        C-8

-------
 1.  Identify the Most Appropriate Dose Response Data.

        Various criteria are used to select appropriate dose response data for carcinogenic
 risk estimates.  In some cases, data from a number of studies can be aggregated. However,
 due to interspecies differences this is usually only done for multiple human data sets.  The
 criteria generally applied are:

             human data are preferable to animal data

             animal data from species whose biological responses are most like those of
             humans are preferable

             in the absence of the previous two, data from the most sensitive species are
             preferred

             the route of exposure resembling that being evaluated in humans is preferred

             tumors at more than one site are used to identify all animals with tumors

             benign tumors with the potential to progress to malignant tumors of the same
             histogenic origin are combined with malignant tumors to  quantify  tumor
             incidence

             consistency in response among studies provides qualitative support for the
             results

The criteria for selection of appropriate data is discussed in the IRIS documentation  (EPA,
1988).
2. Modify Dose Data for Interspecies Differences.

      When the dose response data is not obtained from a human study, it is necessary to
make adjustments to the dose to account for differences between animals and humans in
their body weight and surface area ratios.  Surface area is thought to be more closely
related to response than body weight Therefore, using only body weight will not provide
the most accurate estimate of predicted responses. Surface area can be approximated by
body weight to the 2/3 power. The adjustment is carried out by raising the body weight of
both the animal and of humans (assumed to be 70 kg) to the 2/3 power, and using the
resulting ratio to estimate an equivalent human dose. EPA recommends using a factor of
13 for mice and 5.8 for rats in dose adjustments (e.g. the dose is divided by 13 to provide
a human equivalent), which is based on standard weights for the animaic (EPA, 1988).
                                       C-9

-------
      EXAMPLE: a lifetime study of male mice with an average adult weight of .03
      kg yielded 10 malignant tumors in 50 animals dosed orally with chemical X at 50
      mg/kg-day and no tumors in 50 control animals.


      50 mg/kg-day
      _  = 3.85 equivalent human dose
          13

 3. Calculate an Upper 99% Confidence Bound on the Data.

      Confidence bounds are related to the reliability of the data as determined by sample
 size. With a large number of study subjects the confidence in the study results will be high
 and the confidence bounds around the actual observed responses will be relatively small.
 With a small number of subjects the reverse will be true.1 A Poisson distribution can be
 used to estimate the binomial distribution and obtain a 99% confidence bound. The Poisson
 distribution (Pearson and Hartley, 1966) can be used in cases where the observed responses
 affect 20% or fewer of the study subjects and the population size is at least 50. More
 information on confidence bounds and equations which can be used to calculate confidence
 bounds are found in any basic statistics book. The upper bound value can be convened to
 a ratio mring the relationship:
                                   99% upper bound on number responding
   upper bound response value •  _

                                   number of subjects in exposure group.


This provides a single value representing the upper bound on response for that exposure
group.

      EXAMPLE: (using the data provided in step 2 above) 10 of the  50 animals
      developed tumors. Using the Poisson Distribution the upper 99% limit on 10 is 20.2
        Tests of significance will not be discussed here because it
is assumed'that the data  used for these  analyses have met tests of
significance as a requirement of its incorporation  into the  data
bases.

      2  This example shows a control group with  0  responses.   The
approach becomes  more           complex  in  cases  where the control
group has  respondents.   Methods used to             adjust     for
background  responses   in  the  control  group   are  provided  in
            toxicology and epidemiology  texts.

                                    C-10

-------
      The upper 99% confidence bound response value is 20. Thus the ratio is:

             20/50 = 0.4

      This indicates that there is a 99% chance that the value of 0.4 would not be exceeded
      if the same experiment were repeated numerous times. The 99% upper confidence
      bound value is used as the response data in the development of the linear equation
      which describes the dose response relationship.


4. Develop an Equation Describing the Dose Response Relationship.

      A simple linear equation of the form y = ax is calculated from the upper bound
dose response data. The equation is derived from the lowest dose data point available from
the  chosen study and the 0 dose and 0 response data point is obtained using the algebraic
equation for a line between two points:

                   y(2) -
            a =
                  x(2) -

where:

      x(l) is the 0 dose
      y(l) is the 0 response
      x(2) is the study dose
      y(2) is the 99% upper confidence bound study response

      EXAMPLE: using the data obtained in step 3 above, the input to the equation is:

      x(l) = 0
      yd) = o
      x(2) = 0.005
      y(2) = 0.4

      Using these in the equation above yields:

                  0.4.0
            a -	   = 80
                  0.005 - 0

      The resulting equation is: y = 80x.
                                      C-11

-------
       In cases where dose-response information is available in the exposure range of the
general population (at very low doses), the actual dose response data can be used without
extrapolation to develop an equation describing the dose response relationship.  This can
be done using regression analysis (linear, exponential or power regression) and requires only
a hand-held calculator.  The assumption that the equation continues through the 0 dose, 0
response data point is included in the data input into the equation. Sufficient data for this
type of analysis is usually available only if exposure of the general population has occurred
which would generate exposure at very low doses.  The results of this type of analysis may
generate a much more  accurate evaluation of risk, because  actual responses have  been
measured in the range at which the population is exposed.
                                         •12

-------
REFERENCES

CEP A (California Environmental Protection Agency). 1992. "Expedited Cancer Potency
      Values and Proposed Regulatory Levels for Certain  Proposition 65 Carcinogens."
      Office  of Environmental  Health Hazard Assessment, Reproductive and Cancer
      Hazard Assessment Section. April.

Hazardous  Substances Data Base. 1992.  Available on-line from Toxnet   Retrievals
      performed September, 1992.
Pearson and Hartley, eds. 1966. Biometrika Tables for Statistician^, V^V  Cambridge
      University Press.

U.S. Department of Health and Human Services, NIOSH. 1992. Registry df Toxic Effects
      of Chemical Substances (RTECS). Available on-line through Toxnet
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1988. ftttegrated Risk Information System
      (IRIS). Ba^kgrpynd Document I. Washington, D.C. February 10.
                                     C-13

-------
TOE FOLLOWING HSDB CHEMICAL FILE WAS OBTAINED THROUGH TOXNET



                        SEPTEMBER, 1992
                             C-14

-------
  1MB
  H
1.4-BENZOQUINONB
      -4
 TQXS  - NO DATA
 TXHR  - Classification of carcinogenicity:  1)  evidence  in humans: No data;  2)
       evidence  in animals:  Inadequate. Overall  summary evaluation of
       carcinogenic  risk to  humans is Group  3 : The  agent is not classifiable
       as to  its carcinogenicity to humans.  /From table/  [IARC MONOGRAPHS.
       19 72 -PRESENT  S7 71  (1987)] "PEER REVIEWED**

      THE FOLLOWING OVERVIEW  IS A SUMMARY.  CONSULT  THE COMPLETE POIS INDEX  (R)
      DATABASE FOR TREATMENT  PURPOSES.  COPYRIGHT 1974 -YEAR MICROMEDBX,  INC.
      ALL RIGHTS  RESERVED.  DUPLICATION PROHIBITED.

 KMT   -
 o EMLS - LIFE SUPPORT :

      This overview assumes that basic life support  measures have
      been instituted.

 o EMCB - CLINICAL EFFECTS  :

  SUMMARY
    o  Acute ingestions of  hydroquinone up  to 500  ing/day  for 5
        months produced no symptoms in man.  Oral quinone
        poisoning has not been reported in man.
  HEBNT
    o  Both  hydroquinone and quinone are known  to  cause eye
        irritation from chronic dust or vapor exposure.
        Keratitis, corneal ulceration, and discoloration of the
        conjunctiva may occur.
  CARDIOVASCULAR
    o  Pallor,  cyanosis, and C-V collapse were  reported.
  RESPIRATORY
    o  Lung  irritation is possible with chronic exposures to
        vapors or dust.  Ingestion has caused dyspnea,  anoxia,
        and respiratory failure.
  NEUROLOGIC
    o  Dizziness, headache and delirium have been  reported with
  GASTROINTESTINAL
    o   Vomiting and OI irritation have been seen.
  HEPATIC
    o   Nonspecific liver changes and jaundice have been
        reported.  Nonspecific hematologic effects have been
        seen in animals.
  DERMATOLOGIC
    o   Dermatitis, hypomelanosis and delayed hyperpigmentation
        have occurred.

O EMLAB- LABORATORY :

  o   Hydroquinone is not found naturally in the body.  A urine
      screen which detects hydroquinone is indicative of
      exposure.  Hydroquinone may turn the urine green or
      brown - green .

O EMTR - TREATMENT OVERVIEW :

  SUMMARY
    o   Acute hydroquinone -quinone exposures are rare and
        experience is limited.  Available data indicates
        symptoms and treatment should be similar to phenol.
  ORAL EXPOSURE
    o   Although not as irritating as phenol, dilution with

-------
         water or milk is  indicated.
   INHALATION EXPOSURE
   EYE EXPOSURE
   DERMAL EXPOSURE
 O EMTOX-  RANGE OF TOXICITY :

   o   Acute ingestions  of  hydroquinone up to 500 mg/day for 5
       months produced no symptoms.   1 gm of hydroquinone in an
       adult has caused  symptoms,  and death has occurred with 5
       g».

 o REFERENCE                     :  [Rumack BH & Spoerke  06:  POISINDBX(R)
                                   Information System. Micromedex Inc., Denver,
                                   CO, 1990; CCIS CD-ROM Volume 68,  edition exp
                                   May,  1991.  ] .**PEBR REVIEWED*•
 ANTR - NO DATA
 MEDS - Careful examination of eyes,  incl visual acuity  4 slit lamp
        examinations,  should be  done  during placement 4  periodic examinations.
        Also evaluate  skin.  [SITTIG.  HANDBOOK TOXIC HAZARD CHKM 4 CARCINOG 2 ED
        85  ,  p.  765] "PEER REVIEWED**
 HTOX - ULCERATION OF  CORNEA HAS RESULTED FROM ONE BRIEF EXPOSURE TO HIGH  CONCN
        OF  VAPOR OF QUINONB, AS  WELL  AS FROM REPEATED EXPOSURES TO MODERATELY
        HIGH CONCN. FOLLOWING DISCONTINUATION OF EXPOSURE, RECOVERY  OCCURRED
        PROMPTLY 4 SPONTANEOUSLY ...  THERE WERE NO SYSTEMIC  EFFECTS  OR CHANGES
        IN  COMPOSITION OF BLOOD  OR URINE.  [PATTY.  INDUS  RYG  4 TOX 3RD ED
        VOL2A,2B,2C 1981-82  , p. 2594]  **PBBR REVIEWED**
 HTOX - CAN CAUSE DERMATITIS WITH DISCOLORATION,  ERYTHEMA, FORMATION OF PAPULES
        4 VESICLES. IN SEVERE CASES THERE CAN BE NBCROTIC CHANGES IN SKIN.
        VAPORS ACTING  ON EYE CAN CAUSE SERIOUS DISTURBANCES,  INCL
        CONJUNCTIVITIS ... DISCOLORATION OF CONJUNCTIVA  4 CORNEA HAVE BEEN
 	   REPORTED.  (MERCK INDEX.  10TH  ED 1983 ,  p.  1168]  **PBBR REVIEWED**
 HTOX - —  Ocular disturbance without acute reaction was observed in numerous
        workers who were exposed chronically to vapors of bensoquinone or  dust
        of  hydroquinone.  These workers developed in course of 2 years a
        brownish tinge overlying the  sclera in the  palpebral  fissure. At this
        stage,  the conjunctiva!  surface appeared slightly dry,  4  deeper layers
        of  conjunctiva had a light brownish stain visible biomicroscopically,
        but no discrete  colored  particles.  After another 2 or 3 years, the
        conjunctiva appeared more thickened 4 more  dry,  with  superficial white
        flecks 4 brown stain. In deeper layers,  brown discoloration  was ...
        seen ... as discrete brown granules or globules.  Pigment  was observed
        to  begin to migrate  from limbus into cornea. [GRANT.  TOX  OF  THE BYE
 	    1986  , p.  498] ••PEER REVIEWED**
HTOX  -  ...  In several cases /of chronic exposure to quinone/ vision became
        seriously  reduced from permanent fine  opacities  4 much astigmatism 4
        irregularity in  the  cornea. After exposure  to quinone vapor  was
        discontinued,  the discoloration decreased,  but the visual disturbance
        was permanent. Many  years later in such cases a  Hudson-Stahli pigment
        line  in the epithelium 4 severe astigmatism from formation of facets in
        cornea have been observed.  [GRANT.  TOX OF THE EYE 1986 ,  p.  498] **PBBR
        REVIEWED**
HTOX  -  Target organs: Byes, skin. Symptoms:  Conjunctival keratitis; uleeration
        Of  akin.  [NIOSH.  NIOSH POCKET GUIDE CHEM KAZ 2ND PRT 1987 ,  p. 203]
        **PBBR REVIEWED**
HTOX  -  IN MANY INDUSTRIES FINE  DUST  OF PARTICLES CAN BE GENERATED ... 4 REACH
        THE  BYE.  ... /THE/ COLORLESS  HYDROQUINONE DUST ... IS STORED IN LARGE
        GRANULES IN OR NEAR  BASAL LAYER OF CORNEAL  EPITHELIUM 4 III SMALLER
        GRANULES IN THE  MORE SUPERFICIAL EPITHELIUM. IT  IS VISIBLE AS A BROWN
        BAND  KERATOPATHY. (CASARBTT AND DOULL'S TOXICOLOGY 3RD ED 1986 , p.
        483]  **PBER REVIEWED**
NTOX  - A GROUP OF MICE  WERE PAINTED  WITH A 0.25% SOLN OF P-QUINONB  IN BENZENE
        EVERY 1  OR 2 DAYS. OF 44 MICE THAT SURVIVED MORE THAN 200 DAYS, 3
        DEVELOPED  SKIN PAPILLOMAS, 1  DEVELOPED A SKIN CARCINOMA 4 5  DEVELOPED

-------
        LUNG ADENOCARCINOMAS.  WHEN 0.1% SOLN WAS USED,  41 MICE SURVIVED MORE
        THAN 200 DAYS,  & 6 DEVELOPED SKIN PAPILLOMAS,  2 DEVELOPED SKIN
        CARCINOMAS 4 10 DEVELOPED LUNG ADENOCARCINOMAS (P < 0.05).  OF 46
        SURVIVING CONTROLS TREATED WITH BENZENE, 1 DEVELOPED SKIN PAPILLOMA, &
        2 DEVELOPED LUNG ADBNOCARCINOMAS (TAKIZAWA, 1940) (THE WORKING GROUP
        NOTED THAT THE SEX 4 STRAIN OF ANIMALS & DURATION OF EXPT WERE NOT
        SPECIFIED). IIARC MONOGRAPHS.  1972-PRESENT VIS 258 (1977)]  ••PEER
        REVIEWED**
 NTOX -  GROUP OF 25 MICE (SEX & STRAIN UNSPECIFIED) WERE EXPOSED /BY
        INHALATION/ TO 5 MG PARA-QUXNONB IN 130 L CHAMBER FOR 1 HR,  6 TIMES/WK;
        25 MICE WERE UNTREATED ...  .  IN 11 TREATED MICE THAT SURVIVED MORE THAN
        100 DAYS,  2 LUNG ADBNOCARCXNOMAS WERE OBSERVED. AMONG 12 CONTROLS THAT
        DIED AFTER MORE THAN 100 DAYS,  2 LUNG ADENOMAS WERE OBSERVED
        (KISKIZAWA, 1954).  IN ANOTHER BXPT CARRIED OUT UNDER SAME CONDITIONS OF
        EXPOSURE,  2 LUNG ADBNOCARCINOMAS WERE FOUND IN 25 TREATED MICE,
        COMPARED WITH 1 LUNG ADENOMA AMONG 25 CONTROLS  (KISHIZAWA,  1955) . THE
        SAME EXPT WAS REPEATED 4 2  LUNG ADENOCARCINOMAS WERE OBSERVED IN 25
        MICE 4 1 LUNG ADENOMA IN 25 CONTROLS (KISHIZAWA,  1956).  [IARC
        MONOGRAPHS. 1972-PRESENT VIS 259 (1977)]  **PEBR REVIEWED**
 NTOX -  A GROUP OF 24 RATS  (15 WISTAR  STRAIN & 9 HYBRIDS),  WEIGHING ABOUT.200 G
        EACH,  WERE INJECTED SC WITH 0.5 ML SOLN OF P-QUINONB IN PROPYLBNB
        GLYCOL AT WEEKLY INTERVALS.  CONCN GIVEN DURING  THE FIRST 53  DAYS WAS
        1%;  THIS WAS REDUCED TO 0.2% FROM DAYS 54-173 4 AGAIN INCREASED  TO 0.4%
        AFTER 173  DAYS.  17  RATS SURVIVED THE INJECTION  PERIOD OF 394 DAYS 4
        RECEIVED A TOTAL OF 32 INJECTIONS (P-QUINONB 81 MG,  PROPYLBNB GLYCOL
        16.5 ML)  DURING THIS PERIOD. INJECTION SITE FIBROSARCOMAS DEVELOPED IN
        2  RATS.  NO LOCAL TUMORS WERE OBSERVED AMONG 11  RATS  OP SAXTAMA MIXED
        STRAIN INJECTED WEEKLY WITH 1 ML PROPYLBNB GLYCOL FOR 15 MO,  THEN 0.5
        ML,  4 SURVIVING 300 OR MORE DAYS (P > 0.05)  (UMBDA,  1957).  [IARC
        MONOGRAPHS.  1972-PRESENT VIS 259 (1977)]  ••PEER REVIEWED**
 •OT •  ASPHYXIA APPEARS TO PLAY IMPORTANT ROLE IN TERMINAL  /CASES/  ...  BECAUSE
        OF PULMONARY THAMAOB RESULTING FROM EXCRETION OF QUINUNB  INTO ALVEOLI 4
        BECAUSE OF CERTAIN  NOT TOO  WELL-DEFINED EFFECTS OP UU1NUNK UPON
        HEMOGLOBIN.  URINE OF SEVERELY POISONED ANIMALS  MAY CONTAIN PROTEIN,
        BLOOD /4/  CASTS  ....  (PATTY. INDUS HYG 4 TOX 3RD ED  VOL2A,2B,2C
        1981-82  ,  p. 2593]  **PBBR REVIEWED**
 NTOX -  ABSORPTION OP LARGE DOSES OF QU1HUNK PROM GASTROBNTBRIC  TRACT OR FROM
        SC TISSUES OF ANIMALS  INDUCED LOCAL CHANGES, CRYING,  CLOHIC
        CONVULSIONS. RESPIRATORY DIFFICULTIES,  DROP OP  BLOOD  PRESSURE, 4 DEATH
        BY PARALYSIS OF  *"""™-M»Y CENTERS.  [PATTY.  INDUS  HYG  4 TOX 3RD BD
        VOL2A,2B,2C 1981-82  , p.  2593]  ••PEER REVIEWED**
NTOX  -  SIGNS OF KIDNEY  DAMAGE  WERE OBSERVED IN SEVERELY  POISONED ANIMALS.  ...
        IT ALSO  CAUSES LOCAL GREYING OF HAIR OF COLORED MICE.  [IARC  MONOGRAPHS.
        1972-PRESENT VIS 259  (1977)1 **PBBR REVIEWED**    	         	
NTOX  - TOXIC CONCN OF PARA-OJUINONB WERE NOT MUTAGBNIC  TO NBUROSPORA TKSTKU FOR
        FORWARD  PYR MUTATIONS  (REQUIREMENT  FOR PYRIMIDINBS) OR REVERSE
       MUTATIONS TO ARGININE INDEPENDENCE.  SINGLE IP INJECTION  OF 6.25 MG/KG
       BODY WT  PARA-QUINONB DID NOT INDUCE DOMINANT LETHAL MUTATIONS IN MALE
       MICE.  [IARC MONOGRAPHS.  1972-PRESENT VIS  260 (1977)]  ••PBBR  REVIEWED**
NTOX  - THE BEHAVIORAL SYMPTOMS OF ACUTE P-BBNZOOUINONB INTOXICATION IN THE
       COCKROACH  (PBRIPLANBTA AMERICANA) WERE INITIAL  EXCITATION FOLLOWED BY
       RIGID PARALYSIS. P-BBNZOOUIRONB PRODUCED A DEPOLARIZATION OF THE
        POSTSYKAPTIC MRMBBANB OF THE GIANT  NEURONS IN TKB6TK ABDOMINAL
       GANGLION OF  THE  COCKROACH. THE  FREQUENCY 4 AMPLITUDE  OF  UNITARY
       POSTSYKAPTIC POTENTIALS ALSO INCREASED. THESE EFFECTS MAY BE DUB TO
        INHIBITION OF ACTIVE CATION TRANSPORT.  [CHAMBERS  PL,  ROWAN MJ; ARCH
       TOXICOL  SUPPL 5: 107-11  (1982)]  **PBER REVIEWED**
NTOX  - Bxptl exposure of rabbit eyes to high conen of  bencoquinone  vapor or
       direct contact with powder or concn soln has caused severe reactions
       with conjunctivitis, cornea! edema,  4 necrosis. Immediately  after
       exposure to  high concn  of — vapors,  a superficial brownish
       discoloration has been  observed in  exposed surfaces of  ... eye, but
       chronic exposure of  rabbits to  low  concn of ... vapor which  were  not
       acutely  injurious has  failed to induce corneal  or conjunctiva!

-------
        pigmentation or opacities like those seen in workmen.  [GRANT. TOX OF
        THE EYB 1986 ,  p.  499]  ••PEER REVIEWED**
 NTOX - /In/ experiments with excised bovine corneas ...  benzoquinone caused a
        loss of intercellular cohesion of the corneal epithelium upon
        incubation for several hours. ... Tests on rabbit lens surviving in
        culture in vitro have shown hydroquinone to have  very little effect on
        cation transport or glycolysis of the lens,  but  showed benzoquinone to
        be inhibitory to both activities, despite potent  antagonism to the
        action of benzoquinone by ascorbic acid in the  lens. [GRANT. TOX OF THE
        EYE 1986 , p.  499]  **PEER REVIEWED**
 NTOX - PRETREATMBNT OF FICOLL-PURIFIED RAT SPLEEN LYMPHOCYTES WITH
        1,4-BBNZOQUXNQNB ENHANCED IN VITRO PHYTOHBMAGGLUTININ (PHA)-STIMULATED
        MZTOGENESIS AT LOWER CONCN,  BUT INHIBITED LBCTXN-STIMULATED BLAST
        FORMATION AT HIGHER CONCN. [PFEIFER RW.  IRONS RD; BXP MOL PATHOL 35
        (2): 189-98 (1981)1  **PEER REVIEWED*•
 NTOX - p-Quinone was tested for mutagenicity in the Salmonella/microsome
        preincubation assay using the standard protocol approved by the
        National Toxicology Program.  p-Quinone was tested at doses of 0.01,
        0.03,  0.10,  0.30,  0.33,  1.0,  3.3, 10, SO,  and 66  ug/plate in as many as
        5  Salmonella typhimurium strains (TA1535,  TA1537, TA97,  TA98,  and
        TA100)  in the presence and absence of rat or hamster liver S-9.
        p-Quinone was negative in these tests and the highest ineffective dose
        tested in any S typhimurium strain was 66 ug/plate.  [Mortelmans K et
        al;  Environ Mutagen 8:1-119  (1986)]  **QC REVIEWED**
 HTXV -  NO DATA
 NTXV -  NO DATA
 ETXV -  NO DATA
 NTF  -  NO DATA
 IARC -  No data are available in humans.  Inadequate  evidence of carcinogenic!ty
        in animals.  OVERALL EVALUATION:  Group 3:  The agent is not classifiable
        as to  its carcinogenicity to humans.  [IARC MONOGRAPHS.  1972-PRESENT S7
        71 (1987)]  **PBBR REVIEWED**
 TCAT -  1,4 -Benzoquinone was examined for mutagenic  activity in Salmonella
        typhimurium tester  strains TA1S35,  TA98, TA1537,  TA100  in the presence
        and absence of  metabolic activation provided by Aroclor-induced rat
        liver  S9 fraction. The  test article was not  mutagenic at concentrations
        ranging from 0.1 to 32 ug/plate  in the absence of activation, or from
        O.l  to 100 ug/plate  in  the presence of activation. Cytotoxicity data
        was  not reported.  [Goodyear Tire  and  Rubber  Co.;  Laboratory  Report No
        80-6-10 Mutagenicity Evaluation  of Benzoquinone,  Salmonella
        typhimurium/Microsome Bioassay,  EPA Document No.  878210381,  Piche No.
        OTS020S941]  ••UNRBVIBWSD**
 TCAT -  Benzoquinone was examined for DNA modifying  activity in  Bscherichia
        coli strains W3110 polA+ and  P3478 polA-  (DNA repair deficiency assay
        ). The  test  article  was  administered  to cells by  the preincubation
        method  at  concentrations of 0.01,  0.032, 0.04, 0.05  and  0.1  ug/plate in
        the  absence  of metabolic activation.  The test article induced
        differential toxicity, a* indicated by a decrease in the survival index
        (percent pol A-  survivors divided by  the percent  pol A+  survivors)  from
        1.02 at 0.01 ug/plate to 0.07  at  0.05 ug/plate. Extreme  toxicity was
        observed at  concentrations >•  0.1 ug/ml in both B. coli  strains.
        [Goodyear  Research Division; DNA Damage by Benzoquinone  (Sublimed)
        Sample  No  8349-34 in the B. Coli  Pol  Al- Assay (1980), BPA Document  No.
        878210380, Piche NO.  OTS0205941]  **UNREVIEWED**
 POPL -  Persons with a history of congenital  or acquired  eye defects would be
        expected to  be at increased risk  from exposure. Persons with poor
        visual  acuity from high  degrees of astigmatism, keratoconus, or
        existing corneal injury  should be /protected/ from repeated,
        uncontrolled exposure to quinone  vapor.  [NZOSH OSHA.  OCCUPAT HEALTH
        GUIDE CHBM HAZARDS.  1981 , p.  1]  **PBER REVIEWED**
 POPL -  Workers who  have ...  /injuries or diseases of the/ skin must be
        protected  from work  /involving 1,4-benzoquinone/.  [XTX. TOX  & HAZARD
        INDUS CHBM SAFETY MANUAL 1982  , p.  67] **PEER REVIEWED**
ADB   -  QUINONE IS READILY ABSORBED FROM GASTROENTERIC TRACT & SC TISSUES.  IT

-------
        IS PARTIALLY EXCRETED UNCHANGED;  BUT BULK IS ELIMINATED IN CONJUGATION
        WITH HEXDRONIC,  SULFURIC,  & OTHER ACIDS.  [PATTY.  INDUS HYG & TOX 3RD ED
        VOL2A,2B,2C 1981-82 , p.  2593]  "PEER REVIEWED**
 METB -  [IYANAGI T, YAMAZAKI I; BIOCHIM BIOPHYS ACTA 172:  370 (1969); KOLI AK
        ET AL;  J BIOL CHEM 244: 621 (1969)]  IN PIG PARA-QOTNONE IS METABOLIZED
        TO P-BENZOSBMIQUINONB & QUINOL. /FROM TABLE/ [GOODWIN. HDBK INTERMED
        METAB AROMAT COMPD 1976 Q-5]  "PEER REVIEWED**
 BHL  -  NO DATA
 ACTN -  THE INFLUENCE OF P-BBNZOQUINONB ON POTASSIUM UPTAKE BY EXCISED SUGAR
        BEET &  WHEAT ROOTS WAS STUDIED. WHEN P-BENZOQDTNONB WAS ADDED TO
        NUTRIENT SOLUTION, IT ENHANCED  ABSORPTION RATES OF BOTH SPECIES AT VERY
        LOW CONCN WHILE  INHIBITION OCCURRED FOR HIGHER CONCH. [LUCCI GC,  LANDI
        S; AGROCHIMICA 25 (1): 20-8 (1981)1  **PBBR REVIEWED**
 INTC   NO DATA
 BION   NO DATA
 THER   NO DATA
 MINF   NO DATA
 WARN   NO DATA
 IDIO   NO DATA
 TOLR -  NO DATA
 MXDD -  NO DATA
 ENVS -  1,4-Benzoquinone may be released to the environment in effluents during
        its commercial production  and use and in wastewaters from the coal
        industry.  If released to the  soil it is susceptible to leaching
        (estimated Koc of 30)  and  may be  susceptible to volatilization and
        photodegradation on soil surfaces. A single degradation study found
        benzoquinone to  be rapidly degraded in a chernozem soil to stable
        metabolites. Sufficient data  are  not available to  predict the
        significance of  biodegradation  in either soil or water.  If released to
        the aquatic environment, it may be degraded by photolysis as it absorbs
        UV radiation. In water, benzoquinone is not expected to volatilise.
        adsorb  to particulate matter  or sediment  or bioaccumulate in aquatic
        organisms. If released to  the atmosphere  in vapor-phase,  it will  react
        rapidly with both hydroxyl radicals  and ozone (combined estimated
        half-life of 33.6 minutes)  and  may be susceptible  to direct photolysis.
        Particulate associated benzoquinone  released to the atmosphere may be
        susceptible to physical removal via  dry deposition or wash-out. The
        ambient atmospheric concentration of benzoquinone  has been reported to
        be less than 15  to 80 ng/cu m and benzoquinone has been detected in
        tobacco smoke. Inhalation  appears to be the most significant route of
        human exposure.  (SRC)  [CITATION ]  ••PEER REVIEWED**
NATS  -  1,4-Benzoquinone occurs naturally in a variety of  arthropods(1).  Many
        insects synthesize simple'benzoquinones(2).  [(1) IARC; Some Fumigants,
        the Herbicides 2,4-D and 2,4,5-T,  Chlorinated Dibenzodioxins and
        Miscellaneous Industrial Chemicals 15:  255  (1977)  (2)  Thirtle JR;
        Kirk-Othmer Bncycl Chem Tech  2nd  ed  John  Wiley 4 Sons 16:  900-1 (1968)1
        **PEBR  REVIEWED**
ARTS  -  1,4-Benzoquinone may be released to  the environment in wastewater
        effluents or solid wastes  generated  from its commercial
        production (SRC). It may also  be released in wastewater effluents or
        solid wastes produced as a result of its  major commercial use as a
        chemical intermediate in the  manufacture  of hydroquinone(SRC,l).
        Releases may also occur from  its  commercial uses as a photographic
        chemical and tanning agent and  from its use as a chemical intermediate
        to manufacture a variety of small volume  chemicals (SRC, 1). Benzoquinone
        can be  released  in wastewaters  from the coal industry (2).  It has been
        found in tobacco smoke(3).  [(1)  IARC; Some  Fumigants.  the Herbicides
        2,4-D and 2,4,5-T, Chlorinated  Dibenzodioxins and  Miscellaneous
        Industrial Chemicals 15: 255  (1977)  (2)  Thielemann H; Z Wasser Abwasser
        Forsch  7:  91-3 (3) Graedel T; Chemical Compounds in the Atmosphere NY
        Academic Press (1978)1 **PBBR REVIEWED**
 •CTB  -  TERRESTRIAL FATE: 1,4-Benzoquinone was degraded very fast in a
        chernozem (CEC>20; BS>50)  soil  (persistence time not reported) leaving
        soil stable metabolite residues (1) ;  the fate processes by which the

-------
        benzoquinone was degraded in this chernozem soil were not
        reported (SRC) .  Based on its log Kow value,  benzoquinone is expected to
        have high mobility in soil predicting that leaching into groundwater is
        possible(SRC).  Benzoquinone on soil surfaces may be susceptible to
        volatilization and photodegradation(SRC) .  Sufficient data are not
        available to predict the significance of biodegradation(SRC). {(1)
        Medvedev VA, Davydov VD; Pochvovedenie 1:  133-7 (1974)]  ••PEER
        REVIEWED**
 FATS - AQUATIC FATE:  Benzoquinone released to the aquatic environment is not
        expected to significantly volatillize adsorb to soils or sediments, or
        bioaccumulate in aquatic organisms. Since it absorbs DV radiation in
        environmentally significant wavelengths,  direct photolysis is possible.
        Sufficient data are not available to predict the significance of
        biodegradation. (SRC)  [CITATION )  **PBBR REVIEWED**
 FATE - ATMOSPHERIC FATE:  Benzoquinone released to the atmosphere in vapor
        phase will react rapidly with both hydroxyl radicals and ozone with a
        combined estimated half-life of 33.6 minutes.  Since it absorbs DV
        radiation in environmentally significant wavelengths,  -.rect  photolysis
        is also possible.  Physical removal of benzoquinone as-   -ited with
        particulate matter from the atmosphere via dry deposit    or  wash-out
        may occur.  (SRC)  [CITATION ]  **PEBR REVIEWED**
 BIOD - Fourteen strains of phenol-utilizing bacteria  isolated   am soil do not
        visibly grow when using 1,4-benzoquinone as a  carbon sour-e in an
        aqueous mineral salts  media over 5 days of  incubation(1).  [(1)  Kramer
        N,  Doetsch RH;  Arch Biochem Biophys 26: 401-5  (1950))  **PBBR  REVIEWED**
 ABXO - The estimated half-life for the vapor-phase reaction of  .
        1,4-benzoquinone with  photochemically produced hydroxyl  radicals in the
        atmosphere is 111.1 minutes;  the estimated  half-life for the
        vapor-phase reaction with ozone in the atmosphere  is 48.1  minutes; the
        combined atmospheric half-life due to reaction with both hydroxyl
        radicals and ozone is  33.6 minutes(l).  Although bensoquinone  absorbs DV
        radiation between  300  nm to well over 400 am(3,2),  photolysis rate
        constants are not  available for environmental  parameters.  Photolysis of
        1,4 -benzoquinone in aqueous solution using  natural  sunlight and
        artificial light in excess of 290  nm wavelength has yielded
        unidentifiable  polar products (4).  [(1)  GEMS; Graphical
       Modeling System. Fate of  atmospheric pollutants  (PAP) data base. Office
       of Toxic Substances. OSBPA (1985)  (2) Sad tier; DV 248  (3) Thirtle JR;
       KirJe-Othmer Bncycl Cham Technol 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons NY  16: 900-1
        (1968)  (4) Ware GW et al;  Arch Environ Contain Toxicol 9: 135-46  (1980)]
       ••PEER REVIEWED**
BIOC - Based on a log Kow value  of  0.20(1). the bioconcentration factor (BCF)
       for bensoquinone can be estimated to be about 0.84  (log BCF. -0.078) by
       use of a recommended regression equation(2,SRC).  1(1) Hansch C,  Leo AJ;
       Medchem Project Issue no.  26 Claremont CA Pomona College  (1985)  (2)
       Lyman WJ et al; Handbook  of  Chemical Property Estimation Methods.
       Environmental Behavior  of Organic Compounds. McGraw-Hill NY  (1982)]
       ••PEER REVIEWED**
KOC  - Based on a log Kow value  of  0.20(1), the Koc value  for bensoquinone can
       be estimated to be about  30, indicating high mobility in soil(2,SRC) .
        [(1) Hansch C, Leo AJ;  Medchem Project Issue no. 26 Claremont  CA Pomona
       College (1*85)  (2) Lyman  WJ  et al; Handbook of Chemical Property
       Estimation Methods. Environmental Behavior of Organic Compounds.
       McGraw-Hill NY  (1982)]  **PBBR  REVIEWED**
VWS  - The Henry's Law constant  for benzoquinone at 25 deg C is estimated  to
       be 4X10-7 atm-cu m/mol(l,SRC). The Henry's Law constant for
       benzoquinone has been estimated to be 1.8X10-7 atm-cu m/mol from a
       calculated water solubility  (based on log Row- 0.20) and measured  (at
       25 deg C) vapor pressure(2). Volatilization can be  considered
       unimportant as an aqueous-air  transfer mechanism based on the  low
       Henry's Law constant(2).  Benzoquinone sublimes(3) and has a vapor
       pressure of 0.09 mm Kg  at 20 deg C(4) suggesting that volatilization of
       solid particles from soil surfaces may be a significant transfer
       mechanism(SRC). [(1) Hiae J, Hooker3ee PK; j Org Chem 40: 292-8  (1975)

-------
        (2)  GEMS;  Graphical Exposure Modeling System.  Chemical Estimation
        (CHEMEST)  data base. Office of Toxic Substances.  USEPA (1986)  (3)  IARC;
        Some Fumigants,  the Herbicides 2,4-D and 2,4, S-T,  Chlorinated
        Dibenzodioxins and Miscellaneous Industrial Chemicals 15:  255 (1977)
        (4)  Verschueren K; Handbook of environmental data on organic chemicals.
        2nd ed Von Nostrand Reinhold NY (1983)  ]  "PEER REVIEWED**
 WATC - SURFACE MATER: /I, 4-Benzoquinone/ ... has been found as a  pollutant in
        filtered surface . . . water at a water treatment plant . [IARC
        MONOGRAPHS.  19 72 -PRESENT VIS 257 (1977)]  **PEER REVIEWED**
 WATC - GROUNDWATER:  /1,4-Benzoquinone/ —  has been found as a pollutant in
        filtered ...  ground water at a water treatment plant. [IARC MONOGRAPHS.
        1972 -PRESENT VIS 257 (1977)]  **PEBR  REVIEWED**
 BPPL - NO DATA
 SBDS - NO DATA
 ATMC - The ambient  atmospheric concentration of 1,4-benzoquinone  has been
        reported to  be less than 15 to 80 ng/cu m(l) .  1,4-Benzoquinone has been
        detected in  tobacco smoked).  [(1) Graedel TE; Chemical Compounds  in
        the Atmosphere New York,  NY Academic Press (1978)1  "PEER  REVIEWED**
 FOOD - NO DATA
 PLNT - NO DATA
 FISH - NO DATA
 ANML - NO DATA
 MILK - NO DATA
 OBVC - NO DATA
 RTEX - Inhalation of contaminated air,  especially near areas of use and
        production, may provide significant  exposure.  Inhalation exposure  is
        possible as a result of tobacco smoking.  (SRC)  (CITATION ]  **PBER
 _   REVIEWED**
 RTEX - Quinone can affect the  body if it ___ comes in contact with the  eyes  or
        skin.  It can  also affect the body if it is swallowed.  [NZOSH OSHA.
        OCCDPAT HEALTH GUIDE CHBM HAZARDS. 1981 ,  p. 1] **PBBR REVIEWED**
 *WDI - NO DATA                           _
 PttttX - ...  WORKERS ENGAGED IN  MFR OP  HYDROQUINONB . . .  /ARE EXPOSED TO/
        COLORLESS  HYDROOJUXNONB  DOST . . .  [CASARBTT AND  DOULL'S TOXICOLOGY 3RD  ED
        1986 ,  p.  483) **PEBR REVIEWED**
 PBBX - NIOSH (NOUS Survey 1972-1974)  has statistically estimated  that 3747
        workers are exposed to  1,4-benzoquinone in the USA(l) .  1(1)  NZOSH;
        National Occupational Survey Hazard.  NOHS (1974)]  **PBBR RBVIBWED**
 PBEX -  The  following list includes some common operations in which exposure  to
        quinone may occur ... :  Dse as oxidizing agent ...  in photography  . . .
        in agriculture production of insecticides & fungicides;  in
       pharmaceutical industry for production of cortisone & addition cmpd
        with barbiturates ;  use  in polymer ft  resins industry . .  use as  toner &
        intensifier in photographic industry; as  a tanning agent for leather
        industry;  use in mfr of quinhydrone  electrodes for use for pH
        determinations.  [NZOSH  OSHA. OCCDPAT HEALTH GUZDB  CHBM HAZARDS.  1981  ,
       p. 3]  **PBBR  REVIEWED**
 BODY • NO DATA
 ZDLH -  300  mg/CU  m  [NZOSH.  NZOSH POCKET GUIDE CKEM HAZ 1990 .  p.  192] **QC
        REVIEWED**
 ADZ   -  NO DATA  .
 ATOL -  NO DATA
 OSHA - Meets  criteria for OSHA medical records rule.  [29  CPR 1910.20  (7/1/88)1
        ••PEER REVIEWED**
 OSHA -  8  hr Time-Weighted avg:  0.1 ppm (0.4 mg/cu m)  [29  CFR 1910.1000
        (7/1/88)]  **PBBR REVIEWED**
 NRBC - NO DATA
 TLV   - Time Weighted Avg (TWA)  0.1 ppm,  C.44 mg/cu B  (1987!
       BIOLOGICAL BXP INDICIBS 1991-92 ,  p.  32]  **QC  REVIEWED**
•TLV   -  Excursion  Limit  Recommendation:  Excursions in  worker exposure levels
       may  exceed three times  the TLV- TWA for no more than a total of 30  min
                                                      [ACGIH. TLV'S  &
during a work day and under no circumstances should they exceed five
times the TLV-TWA, provided that the TLV -TWA is not exceeded.  [ACGIH.
TLV'S & BIOLOGICAL EXP INDICIES 1991-92 , p. 5] **QC REVIEWED* •

-------
 OOPL  -  OSHA'B  health  standards  for  exposure  to air contaminants require that
        employees  exposure to para-quinone  does not 'exceed 8-hr time-weighted
        avg of  0.1 ppm (0.4 mg/eu m).  ... The corresponding standard in the
        Federal Republic of Germany  &  in Australia is also 0.4  mg/cu m,  & the
        acceptable ceiling concn in  USSR is 0.05 mg/cu m.  [IARC MONOGRAPHS.
        1972-PRESENT VIS 257  (1977)] **PEER REVIEWED**
 WSTD  -  NO DATA
 ASTD  -  This action  promulgates  standards of  performance for equipment leaks of
        Volatile Organic Compounds  (VOC) in the Synthetic  Organic Chemical
        Manufacturing  Industry  (SOCMZ).  The intended effect of  these standards
        is to require  all newly  constructed,  modified, and reconstructed SOCMI
        process units  to use the best  demonstrated system  of continuous
        emission reduction for equipment leaks of VOC, considering costs,  non
        air quality  health and environmental  impact and energy  requirements.
        1,4-Benzoquinone is produced,  as an intermediate or final product, by
        process units  covered under  this subpart.  [40 CPU  60.489 (7/1/87)]
        ••PEER  REVIEWED**
 SSTD  -  NO DATA
 CERC  -  Persons in charge of vessels or  facilities are required to notify the
        National Response Center (NRC) immediately,  when there  is a release of
        this designated hazardous substance,  in an amount  equal to or greater
        than its reportable quantity of  10  Ib or 4.45 kg.  The toll free
        telephone  number of the  NRC  is  (800)  424-8802; In  the Washington
        metropolitan area  (202)  426-2675. The rule for determining when
        notification is required is  stated  in 40 CFR 302.6 (section IV.  D.3.b).
        [40 CFR 302.4  (7/1/88)-]  **PBBR REVIEWED**
 TSCA  -  Pursuant to  section 8(d) of  TSCA, EPA promulgated  a model Health and
        Safety  Data  Reporting Rule.  The  section 8(d)  modal rule requires
        manufacturers, importers, and processors of listed chemical  substances
        and mixtures to submit to EPA  copies  and lists of  unpublished health
        and safety studies. 1,4-Benzoquinone  is included on this list.  [40 CFR
        716.120 (7/1/88)] **PBBR REVIEWED**
 TSCA  •  Section 8 (a) of TSCA requires manufacturers of this chemical substance
        to report  preliminary assessment information concerned  with production,
        use,  and exposure to EPA. [40 CFR 712.30 (7/1/88)1  **PBBR REVIEWED**
 RCRA  -  As stipulated  in 40 CFR  261.33,  when  quinones, aa  a commercial chemical'
        product or manufacturing chemical intermediate or  an off-specification
        commercial chemical product  or a manufacturing chemical intermediate,
        becomes a  waste, it oust be  managed according to Federal and/or State
        hazardous  waste regulations. Also defined  as a hazardous waste is  any
        residue, contaminated soil,  water,  or other debris resulting frost the
        cleanup of a spill, into water or on  dry land, of  this  waste.
        Generators of  small quantities of this waste may qualify for partial
        exclusion  from hazardous waste regulations (40 CFR 261.5).  [40 CFR
        261.33  (7/1/88)] **PBBR  REVIEWED**
 FIFR  -  NO DATA
 FDA   -  NO DATA


 1     -  IRZS
NAME  -  Quinone
RN    •  106-51-4

CAA   -  NO DATA

WQCHD-  NO DATA

WQCAQ-  NO DATA

MCLG  -  NO DATA

MCX,   -  NO DATA

 SMCL  •  NO DATA

-------
Table C-l

-------
C- 1
"RENCE DOSES AND CANCER POTENCY DATA
Numeric Toxicrty Data
lor TRI Chemicals
CAS
75070
60355
67641
75058
53963
107028
79061
79107
107131
309002
107051
7429905
117793
60093
92671
82280
7664417
6484522
7783202
62533
90040
104949
134292
120127
7440360
20008
7440382
20019
1332214
492808
7440393
20020
98873
55210
71432
92875
106514
98077
98884
CHEMICAL
ACETALDEHYDE
ACETAMIDE
ACETONE
ACETONITRILE
ACETYLAMINOFLUbRENE.2
ACROLEIN
ACRYLAMIDE
ACRYLIC ACID
ACRYLONlTRILE
ALDRIN
ALLYL CHLORIDE
ALUMINUM
AMfNOANTHRAQUINONE.2
AMINOAZOBENZENE. 4
AMINODIPHENYL.4
1 -AMINO 2- METHYL- ANTHRAQUINONE
AMMONIA
AMMONIUM NITRATE
AMMONIUM SULFATE
ANILINE
ANISIDINE.O
ANISIDINE.P
ANISIDINE HYDROCHLORIDE.O
ANTHRACENE
ANTIMONY
ANTIMONY COMPOUNDS*
ARSENIC
ARSENIC COMPOUNDS*
ASBESTOS
AURAMINE
BARIUM
BARIUM COMPOUNDS*
BENZAL CHLORIDE
BENZAMIDE
BENZENE
BENZIDINE
BENZOQUINONE (QUINONE)
BENZOTRICHLORIDE
BENZOYL CHLORIDE
REFERENCE DOSES
VALUES mg/kg-d
INHALATION ORAL
26E-03
1.0E-02
5.7E-06
NO
86E-05
ND
2.9E-04

29E-02
29E-04

ND
ND


1.0E-04
1.0E-04





b
b


-

b
b



1.0E-01
60E-03
0.02
20E-04
B.OE-02
3.0E-05
0.05

9.7E-01
ND

30E-01
4.0E-04
4.0E-04
3.0E-04
3.0E-04

7.0E-02
7.0E-02

3.0E-03



b
b

s
-


-
FRESH
WATER
CHRONIC
CRITERIA
lua/U

21

2600
0.001





1600
190







e
b


_.




-

CANCER POTi
VALUES
Rsk/mg/kg-d'
INHALATION ORAL
7.70E-03

45
"2i4b¥-6l
1.70E+01
	 —






1.50E+01
150E+01
2.30E-02


290E-02
2.30E+02









-
IT







4.5
5.40E-01
1.70E+01
	


570E-03







2.90E-02
2 30E+02
1.30E+01
066


-
-
-



-

ENCY
WEIGHT OF
EVIDENCE
INHAL ORAL
B2

B2
Bl
B2
--


B2



A
A
A


A
A


o




-
_








B2
B2
Bl
B2


B2






A
A
B2
~B2


-

-

NON-CONVENTIONAI
DATA SOURCES
AVAILABLE DATA
RsK/mg/kg-d
RQ CAOPP/PF


--
X
-
-


X

X
X
0.07



0033
026
015

014
"oii


0.03





148



._ ..


0.48





B2
—

B2
...
—
Refer to end of table for citations

-------
94360
100447
7440417
"92524
111444
1 08601
103231
542681
75252
74839
106990
141322
71363
78922
75650
85687
106887
123728
7440439
20042
156627
133062
63252
"75150
56235
463581
120609
133904
57749
7782505
10049044
79118
532274
108907
510156
75003
67663
74873
107302
20053
126998
1897456
7440473
20064
7440484
20075
7440508
20086
BENZOYL PEROXIDE
BENZYL CHLORIDE
BERYLLIUM
BIPHENYL~(blPHENYL) """
BIS(2CHLOROETHYL)ETHER
BIS(2CHLOR6l METHETHYLJEfHER
BIS(2ETHYLHEXYL)ADIPATE
BIS(CHLOROMETHYL)ETHER
BROMOFORM (TF1IBROMOMETHANE)
BROMOMETHANE (METHYL BROMIDE)
BUTADIENE. 1.3
BUTYL ACRYLATE
BUTYL ALCOHOL. N JBUTANOL)
BUTYL ALCOHOL. SEC
BUTYL ALCOHOL. TERT
BUTYL BENZYL PHTHALATE
BUTYLENE OXIDE. 1.2
BUTYRALDEHYDE
CADMIUM
CADMIUM COMPOUNDS*
CALCIUM CYANAMIDE
CAPTAN
CARBARYL
CARBON DISULFOE
CARBON TETRACHLORIDE
CARBONYL SULFIDE
CATECHOL (1.2 DIHYDROXYBENZENE)
CHLORAMBEN
CHLORDANE
CHLORINE
CHLORINE DIOXIDE
CHLOROACETICACID
CHLOROACETOPHENONE
CHLOROBENZENE
CHLOROBENZILATE
CHLOROETHANE (ETHYL CHLORIDE)
CHLOROFORM
CHLOROMETHANE
CHLOROMETHYL METHYL ETHER (CMME)
CHLOROPHENOLS*
CHLOROPRENE
CHLOROTHALONIL
CHROMIUM
CHROMIUM COMPOUNDS*
COBALT
COBALT COMPOUNDS*
COPPER
COPPER COMPOUNDS*
ND


6.69
ND
ND
ND
ND
29E-03
53E-02
ND
ND
86E-06
5 7E-03
ND

ND
4 OE-02
ND
20E-06
2 OE-06
0.14
"" ' ND


d
b
b

b

b
b
b
d
50E-03
5 OE-02
o nc_A9

1.4E-03
100E+00
	 i
1
2 OE-01
5.0E-04
5 OE-04
13E-01
1 OE-01
1 OE-01
7 OE-04
1.50E-02
60E-OS
21
0002
2 OE-02
2.0E-02
1. OE-02

50E-03
2.0E-02
1.5E-02
5.0E-03
5.0E-03
3 7E-02
3.7E-02


P
E
5
b
c
b
b
s
8
5.3




1.1
— - —
0.004
11

_1240
2000
11
11
12






e
e


e
8 40E+OP
1 10E+00
7.66E-02
2.20E+02
390E-03
9.60E-01



630E-fOO
63
5.00E-02
1.30E+00
-- - • 	

8.10E-02
6.30E-03
220

1.20E-02
1.20E-02

b

-



-

b
k




1 70E-01
430E+00
4 50E-01
1 10E+00
700E-02
2 20E+02
7.90E-03





aSOE-OS
1 30E-01
1.30E+00
	

6.10E-03
1.30E-02
220

1.10E-02
. 	

b

-
b

b
k
b

B2
B2
'C
A
B2
B2



Bl
B1
B2
B2
§2

B2
C

A
..._

b

_
b
t
b


-
B2
B2
B2
B2
C
C
"A
B2


C

B2
B2
B?

A
B2
C
A

B2


b

b
r
b
b

b



-


~
;




-



.


_

	





• •-

1
j

- - •

- -









-





Refer to«—^ of table for citations

-------
1207
ioea
95487
106445
1319773
"98828
80159
135206
57125
20097
110827
4680788
569642
989388
1937377
2602462
16071866
"2832408
81889
~ 3761533
3118976
~842079
97563
128665
94757
1163195
2303164
615054
39156417
101804
95807
25376458
334683
132649
96128
106934
95501
541731
106467
25321226
91941
75274
107062
540590
75092
120832
78875
542756
ESIDINE.P
JESOLlM 	
CRESOL. 0
CRESOL. P
CRESOL (MIXED ISOMERS)
CUMENE
CUMENE HYDROPEROXIDE
CUPFERRON
CYANIDE
CYANIDE COMPOUNDS*
CYCLOHEXANE
Cl ACID GREEN 3
Cl BASIC GREEN 4
C 1. BASIC RED 1
C.I DIRECT BLACK 38
Cl DIRECT BLUE 6
C.I DIRECT BROWN 95
C.J DISPERSE YELLOW 3
Cl FOOD RED 15
Cl. FOOD RED 5
C 1. SOLVENT ORANGE 7
C 17 SOLVENt YELLOW 14 	 "
C 1. SOLVENT YELLOW 3
CJ. VAT YELLOW 4
D.2.4 (ACETIC ACID (2.4DICHLOR
DECABROMODIPHENYL OXIDE
DIALLATE
DIAMINOANISOLE.2.4
DIAMINOANISOLE SULFATE. 2.4
DIAMINODIPHENYLETHER. 4.4
DIAMINOTOLUENE. 2.4
DlAMINOTOLUENE (MfXED ISOMERS) 	
DIAZOMETHANE
DIBENZbFURAN
DIBROMOCHLOROPROPANE (DBCB)
DIBROMOETHANE. 1.2
DICHLOROBENZENE. 1.2
DICHLOROBENZENE. 1.3
DICHLOROBENZENE. 1.4
DICHLOROBENZENE (MIXED ISOMERS)
DICHLOROBENZIDINE. 3.3
DICHLOROBROMOMETHANE (BROMODICHK
DICHLDROETHANE. 1.2
DICHLOROETHYLENE.1 .2
DICHLOROMETHANE
DICHLOROPHENOL.2.4
DICHLOROPROPANE. 1.2
DiCHLOROPR6PYLENE.1.3 "
ND
ND
ND
as
3 OE-03
ND
ND
_.. 	 .
ND

5.7E-05
4 OE-02
2.0E-01


3
" 5.7E-03
1

-

d
d
d
50E
5 OE-02
5 OE-02
5.00E-02
"4 OE-02
2.0E-02
2 OE-02



2 OE-02
1 OE-02



9 OE-02
0.7
2JOE-02
1. OE-02
6.0E-02
3 OE-03
30E-04
h
b
b


b

-
b
b
5.2



-
- • •

•

763
763
763
763
20000

365
5700


—
—
e
e
e
e

e
	




	
•- — 	 -

	 - --

7.60E-01


9.10E-02
1.60E-03
	






-


-
—




B60E+00
8.10E+00
930E+00
0.019
6.10E-02

232
1.40E+00
8 50E+01
2.40E-02
0.45
"1.30E-01
9.10E-02
7.50E-03
6 BOE-02



b
b
b
b

b
b

b
b




A
A
A
— .

B2

B2
12
C

B2
B2
B2


b
b
b
b
I
b

b



A
A
A
C
C
B2


B2
B2
C
B2
B2
B2
B2
!?


b
b
b
b
b
1
b
b
b
X
X



X
...


...

a
i
"022



"0004
C.023
0.013
0.14











-
232










B2
-


...
Refer to end of table for citations

-------
62737
1 15532
1464535
111422
84662
" "64675
119904
57147
131113
77781
60117
121697
119937
"79447
105679
534521
51285
606202
121142
117840
123911
122667
117817
84742
106898
110805
140885
541413
100414
74851
107211
75218
96457
151564
2164172
50000
76131
20100
76448
87683
118741
77474
67721
1335871
680319
302012
10034932
7647010
DICHLORVOS
DICOFOL
DIEPOXYBUTANE
DiETHANOLAMINJE"
DIETHYLPHTHALATE
DIEtHYLSULFAfE"
DIMETHOXYBENZIDINE. 3.3
DIMETHYL HYDRAZINE. 1.1
DIMETHYL PHTHALATE
DIMETHYL SULFATE
DIMETHYLAMINOAZOBENZENE.4
DIMETHYLANILINE.N.N
DIMETHYLBENZIDINE. 3.3
DIMETHYLCARBAMYL CHLORIDE
DIMETHYLPHENOL.2.4
DINITROOCRESOL.4.6
DINITROPHENOL. 2.4
DINITROTOLUENE. 2.6
DINITROTOLUENE.2.4
DIOCTYL PHTHALATE. N
DIOXANE. 1.4
DIPHENYLHYDRAZINE. 1.2
DI|2ETHYLHEXYL) PHTHALATE
Dl - N - BUTYL PHTHALATE (DIBUTYL PHTHAl
EPICHLOROHYDRIN
ETHOXYETHANOL. 2
ETHYL ACRYLATE
ETHYL CHLOROFORMATE
ETHYLBENZENE
ETHYLENE
ETHYLENE GLYCOL
ETHYLENE OXfDE
ETHYLENE THIOUREA
ETHYLENEIMINE (AZIRONE)
FLUOMETURON
FORMALDEHYDE
FREON 113 (ETHANE. 1.1.2-TRICHLORO-1.;
GLYCOL ETHERS
HEPTACHLOR
HEXACHLORO1 .3BUTADIENE
HEXACHLOROBENZENE
HEXACHLOROCYCLOPENTADIENE
HEXACHLOROETHANE
HEXACHLORONAPHTHALENE
HEXAMETHYLPHOSPHORAMIDE
HYDRAZINE
HYDRAZINE SULFATE
HYDROCHLORIC ACID
-N.P.
ND

ND
ND
ND

ND

ND
86E-05
57E-02
29E-01
- - -


00057
ND

2 OE-05











b





n

b



8 OE-01
1.0E401

20E-03
2.0E-02
2.0E-03

2 OE-02

1 OE-01
2.0E-03

1 OE-01
20E+00
8 OE-05
1.30E-02
2.0E-01
30
5.0E-04
2.0E-03
8.0E-04
7.0E-03
1.0E-03




b




b

b











	




230

3
3


	


0.003
9.3
52
540



-




e










e



	
35





eooE-01
4.20E-03


"a'soE^'bl

4.50E-02
4.50E+00
7.80E-02
1.60E+00
0014

1.70E+01
1.70E+01

-
b









b








029
1 40E-02
260E+00

7.50E-01
9.20E+00

6 80E-01
6 BOE-01
1 10E-02
800E-01
9.90E-03
4.80E-03

T02E+b6
6.00E-01

3.00E-02
450E+00
7.80E-02
1.60E+00
0014

3.00E+00
3.00E+00

b
b

b
b





b

b
b

b






-
B2





B2
B2
B2

B1
B2

B1
B2
C
B2


B2
B2


b
r
r






b

b
b








CO
C,B;
B2
B2
B2

C
B?

B2
B2
B2
B2
B2
B2

Bi
B2

B1
B2
C
B2
C

B2
B2

.C
b
b
r
r
b
b





b

b
b








3

X
X
X
X






...
X






X
I

46
13







	
65









1
|
505


















B2
B2
B2
















Rete''   «d of table (or citations

-------
74.
7664
1233.*
78842
67630
"80057
7439921
20111
56899
108316
12427382
7439965
20122
7439976
20133
67561
72435
109864
96333
76933
60344
74884
108101
"624839
80626
1634044
74953
101144
101611
101688
101779
90948
1313275
505602
91203
134327
91598
7440020
20144
7697372
139139
98953
92933
1836755
51752
55630
99592
88755
YDROGEN CYANIDE
HYDROGEN FLUORIDE '
HYDROQUINONE
ISOBUTYRALDEHYDE
ISOPROPYL ALCOHOL for strong acid
ISOPROPYLIDENEDIPHENOL74.4
LEAD
LEAD COMPOUNDS*
LINDANE (HEXACHLOROCYCUOHEXANE. GAI
MALEIC ANHYDRIDE
MANEB
MANGANESE
MANGANESE COMPOUNDS*
MERCURY
MERCURY COMPOUNDS*
METHANOL
METHOXYCHLOR
METHOXYETHANOL. 2
METHYL ACRYLATE
METHYL t IMYL KETONE
METHYL HYDRAZINE
METHYL IODIDE
METHYL ISOBUTYL KETONE
METHYL ISOCYANATE
METHYL METHACRYLATE
METHYL TERTBUTYL ETHER
METHYLENE BROMIDE (DIBROMOMETHANE)
METHYLENEBIS(2CHLORO ANILINE)
METHYLENEBIS(N.N.DIMETHYUBENZENAMir
METHYLENEBIS(PHENYL1SOCYANATE)
METHYLENEDIANIUNE.4,4
MICHLERS KETONE
MOLYBDENUM TRIOXIDE
MUSTARD GAS
NAPHTHALENE
NAPHTHYLAMINE. ALPHA
NAPHTHYLAMINE.BETA
NICKEL
NICKEL COMPOUNDS*
NITRIC ACID
NITRILOTRIACETIC ACID
NITROBENZENE
NITROBIPHENYL.4
NITROFEN
NITROGEN MUSTARD
NITROGLYCERIN
NITROOANISIDINE. 5
NitR6PHENbL.2

ND
NO
ND
ND
1.1E-04
1.1E-04
30E-04
30E-04
ND
ND
5.7E-03
ND
90E-02
20E-02
ND
E


ND

ND

20E-03




-



b
b


b
b








b



20og
4 Ob _
ND
ND
30E-04
1.0E-01
5.0E-02
1.0E-01
1.0E-01
3.0E-04
3.0E-04
5.0E-01
5.0E-03
3.0E-02
5.0E-02

00052
0.01



40E-03

2.0E-02
2.0E-02

50E-04



b
-

b

b
b

b
b

1
V



b








32
0.06


0.012
0.03







620

160




150

e
e


e
e







e

e




e
...
	









1.30E-01




1.70E+00
1.70E+00






-









b


w

b
b


X


—
	 	






1.10E+00


1.30E-01
4 60E-02



N/A
4.77





	








b


b


w




X
y

- -
B2
B2

D






B2




A
A
















b




b
b






B2
B2





NA
C

B2
B2



C
A















u

b










X








X
X




X


X

X


1
1










1.6
086



0.005

0.082
0.049

1
,





















'
•




















Refer to end of table for citations

-------
100027
79469
55 IBS
62759
924163
621647
156105
86306
4549400
59692
759739
684935
16543558
100754
2234131
208 16 120
56382
87865
79210
108952
106503
90437
75445
7664382
7723140
85449
88891
1336363
1120714
57578
123386
114261
75569
115071
75558
110861
91225
82688
81072
94597
7782492
7440224
20177
100425
96093
7664939
79345
127184
NITROPHENOL.4
NITROPROPANE. 2'
NITROSODIETHYLAMINE.N
NltROSODIMETHYLAMINE.N
Nl TROSODI - n - BUTYLAMINE.N
NITROSODI-n-PROPYLAMINE.N
NITROSODIPHENYLAMINE. P
NITROSODIPHENYLAMINE.N
NITROSOMETHYLVINYLAMINE.N
NITROSOMORPHOUNE.N
NITROSO - N - ETHYLUREA.N
NITROSO-N-METHYLUREA.N
NITROSONORNICOTINE.N
NITROSOPIPERDINE.N
OCTACHLORONAPHTAHLENE
OSMIUM TETROXIDE
PARATHION
PENTACHLOROPHENOL
PERACET1CACID
PHENOL
PHENYLENEDIAMINE.P
PHENYLPHENOL. 2
PHOSGENE
PHOSPHORIC ACID
PHOSPHORUS (YELLOW OR WHITE)
PHTHALIC ANHYDRIDE
PICRIC ACID (2.4.6TRINITROPHENOL)
POLYCHLORINATED BIPHENYLS
PROPANE SULTONE
PROPIOLACTONE.BETA
PROPIONALDEHYDE
PROPOXUR (BAYQON)
PROPYLENE OXIDE
PROPYLENE (PROPENE)
PROPYLENEIMINE
PYRIDINE
QUINOUNE
QUINTOZENE (PENTACHLORONITROBENZEh
SACCHARIN (MANUFACTURING)
SAFROLE
SELENIUM
SILVER
SILVER COMPOUNDS*
STYRENE
STYRENE OXIDE
SULFURIC ACID
TETRACHLOROETHANE. 1 . 1 .2.2
TETRACHLOROETHYLENE (PERCHLORETHYI
57E-03






ND
ND
ND


ND


86E-03

ND


ND
ND
ND
ND
ND
























ND






6.0E-03
3.0E-02
6.0E-01
0.10

20E-05
20E+00


4.00E-03
ND

1.0E-03
3.0E-03
S.OE-03
3.0E-03
30E-03
20E-01
ND
3 OE-02
1.0E-02







b

b










b
b

b

ISO






0.013
13
2560









35
0.12

2400
840
e






d











e
e

e

~9.40E~+Ob
1.50E+02
5 10E+01
5 40E+00













0.013





200E-03
200E-01

b






2













b


9 50E+ 00
1 SOE+02
5 10E+01
5 40E+00
7 OOE+00
4 90E-03




1.20E-01

1.90E-03


7 70E+00
10

2.40E-01

1.20E+01



3 OOE-02
2.00E-OI
5.10E-02
b






z


b






b



b

b
B2
B2
B2
B2





C


C






C



B2
C
B2
b









b






b



b

g
B2
B2
B2
B2
B2
B2



C
B2

C


B2
62

B2

C



B2
C
B2
b









b






b



b

b



X
X
X
X
X
X

X
X


X

X

X
X






0022

67
1.4
94







14




0.22

0.16






137
2100
375









259

0.007
0.18





I
I


B2
B2
B2









B2

C
B2




Refer t<   °d of table for citations

-------
geiir
74402
6255
139651
62566
1314201
7550450
108B83
5B4B49
91087
95534
636215
8001352
68768
52686
120821
71556
79005
79016
95954
88062
1582O9B
95636
126727
51796
7440622
106054
593602
75014
75354
108383
95476
106423
1330207
87627
7440666
20199
12122677
-"•TRACHLORVINPHOS
MLIUM
.flOACETAMIDE
THIODIANILINE.4.4
THIOUREA
THORIUM DIOXIDE
TITANIUM TETRACHLORIDE
TOLUENE
TOLUENE2.4DIISOCYANATE
TOLUENE2.6DliSOCYANAtE ~
TOLUIDINE.O
TOLUIDINE HYDROCHLORIDE
TOXAPHENE
TRIAZIQUONE
TRICHLORFON
TRICHLOROBENZENE. 1.2.4
TRICHLOROETHANE. 1.1.1
TRICHLOROETHANE. 1.1.2
TRICHLOROETHYLENE
TRICHLOROPHENOL. 2.4.5
TRICHLOROPHENOL. 2.4.6
TRIFLURALIN
TRIMETHYLBENZENE. 1.2.4
TRIS(2.3DIBROMOPROPYL)PHOSPHATE
URETHANE (ETHYL CARBAMATE)
VANADIUM
VINYL ACETATE
VINYL BROMIDE
VINYL CHLORIDE
VINYLIDENE CHLORIDE (1.1 DICHLOROETHYI
XYLENE. M
XYLENE.6
XYLENE. P
XYLENE (MIXED ISOMERS)
XYUDINE.2.6
ZINC
ZINC COMPOUNDS*
ZINEB
ND


57E-01
-
30E-01

ND'
ND
57E-02
20E-01
20E-01
8 6E-02
8.6E-02
07
0.7
ND



b

b



b
b
b
d
c
c
c
30E-03'
70E


2.0E-01
0.01
1 OE-02
9 OE-02
4.0E-03
7.00E-03
1.0E-01
7 5E-03
7.0E-03
lOE+Op
90E-03
20E+00
20E+00
ND
2.0E+00
2.0E-01
2 OE-01
5.0E-02




*
b
b
g

b
b
b
b

b
b

40



0.000
50
31200
9400
21900
970
•



110
110

e



a
e






e
e




—
_i.ioE±og

0057
1.70E-02
1.10E-02
1.10E-01
0.3


-

.




-



b
b








2.40E-01
_MOE+00

5.70E-02
1.10E-02
1.10E-02
7.70E-03
9.76
064
1.90E+00
600E-01



_



b
•



b








—
_??

82
82
B2
A




.



-




b
b








B2
82

C
B2
82
C
82
82
B2
A
C



.



b
•



b
b





X
X
X
X
X









1
1 J
0072

0039
0039
013























                                                                                                                                         248
B2
                                                                                                                                         1 Ob.
KEY TO FOOTNOTES

All numbers are IRIS unless otherwise specified

• See individual element (or data on compounds
NOTE: For metal compounds, the toxicity data presented in the table are those ol the patent compound.

a = IRIS
b = HEAST (data used first from 1992 tables, but if references were unavailable. 1991 HEAST tables were used)

-------
c =RSG
d = ECTOX
e = WQCS
I = CURE
g = represents an upperbound estmate of risk
h = used para-cresol form to determine value
i = value is lor refinery dust
I = data available are inadequate for calculating potency factor, no quantitative inferences can be made
k = BCME data per IRIS
I = Abt figure
m = fibersAnl raised -1m
n = based on the glycool ether 2-methoxyethanol
o = OPP assigned this a class C carcinogen based on male/female rat liver tumors
p = based on n-butyl alcohol
q = RID inhalation value is based on water not on food
r = Cancer classification of medium potency is basis for final RQ
s = calculated from HEAST data
I = OPP assigned class C/B2 carcinogen; no quantitative data
u = No adequate quantitative data so assigned to middle cancer potency group
v = based on similarity to bromoform  and methyl bromide; in HEAST
w = Not found on EPA list; however, extensive RTECS citations (#79634); (ARC cancer review - sufficient animal evidence. Imrted human evidence:
    quantitative data available but not in PF form
x = Extensive citations in RTECS (#31472). including numerous cannogenicity studies: no PF available
y = Extensive citations in RTECS (#8628). NCI carcinogenicity bnassay - clear evidence; no PF available
z = RTECS (#53213) indicates reproductive hazard
# = WHO data. Note, conflicting Oral RIO = 0 125 from OPP

-------
Table C-2

-------
C - 2 REPORTABLE QUANTITIES
Numeric Toxicity Data
for TRI Chemicals
CAS
75070
60355
67641
75058
53963
107026
79061
79107
107131
309002
107051
7429905
117793
60093
92671
82280
7664417
6484522
7783202
62533
9004O
104949
134292
120127
7440360
20008
7440382
20019
1332214
492808
7440393
20020
98873
SS210
71432
92875
106514
98077
98884
CHEMICAL
ACETALOEHYDE
ACETAMIDE
ACETONE
ACETONITRILE
ACETYLAMINOFLUORENE.2
ACROLEIN
ACRYLAMIDE
ACRYUCACID
ACRYLONITRILE
ALDRIN
ALLYL CHLORIDE
ALUMINUM
AMINOANTHRAQUINONE.2
AMINOAZOBENZENE. 4
AMINODFPHENYM
1 -AMINO 2-METHYL-ANTHRAQUINONE
AMMONIA
AMMONIUM NITRATE
AMMONIUM SULFATE
ANILINE
ANISIDINE.O
ANISIDINE.P
ANISIDINE HYDROCHLORIDE.O
ANTHRACENE
ANTIMONY
ANTIMONY COMPOUNDS*
ARSENIC
ARSENIC COMPOUNDS*
ASBESTOS
AURAMINE
BARIUM
BARIUM COMPOUNDS*
BENZAL CHLORIDE
BENZAMIDE
BENZENE
BENZ1DINE
BENZOQUINONE (QUINONE)
BENZOTRICHLORIDE
BENZOYL CHLORIDE
REPORTABLE QUANTITIES
- (POUNDS)
CANCER CHRONIC ACUTE AQUATIC

1

10
1
"




t
1
100


10
1
10

a
a






a
a

1000

100
1000
1000





10


1000
100

a


-



-
5000
5000
"5000
100
5000
5000
1000
1000
1000
5000
1000


5000


100
5000
5000
5000
5000
1000
a
a

--
a


e
-

1000
5000
5000
1

100
1
1000
	 "To
1000







100
100
10
1000
a


a

-




-
Refer to    of table for citations

-------
9436
10044
7440417
92524
111444
108601
103231
542881
75252
74839
106990
141322
71363
78922
75650
85687
106887
123728
7440439
20042
156627
133062
63252
75150
56235
463581
120809
133904
57749
7782505
10049044
79118
532274
108907
510156
75003
67663
74873
107302
20053
126998
1897456
7440473
20064
7440484
20075
7440508
* 20086
IZOYL PEROXIDE
flZYL CHLORIDE
BERYLLIUM
BJPH'ENYL foiPHENYL)
BIS(2CHLOROETHYL)ETHER
BIS(2CHL6R6iMETHEtHYL)ETHER
BIS(2ETHYLHEXYL)ADIPATE
BIS(CHLOROMETHYL) ETHER
BROMOFORM (TRIBROMOMETHANE)
BROMOMETHANE (METHYL BROMIDE)
BUTADIENE. 1.3
BUTYL ACRYLATE
BUTYL ALCOHOL. N (BUTANOL)
BUTYL ALCOHOL. SEC
BUTYL ALCOHOL. TERT
BUTYL BENZYL PHTHALATE
BUTYLENE OXIDE. 1.2
BUTYRALDEHYDE
CADMIUM
CADMIUM COMPOUNDS*
CALCIUM CYANAMIDE
CAPTAN
CARBARYL
CARBON DISULFDE
CARBON TORACHLORIDE
CARBONYL SULFIDE
CATECHOL {1 .2 DIHYDROXYBENZENE)
CHLbRAMBEN
CHLORDANE
CHLORINE "
CHLORINE DIOXIDE
CHLOROACETIC ACID
CHLOROACETOPHENONE
CHLOROBENZENE
CHLOROBENZJLATE
CHLOROETHANE (ETHYL CHLORIDE)
CHLOROFORM
CHLOHOMETHANE
CHLOROMETHYL METHYL ETHER
CHLOROPHENOLS*
CHLOROPRENE
CHLOROTHALONIL
CHROMIUM
CHROMIUM COMPOUNDS*
COBALT
COBALT COMPOUND'S*" " "" "~" ~
COPPER
COPPER COMPOUNDS*
100
10
10

1
1


10

10

10
10
10
100
1

10




a


a

a



a


a

-
1000
100




1000
100
100

too
1000

1000
100

50OO
. - -_


a





a






e

00
10OO
5000
100
5000
1000
5000

5000
500O
5000
1000
5000

1000
iodb
1000
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
1000


	



a
a











-
100
	 ipoq
5000

1000
5000

100

10
100
5000
1000

1
io
100
5000
1000
5000
5000

5000
5000







a


a




e

Refer to end of table for citations

-------
120718
108394
95487
" 106445
1319773
98828
80159
135206
57125
20097
1 10827
4680788
569642
989388
1937377
2602462
16071866
2832408
81889
3761533
3118976
" 842079
97563
128665
94757
1163195
2303164
615054
39156417
101804
95807
25376458
334883
132649
96128
106934
95501
541731
106467
25321226
91941
75274
107062
540590
75092
120832
78875
~ 542756
CRESIOINE.P
CRESOL. M
CRESOL. 0
CRESOL". P
CRESOL (MIXED ISOMERS)
CUMENE
CUMENE HYDROPEROXIDE
CUPFERRON
CYANIDE
CYANIDE COMPOUNDS*
CYCLOHEXANE
Cl ACID GREEN 3
C.I BASIC GREEN 4
CJ BASIC RED 1 	
Cl DIRECT BLACK 38
Cl DIRECT BLUE 6
C.I. DIRECT BROWN 95
C 1. DISPERSE YELLOW 3
C 1. FOOD RED 15
C 1. FOOD RED 5
C 1. SOLVENT ORANGE 7
c i" SOLVENT YELLOW" i~4
C 1. SOLVENT YELLOW 3
CL VAT YELLOW 4" "~
D.2.4 (ACETIC ACID (2.4DICHLOR
DECABROMODIPHENYL OXIDE
DIALLATE
DIAMINOANISOLE.2.4
DIAMINOANISOLE SULFATE. 2.4
DIAMINODIPHENYLETHER. 4.4
DIAMINOTOLUENE. 2.4
DIAMINOTOLUENE (MIXED ISOMERS)
DIAZOMETHANE
DIBENZOFURAN
DIBROMOCHLOROPROPANE (DBCB)
DIBROMOETHANE. 1.2
DICHLOROBENZENE. 1.2
DICHLOROBENZENE. 1.3
DICHLOROBENZENE. 1.4
DICHLOROBENZENE (MIXED ISOMERS)
DICHLOROBEN2DINE. 3.3
DICHLOROBROMOMETHANE (BROMODICHK
DICHLOROETHANE. 1.2
DICHLOROETHYLENE.1 .2
DICHLOROMETHANE
DICHLOROPHENOL.2.4
DICHLOROPROPANE. 1.2
DICHLOROPROPYLENE.1 .3







100

10
10
1
V

10
too











t




a


100
100
ioo
100





100O




1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
too















a

5000
5000
1000

5000


1000
5000

5000
500O
1000
1000
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000









a




a


100
100
166
100

10
1000


100




1000
100
100
100
100
5000
5000
100
5000
100


a



a






1


a
Refer t« en J of table lor citations

-------
62"
- ili
14641
111422
64662
64675
119904
57147
131113
77781
60117
121697
119937
79447
105679
534521
51285
606202
121142
117840
123911
122667
1178.17
84742
106898
110805
140885
541413
100414
74851
107211
75218
96457
151564
2164172
50000
76131
20100
76448
87683
118741
77474
67721
1335871
680319
302012
10034932
'7647010
SMCHLORVOS
COFOL
JIEPOXYBUTANE
DJETHANOLAMINE
DIETHYLPHTHALATE
DIETHYL SULFATE
DIMETHOXYBENZIDINE. 3.3
DIMETHYL HYDRAZINE, 1.1
DIMETHYL PHTHALATE
DIMETHYL SULFATE
DIMETHYLAMINOAZOBENZENE.4
DIMETHYLANIUNE.N.N
DIMETHYLBENZIDINE. 3.3
DIMETHYLCARBAMYL CHLORIDE
DIMETHYLPHENOL.2.4
DINITPJ60CRESbL.4~6" "
DINITROPHENOL, 2.4
DINITHOTOLUENE. 2.6
DINITROTOLUENE.2.4
DIOCTYL PHTHALATE. N
DIOXANE. 1.4
DIPHENYLHYDRAZ1NE. 1.2
DK2ETHYLHEXYL) PHTHALATE
DI-N-BUTYL PHTHALATE (DIBUTYL PHTHAL
EPICHLOROHYDRIN
ETHOXYETHANOL. 2
ETHYL ACRYLATE
ETHYL CHLOROFORMATE
ETHYLBENZENE
ETHYLENE
ETHYLENEGLYCOL
ETHYLENE OXIDE
ETHYLENE THIOUREA
ETHYLENEIMINE (AZIRIDINE)
FLUOMETURON
FORMALDEHYDE
FREON 113 (ETHANE. 1.1.2-TRICHLORO-1.S
GLYOOL ETHERS
HEPTACHLOR
HEXACHLOR01 .3BUTADIENE
HEXACHLOROBENZENE
HEXACHLOROCYCLOPENTADIENE
HEXACHLOROETHANE
HEXACHLORONAPHTHALENE
HEXAMETHYLPHOSPHORAMIDE
HYDRAZINE
HYDRAZINE SULFATE
HYDROCHLORIC ACID

10

10
10
100
10
10
10
i
100
10
100
10
100
100



10
10
1
10
1
100
10
100

1




e





a
a













5000




1OO
100
100
100

100
1000
100
1000
5000



100

1000
100
10
1000













a











1000
1000
5000
5000
1000
5000
100
5000
5000
5000
5000
"lOO
1000
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
1000
5000
5000
5000

1000
100
1000
1000
1000
5000
5000
5000

5000























10

1000


1000

100
~~io
10
1000
1000
5000
10
10
1000
5000
5000
1000

1000
5000

1000
1
1
1
100

5000







a


a


a









Refer to end of table for citations

-------
74906
7664393
123319
78842
67630
80057
7439921
20111
58699
108316
12427382
7439965
20122
7439976
20133
67561
72435
109864
96333
" 78933
60344
74884
108101
"624839
80626
1634044
74953
101144
101611
101688
101779
90948
1313275
505602
91203
134327
91598
7440020
20144
7697372
139139
98953
92933
1836755
51752
55630
99592
88755
HYDROGEN CYANIDE
HYDROGEN FLUORIDE 	
HYDROQUINONE
JSOBUTYRALDEHYDE
ISOPROPYL ALCOHOL (or strong acid
SOPROPYLIDENEDIPHENOL. 4.4
LEAD
LEAD COMPOUNDS*
UNDANE (HEXACHLOROCYCLOHEXANE. GAI
MALEIC ANHYDRDE
MANEB
MANGANESE
MANGANESE COMPOUNDS*
MERCURY
MERCURY COMPOUNDS*
METHANOL
METHOXYCHLOR
METHOXYETHANOL. 2
METHYL ACRYLATE
METHYL ETHYL KETONE
METHYL HYDRAZINE
METHYL JOblDE
METHYL ISOBUTYL KETONE
METHYL iSOCYANATE 	
METHYL METHACRYLATE
METHYL TERTBUTYL ETHER
METHYLENE BROMIDE (DIBROMOMETHANE)
METHYLENEBIS(2CHLORO ANILINE)
METHYLENEBIS(N.N.DIMETHYUBENZENAMir
METHYLENEBIS(PHENYUSOCYANATE)
METHYLENEDIANIUNE.4.4
MICHLERS KETONE
MOLYBDENUM TRIOXIDE
MUSTARD GAS
NAPHTHALENE
NAPHTHYLAMINE. ALPHA
NAPHTHYLAMINE. BETA
NICKEL
NICKEL COMPOUNDS*
NITRIC ACID
NITRILOTFUACET1C ACID
NITROBENZENE
NITROBIPHENYL.4
NITROFEN
NITROGEN MUSTARD
NITROGLYCERIN
NITROOANISIDINE. 5
NltROPHENOL.2 	

10
10




100

10


1
100
1
100


10















a
(





100
1000
1


1000


1000
5000
1OOO




10

100









e


a












100
1000
5000
5000
1000
5000

100
5000
5000
5000
1000
5000
5000
"100
5000
1OOO



100
5000
5000
5000
100
1000
5000
100

5000







a












10
5000
1
1
5000

1
5000
1
5000
5000
5000



100
loo
100

1000
1000


100
a















a



Refer tc
of table (or citations

-------
100027
79469
55105
62759
924163
621647
156105
86306
4549400
59892
759739
684935
16543558
100754
2234131
20816120
56382
87865
79210
108952
106503
90437
75445
7664382
7723140
85449
88891
1336363
1120714
57578
123386
114261
75569
115071
75558
110861
91225
82688
81072
94597
7782492
7440224
20177
100425
96093
7664939
79345
127184
OPHENOL.4
DPROPANE. 2
.«,noSODIETHYLAMINE.N
NITROSODIMETHYLAMINE.N
Nl rROSODI-n-BUTYLAMINE.N
NITROSODI-n-PROPYLAMINE.N
NITROSODIPHENYLAMINE. P
NITROSODIPHENYLAMINE.N
NITROSOMETHYLVINYLAMINE.N
NITROSOMORPHOLINE.N
NITROSO-N-ETHYLUREA.N
NITROSO-N-METHYLUREA.N
NITOOSONORNICOTINE.N
NITROSOPIPERDINE.N
OCTACHLORONAPHTAHLENE
OSMIUM TETROXIOE
PARATHION
PENTACHLOROPHENOL
PERACET1CACID
PHENOL
PHENYLENEDIAMINE.P
PHENYLPHENOL. 2
PHOSGENE
PHOSPHORIC ACID
PHOSPHORUS (YELLOW OR WHITE)
PHTHALIC ANHYDRIDE
PICRIC ACID (2.4.6TRINITROPHENOL)
POLYCHLORINATED BIPHENYLS
PROPANE SULTONE
PROPIOLACTONE.BETA
PROPIONALDEHYDE
PROPOXUR (BAYQON)
PROPYLENE OXIDE
PROPYLENE (PROPENE)
PROPYLENEIMINE
PYRIDINE
OUINOUNE
OUINTO2ENE (PENTACHLORONITROBENZB
SACCHARIN (MANUFACTURING)
SAFROLE
SELENIUM
SILVER
SILVER COMPOUNDS*
STYRENE
STYRENE OXIDE
SULFURIC ACID
TETOACHLOROETHANE. 1.1.2.2
TETRACHLOROETHYLENE (PERCHLOROETH

10
1
10
10
10
10
1
1
10





10
10
100

1

100
100
100


100
100

a
a
a














a




a








100
1000
1000






1000
1000
100
1000

1000
1000
I
















a

e




1 BOO
10
00
1000
5000
5000
5000
1000
5000
5000
5000
1000
100
100
1000
5000
10
5000
1000
5000
5000
100
5000
1000
5000
5000
5000
5000
100
5000
5000
1000
5000
5000
























100



100



10
10
1000
5OOO
5000
1

1

5000

5000
1000

100

1000
1000
100
1000



















e

a
a

Refer to end of table for citations

-------
961115
7440260
62555
139651
62566
1314201
7550450
108883
584849
91087
95534
636215
8001352
68768
52686
120821
71556
79005
79016
95954
88062
1582098
95636
"126727
51796
7440622
108054
~5936O2
75014
75354
108383
'95476
106423
" 133O257
87627
7440666
20199
12122677
TETRACHLORVINPHOS
THALLIUM
THIOACETAMIDE
THIODIANILINE.4.4
THIOUREA
THORIUM DIOXIDE
TITANIUM TETRACHLORIDE
TOLUENE
TOLUENE2.4DIISOCYANATE
TOLUENE2.6DIISOCYANATE
TOLUIDINE.O
TOLUIDINE HYDROCHLORIDE
TOXAPHENE
TRIAZIQUONE
TRICHLORFON
TRICHLOROBENZENE. 1.2.4
TRICHLOROETHANE. 1.1.1
TRICHLOROETH ANEi 1 . 1 .2
TRICHLOROETHYLENE
TRICHLOROPHENOL. 2.4.5
TRICHLOROPHENOL. 2.4.6
TRIFLURALIN
TRIMETHYLBENZENE. 1.2.4
tRIS(2.3DiBRdM6PR6PYL)PHOSPHATE
URETHANE (ETHYL CARBAMATE)
VANADIUM
VINYL ACETATE
VINYL BROMIDE
VINYL CHLORIDE
VINYLIDENE CHLORIDE (1 .1 DICHLOROETHYt
XYLENE. M
XYLENE.O
XYLENE. P
XYLENE (MfXEb ISOMERS)
XYUDINE.2.6
ZINC
ZINC COMPOUNDS*
ZINEB
10
10
~

100
100
10
100
100
100
10
100
1
100


-


a
a

a



100
1000


100
1000
1000
1000
1000

1000
1000
1000

-



a

-


1000
5000
100
5000
100
5000
5000
.1000
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
100
1000
5000


--


—
-
-


5000
	
1000
100

1
1000
100
1000
" iood
1000
10
	 10
1000
5000
5000
1000
1000
1000
ioob


-

a


a
a
a

a


KEY TO FOOTNOTES
All RQ values are RSG unless otherwise specified
4 See individual element lor data on compounds
NOTE. For metal compounds, the loxicity data presented in the table are those ol the parent compound.
a = IRIS
e = WQCS
f = CURE

-------
Table C-3

-------
C - 3- CHEMICALS WITH NO REFERENCE DOSE. POTENCY FACTOR.
WEIGHT OF EVIDENCE OR REPORTABLE QUANTITY VALUES
jmenc Toxfcty Data
, .or TRI Chemicals
i CAS
60093 IAMINOAZ
CHEMICAL
OBENZENE. 4
i 6464522 1 AMMONIUM Nl I RATE
i 77832021 AMMONIUM SULFATE
i 1 04949 IANISIDINI
55210IBENZAMI
E.P
)E
94360 1 BENZOYL PEROXIDE
141322 1 BUTYL ACRYLATE
123728 BUTYRALDEHYDE
156627 1 CALCIUM
CYANAMIDE
. 463581 1 CARBONYL SULFIDE
! 1 20809 1 UA i bCHOL (1 .2 DIHYDROXYBENzENE)
10049044 1 CHLORINE DIOXIDE
i 744O484 1 COBALT
20075 1 COBALT COMPOUNDS*
. 4660788 C. . ACID GREEN 3
• 569642 1 C. . BASIC GREEN 4
989388 C. . BASIC RED 1
• 2832408 1 C. . DISPERSE YELLOW 3
818891 C. . FOOD RED 15
. 311 8976 1C.. SOLVENT ORANGE 7
i 842079 1 C. . SOLVENT YELLOW 14
97563 1 C.I. SOLVENT YELLOW 3
1 28665 i C.I. VAT YELLOW 4
334863 1 DIAZtiMb i riANE
132649 1 DIBENZOFURAN
i 11142ziuikinANOLAMINE
646ra uib i rIYL SUL>A i b
541413 ETHYL CH
ILOROFORMATE
74651 1 b i rIYLENE
1335671 1 HEXACHLORONAPHTHALENE
660319 IHEXAMET
HYLPHOSPHORAMIDE
78842 1 ISOBUTYRALDEHYDE
67630 ISOPROPYL ALCOHOL for strong acid
80057 ISOPROPYLJDbNbLiir'riENOL, 4.4
1016te MbirlYLENkBl8(PHENYUSOCYANAifc)
131 3275 1 MOLYBDENUM I niUAlDE
92933 1 Nl i nOBIPHENYL.4
55630 1 Ni i nOGLYCbMiN
2234131 lOCTACHLORONAPHTAHLENE
86891 1 PICRIC ACID tz.4.e i rtiNI 1 hut^KLNOL)
1 23386 1 PROPIONALDEHYDE
115071 PROPYLENE (PROPENE)
7664939 SULFURIC ACID
1314201 1 THORIUM
DIOXIDE
68768 i HiAZlQUONE
9563B iniMCiriTLBfcN£KNk. 1,2.4
87627IXYUDINE.2.6

SARA
CURE
X
X
X

X
X
X
X
HSDE
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Xl X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
ND
X
X
ND
ND
X
X
XI X
x| x
xj x
Xl X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X





X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
ND
XI X
Xj X

-------
     Appendix D



Review of Data Sources
         D-l

-------
                                         Appendix D - Review of Data Sources
Database or Listing
Purpose of Data
Types of Information
Number of
TRI
Chemicals*
Format or
Access
Health Effects
Database (HRDB)
Integration of data from
existing EPA databases.
Includes reportable quantities, threshold
planning quantities, indicators of
carcinogenicity, oral reference dose.
312
dBASE
file for PC
use.
Roadmaps
Assist non-EPA users
who assess TRI
chemicals.
Primarily a directory of sources of
information on individual chemicals.
Also provides reportable quantities and
measures of exposure limits.
312
PC
software
Integrated Risk
Information System
(IRIS)
Designed for EPA
decision-making and
regulatory activities;
represents EPA risk
information consensus.
Includes measures of chronic health
hazards, carcinogenicity, reportable
quantities, water quality criteria, and
maximum contaminant levels.
200+
ASCII
files via E-
mail or
Toxnet
Risk Screening Guide
Appendix A
("PRETOX" data)
Toxicology data to
support TRI Risk
Screening Guide.
Contains various indicators of toxicity,
including reportable quantities, RfDs
and Water Quality Criteria.	
309
dBASE
file for PC
use.
Hazardous Substances
Data Bank (HSDB)
Designed to provide a
single source of broad
toxicological and
pharmacological
information on chemical
substances.
Includes both toxicological effects from
scientific literature as well as regulatory
standards.  Also includes environmental
fate and exposure potential. Information
on over 4,100 substances in total.
Unknown
On-line
mainframe
through
NLM
TOXNET
                                                         D-2

-------
 Database or Listing
Purpose of Data
Types of Information
Number of
TRI
Chemicals'
Format or
Access
 AQUIRE - Aquatic
 Toxicity Retrieval
 System
Source of quick access to
comprehensive,
systematic aquatic toxicity
data.
Indexes the conditions and results of
scientific studies; provides lethal and
effect concentrations and
bioconcentration factors for aquatic
systems.	
unknown
PC or
mainframe
software
 U.S. Census Data
Used at EPA to support
exposure assessments.
Includes 1980 U.S. Census population
data and 1983 estimates, encoded by
block group/enumeration district
centroids.
N/A
On GEMS
(VAX)
and PC-
GEMS
 REACH Data;
 REACHSCAN Data.
Used at EPA to support
exposure assessments.
Includes stream reach location
information; REACHSCAN allows
identification of downstream water
intakes.
N/A
On GEMS
(VAX)
and PC-
GEMS
 Federal Reporting Data
 System (FRDS)
Used at EPA to support
exposure assessments,
drinking water analyses.
Includes public water supply system
data, including location, volume, source,
and population served.
N/A
On GEMS
system
(VAX)
• There are a total of 317 TRI chemicals.
                                                        D-3

-------
       Appendix £





Waste Volumes by Industry
          E-l

-------
         Table 4.7   NUMBER OF LANDFILLS 8V AMOUNT OF WASTE RECEIVED IN 1984
Watte Typt
Municipal
Solid Watt*
industrial
want
Demolition
Want
Other Wastt
Survey
Rttpontt
Ratt
85%
82H
83H
85%
Quantity of Want Rtctivtd
< 30.000 cu yds
(<30toni/day)
S.309
(67H)
2.289
(79%)
1.608
(75%)
790
(93H)
30,000-600,000
cuyds
(30-500
tons/day)
2,211
(28%)
523
(18H)
468
(22%)
51
(6%)
> 600.000 cuyds
(> 500 tons/day)
408
(5%)
72
(2.5%)
78
(3.6%)
11
(1.3%)
Total Landfills
Per Wane
Type*
7.925
(100H)
2.884
(100%)
2.154
(100%)
852
(100%).
SOURCE: U.S. EPA. 1988. Report to Congress: Solid Waste Disposal in the United States,
Volume 1, Draft Final (Revised), April 15, 1988.
•  Percentage* may not total 100 percent because of rounding.
                                      E-2

-------
 Table 4-9.  NUMBER OF INDUSTRIAL ESTABLISHMENTS WITH LANDFILLS BY ANNUAL WASTE
                            QUANTITY DISPOSED IN THEM IN 1985
industry
Type
Organic
Chemicals
Primary iron and
Steel
Ft ml lit r 4 Agri-
cultural Chtmiealf
Eltctnc Power
Generation
Plastics and Reims
Manufacturing
Inorganic
Chemicals
,Stone, Gay. Glass. 4
Concrete
Pulp and .
Paper
Primary Non-ferrous
Metals
Food and Kindred
Products
Water
Treatment
Petroleum
Refining
Rubber and Misc.
Products
Transportation
Equipment
Selected Chem. and
Allied Products
Tertle
A A AA. tMm^^ ^A^^m
MenuTBnuniw
Leather andLearttwr
Qmmttuftm.
rvQQtlW
Total*
Number of Establishment! by
Annual Quantity of Want Disposed of m Landfills m 1985
(thousand tons)
Less
than
0.5
2
69
25
23
• 18
30
•73
26
32
127
33
21
2
37
•
12
•
1.344
05-5
4
55
2
13
6
31
129
14
35
22
33
9
22
•
•
•
0
Jtt_
51-20
4
29
0
6
2
10
85
83
7
17
0
8
2
7
•
7
1
374
21-100
2
13
0
23
2
9
46
44
13
12
3
i
10
7
1
0
0
Jii-
101-1,000
1
9
2
57
0
0
10
12
2
11
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
105
More
than
i.OOO
0
0
1
3
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
39.
0
*
Total
Establishments
Per industry
Type*
13
176
30
126
21
81
1.143
179
90
189
69
40
36
54
19
25
9
2.305*
SOURCE: U.S. EPA. 1988. Report to Congress: Solid Waste Disposal in the United States.
Volume 1, Draft Final (Revised), April 15, 1988.
•  These are the correct totals. Table entnes may not add to their respective totals due to
   rounding.
b  Overall response rate for this table n 99.3 percent
                                     E-3

-------
 Table 4-62. NUMBER OF ESTABLISHMENTS WITH SURFACE IMPQUNDMEST5 BY
          INDUSTRY AND WASTE QUANTITY DISPOSED OF IN THEM IN IMS
industry
Typt
Organic
Chemicals
Primary iron
and Steel
Fertilizer and
Agncul Chemicals
Electric Power
Generation
Plastics and Reims
Manufacturing
inorganic
Chtmicall
Stone. Clay. Clan.
and Concrete
Pulp and
Paper
Primary Nonfer-
rous Metals
Food and Kmdred
Products
Water
Treatment
Petroleum
Refining
Rubber and
Miscellaneous
Products
Transportation
Equipment
Selected
Chemicals and
Allied Product*
Textilf
Manufacturing
Leather and
leather Products
Total*
Number of Establishments by Waste Quantity Disposed of
m Them m 1985 (toni)
Less
Than
3
1
1
3
S
3
3
42
9
6
13
0
30
41
' 7
2
1
6
1M
3-9
2
1
1
3
2
I
106
23
S
30
0
4
1
0
0
16
0
197
10-99
2
37
37
29
4
25
419
0
38
IDS
34
60
22
19
2
39
3
877
100-
499
12
18
9
29
6
34
594
29
18
21S
34
12
1
29
3
1
3
1.049
500-
999
1
3
3
7
1
14
194
3
2
54
5
10
10
2
4
11
1
32S
1.000-
4,999
11
24
6
20
8
83
217
19
SI
353
17
70
1
9
4
21
0
916
5.000-
10.000
13
10
3
7
2
32
76
IS
10
129
32
8
3
8
S
16
1
369
Greater
Than
1 0.000
45
89
47
207
SO
145
290
201
ss
799
207
117
46
44
33
283
It
2.677
Total
Establish-
ments Per
Industry
Type*
86
182
110
306
77
340
1,939
301
186
1,700
329
310
126
118
52
388
27
6.5786
SOURCE: U.S. EPA. 1988. Report to Congress: Solid Waste Disposal in the United Slates
Volume 1, Draft Final (Revised), April 15, 1988.

•  These) art the correct totals. The table entries may not add to their respective totals
   because of rounding.

»  Overall response ratt for this table is 98.S percent.
                                  E-4

-------
  Tiblt 4-83. NUMBER OP ESTABLISHMENTS WITH WASTE PILES BY INDUSTRY TYPE AND WASTE
                       QUANTITY DISPOSED OF IN THEM IN 1985
industry Type
Organic Chemical!
Primary iron and Steel
Ftrtiiiitrand
Agricultural Chemicals
Electric Power
Generation
Plastics and Resins
Manufacturing
Inorganic Chemicals
Stone. Clay, Glass, and
Concrete
Pulp and
Paper
[Primary Non
-------
                   Appendix F





Options for Indicator Computation and Normalization
                       F-l

-------
 I.     Options for Indicator Computation

       The TRI indicator will be calculated by combining the individual scores of the TRI
 chemical-facility-media components. Each component's value is related to a chemical's risk
 to either human health or the environment (depending on the indicator).  The value is
 calculated  based on measures of the volume of release  from a facility, the chemical's
 toxicity, and the potential exposed population for the media of release.

       This appendix discusses the two leading methodologies considered for calculating the
 TRI indicator.  The  method of calculation will influence the ways we  can adjust the
 indicator and how the indicator will change in response to the adjustments as facilities and
 chemicals are added over time.

       Simple Sum of the Component Scores:


                             / = S, + S2 + S3  + ... + S.
where:

      I      =    TRI indicator
      S     —    fflgility-ehemiggl.mednitn-sneeifie SUbindi

      In this method, each component score makes a contribution proportional to its size.
Simply, it is the total "risk" resulting from all chemical-facuity-media releases. It should be
noted mat subscores for particular chemicals, industries, and regions can also be calculated
for indicator diagnostics.

      Simnle Snm Normalized to a Base Year:
                         ( 5. * S, * S, + ...  + 5_)
                           *    *    *         * fnmmyif . 1(V)%
                         ( 5, + $2 + S3 * ... «• S,, )
      Like the simple  sum  method,  this method  represents each component  score
proportionately. Its primary advantage is that it is a dimensionless ratio that tracks progress
over time and continuously looks back at the beginning of the indicator record. A score of
60 indicates that the overall chemical-facuity-media risk has been reduced by 40 percent
since the TRI indicator began.  Hence, each individual score has mining  as  does  the
change from year to year.


                                        F-2

-------
       Other Methods of Calculation

       We considered alternative means of calculating the indicator. Some of these included
 the arithmetic mean of the component scores, the geometric mean of the scores, and the
 least-square difference of the scores. Although each of these methods generates a score that
 will fluctuate as the individual components of the risk, the methods do not produce readily
 imerpretable results.

       For the greatest sensitivity in the actual indicator score, as well as for the  greatest
 ease in calculation and interpretation, we recommend that the chemical-facility-media scores
 simply be added and then adjusted to a manageable level.

 II.    Normalizing the Indicator

       This section discusses options considered for modifying the indicator to accommodate
 the addition of SIC codes and chemicals for TRI reporting purposes.  We discuss  how the
 failure to report chemical release data as well as data errors can affect the calculation of
 the indicator.  We also present an  example  to illustrate both the necessity of designing a
 method of normalization and the implications of the methods presented here.

       As discussed previously, the indicator should be  designed to  accommodate an
 increase in the number of components of the TRL  This increase can occur through any of
 three mechanisms: an addition of chemicals to the TRI list, an increase in the number of
 facilities by enhancing the SIC code list, and an increase in facility compliance with existing
 reporting requirements.  Each of  these scenarios enhances the accuracy of the report
 because they supply missing information. However, this addition changes the scope of the
 indicator  (from a small subset to a larger subset), thereby limiting the  effectiveness of
 comparison between current and past values.

       The addition to or deletion of chemicals from the TRI roster will occur  as EPA
 responds to petitions or initiates its own action through the chemical listing or delisting
 process. The deletion of chemicals will presumably have a minor effect since such chemicals
would be deleted due to their low risk; by definition these chemicals will make only a
minimal contribution to the indicator. Deletion will most likely occur in batches every few
years.  The addition of SIC codes  will likely follow investigations  of the TRI chemicals
revealing  other industries that emit the listed chemicals.  Compliance could also in the
future.  In 1989,  the Office of Toxic Substances studied compliance with TRI reporting
requirements.  The study found that the compliance rate was 81.7 percent in the first year
of reporting. Follow up studies have not been done to determine the improvement in
compliance with Section 313. However, the OTS study stated that under full compliance,
the estimated number of respondents would be over  29,000.  In the last two years of
reporting, the number of reporting facilities has  not approached  that figure, despite a
lowering of reporting thresholds.
                                       F-3

-------
       The fundamental problem in maintaining a single, continuous indicator is that there
 is no way to differentiate between fluctuations due to changes in actual environmental risk
 and those due to changes in the chemical or facility roster.  Therefore, to maintain  the
 integrity of the indicator when chemicals are  added to the roster, each addition to  the
 indicator should be  accompanied by some kind  of adjustment.   Methodologies  for
 accommodating the addition of chemical-facility-media components are presented below
 along with discussions of their impact on the accuracy of the indicator.  First, we present a
 hypothetical example of indicator values  over  a five year pehod and then articulate a
 number of options for normalizing the index.

 Example:

       The calculation of the indicator begins  in  1988, and  we select the Simple Sum
 method of calculating the indicator. For the first 5 years the indicator scores are as follows:
Year
1988
1989
1990
1991
1992
Indicator Score
1,000
950
850
800
775
In 1993, the Agency adds another 200 chemicals to the TRI list as well as five SIC codes.
The 1993 score of the original set of TRI chemicals and SIC codes is 750, meaning that the
risks associated with those chemicals and facilities have decreased. The score for the
additional set of chgnMeafc and facilities is 500.
      Do Nothing

      The Do-Nothing scenario is important to examine since the benefits of lost continuity
may outweigh the disadvantages and the effort required to work around them. For this
method, the score will rise when components are added and will no longer describe the
environmental progress as compared to the previous roster. In our example, the indicator
score will read 775 in 1992 and 1,250 in 1993.  It will be impossible to recalculate the
previous years' scores with the new chemicals because release data will not be available.
Thus, information on progress since the initial roster will be lost.

      Hie Do-Nothing scenario could be viewed as a more accurate representation of the
"complete picture" of  environmental risk.  If, for example, the indicator  score for the
universe of all chemicals and all facilities were actually 4,000, and this initial TRI setup
                                        F-4

-------
 provides a score of 1,000, then the subsequent addition of components to the TRI will fill
 in the additional 3,000 points  for which no information  exists.  Yet for the public to
 understand the severity of a change, increases in the indicator score from new chemicals
 ought to occur on the same scale as that of the original set.  As discussed earlier, the public
 will perceive the indicator score presented with the first set of TRI chemicals and facilities
 as representing the risk associated with all chemicals and facilities. The public will believe
 that the new score of 1250 means that the risks posed to them have risen by 475 points;
 actually, the  risk to  them has not increased at all, they are just  better represented.  An
 increase in the number  of  components should  not actually increase risk but should
 redistribute the individual contributions to the total risk.

                          te Indicator
       Chemicals could be added to the TRI roster one or two at a time each year or in a
large number once every five years. If the latter occurs exclusively, we could establish an
indicator consisting solely of the new chemicals and allow the scores of the old indicator to
continue as before. In our example, the TRI indicator would be reported as two scores: in
1993 it would be 750 for the original set of TRI chemicals and facilities and 500 for the new
set of chemicals and facilities. This approach has two advantages.  First, this system could
accurately track the progress of the original roster as well as the new roster.  Second, the
indicator for each roster  could be compared and the program could establish priority for
alleviating environmental problems associated with the new or old list

      The primary  disadvantage  of two indicators is the loss  of a  single instrument.
Chemicals and SIC codes will be added to the TRI more than once, and each time another
four indices  (human health and environmental risk; chronic and acute effects) will be
needed.    Each  of  these indices  is also compared at regional, state and local levels.
Maintaining a number of indicators will create public confusion, as people try to keep track
of each separate indicator change from the previous year. A second disadvantage follows
from the Do-Nothing scenario: if people  add these scores together to get the "total"  score,
they will perceive an increase  in overall risk.   Finally,  if TRI chemicals are added
continuously in small amounts, d»g method will be extraordinarily difficult to implement as
new indices are created each year.
      The ratio adjustment method is used with the Dow Jones Industrial Average, the
Producer Price Index, the Consumer Price Index,  and the New York Stock Exchange
Composite Index.  The underlying  components of each of these  indices are updated
periodically to reflect fundamental shifts in what is being measured. For example, this year
the Dow substituted three service sector stocks for three industrial stocks to reflect the U.S.
economy's shift toward the service sector.  The Producer and Consumer Price indices revise
their basket of goods decennially to reflect the caprice of consumer taste. The NYSE
                                        F-5

-------
 Composite Index, which  encompasses every stock on the New York  Stock Exchange, is
 revised every time companies start up, merge, or fail.

       The adjustment is straightforward.  On the first day that the revised components are
 employed, the index is calculated twice, once based on the old components and again based
 on the revised components.  Thereafter, the ratio between these two index values is used
 to adjust the index as it is calculated from the revised components:
In our example, the old system yielded a score of 750 and the new system yields a score of
1,250.  To scale down the new score to maintain continuity, we multiply the new score by
(750/1,250) = 0.6. All subsequent scores (1994,  1995, and so on) will also be calculated in
the  same  manner  and  then multiplied by 0.6, until another addition requires  the
determination of another multiplication factor.

       One disadvantage of this method is the loss of information concerning the original
set of chemicals and facilities in the presentation of one indicator that integrates all scores.
Even if the indicator publishes the scores associated with each set of chemicals, the scale
will  have changed,  prohibiting direct comparison.  (Compare this to  the  method where
original and supplemental indices are both tracked.)

       Another disadvantage  is the misrepresentation of the behavior of the new set of
chemicals and facilities. The TRI indicator is distinct from the Dow in a way that affects
the applicability of this system. The Dow uses a few stocks to model the entire market and
assumes that the behavior of these stocks reflects the general behavior of all stocks.  This
implies that substitution of one  stock for another in the Dow fits  conceptually with its
purpose.  The TRI indicator seeks to reflect the levels of risk to human  health and the
environment  by including a subset of the universe of all chemicals and facilities.  The
behavior of risks posed by all chemicals and facilities cannot be said to  match the behavior
of the set of TRI chemicals and facilities. The inclusion in TRI focuses  a facility's attention
upon particular ch?™**8** and presumably results in changes of releases of TRI chemicals
by TRI facilities. By fitting the combined score of new and old TRI chemicals and facilities
to the score of the old, we inherently assume that the new have experienced reductions in
risk identical to the  old.  In truth, we have no way of knowing the past pattern of releases
for new additions. Emissions may have not changed at all since these  chemicals have not
yet been targeted by TRI; on the other hand, emissions may have been reduced more than
emissions of old TRI chemicals because the new chemicals may have already been regulated
by certain EPA programs or by states, or companies may have reduced emissions voluntarily.
                                        F-6

-------
                    to a Base Level
       This method reflects the  Do-Nothing  approach  except  for  taking necessary
 adjustments for the use of normalization.  Instead of using the score resulting from a base
 year, base levels could be used, defined as the sum of the component scores at the first year
 that each list is added to the TRI Indicator.  For example, upon the first addition to the TRI
 (combining the initial roster, list 1, and the addition, list 2), the indicator could be calculated
 as follows:


                         ( 5, + S2 + ... * Sm * ... + Sm )
              5,
where:
       S  =  each chemical-faculty-media component score,
       n  =  total number of TRI chemicals,
       m   «= number of TRI chemicals in the first list, and
       m-n -  number of chemicals added to the roster.
       Following the example, the score for 1988 would be (1,000/1,000) "100 = 100.  The
following scores would be (950/1,000) «  95, (850/1,000) - 85, (800/1,000) =  80, and
(775/1,000) = 715.  In 1993, the score would be calculated as follows:


                                 750.500
                                 1000 + 500
While this score represents an increase, it is not as drastic as using the simple sum method.
and it can be explained to the public as resulting from the addition of TRI chemicals and
faculties to the indicator. This equation can also be used to indicate relative percentages
of the two different sets of ghamieaU  and faculties (750/1,500 = 50 for the original and
500/1*500 « 333 for the new). However, as with ratio adjustment, the original set cannot
be said to have improved by (77.5 - 50) » 27.5 points.

      Variations on the Previous Methods

      Improvements in the way in which the smaller TRI chemical universe models the
larger, one would lead to more meaningful comparisons between the old and new indices
One way to improve this modeling ability is to employ data on the new chemicals for the


                                       F-7

-------
 period predating their addition  to TRI.  If we had the release data, we could calculate
 exactly  how inaccurate the small TRI chemical universe was as a model and adjust  it
 accordingly. Although these data will not exist except as pan of a state inventory, we could
 approximate them through the correlation of releases of other chemicals.  For example, if
 a facility reports the release of a chemical because of its addition to the TRI, it is very likely
 that the chemical had been released at that level all along.  A rough approximation would
 be to look at changes in releases from that facility and then correlate the release of the new
 chemical in back years.

      Yet another possibility is to combine more  than one of the above examples. For
 example, it may be appropriate to maintain one "primary" indicator score while also
 maintaining "subscores" for each of the sets of TRI chemicals (i.e., the original set and each
 additional set).  The main score could be calculated using the simple sum and normalized
 with the ratio adjustment each time an additional set of chemicals is added. The subscores
 could be calculated for each set of TRI chemicals using the normalization to a base year;
 each of these subscores could be  maintained separately. In our example, after the addition
 of chemicals,  the main indicator score would be 750  while  the subscores would be
 (750/1,000) = 75 and  (500/500) =  100.  As in the discussion of the creation of separate
 indices, this combination depends upon the addition of TRI chemicals in large groups every
 number of years. If routine additions occur, the main indicator could be calculated as above
 and  only one subscore, that of the original set of chemicals, could  be maintained.

      Start Over

      The last system that may be used is to announce the beginning of a new indicator.
 Once every 5 years the Agency could integrate  all  of the additions to and deletions from
TRI that had occurred since the beginning of the previous indicator.  EPA could announce
that  to  better assess  the  risks to the  environment posed  by chemical releases,  certain
chemicals have been deleted or added  based upon TRI criteria and that a new indicator,
calculated in the same manner at the same scale, has begun. It is  also quite possible that
experience  with the indicator may suggest a new mode of calculation by the time more
chemicals and faculties are ready to be added.
                                        F-8

-------
                  Appendix G





Understanding the TRI Indicator Modelling Approach
                      G-l

-------
I.     PURPOSE OF THE INDICATOR

The purpose of the indicator is to track changes in environmental and human health risk
over time.   The calculation of the indicator requires consideration of release  volume,
toxicity, exposure potential and population exposed.

In our method,  the indicator  will be calculated as the sum of facility-, chemical-, and
medium-specific subindicators:

      •    Each non-zero chemical release, facility, and media combination present in
            the TRI will have a calculated subindex based on toxicity,  exposure, and
            uncertainty.

      •    Using subindexes allows disaggregation of the total index value into groupings
            of  interest  for  analysis or  to  facilitate  explanation  of interior  index
            fluctuations.  Pinpointing areas of change is built into the indicator algorithm.
                                       G-2

-------
 II.    BASIC STEPS

 For each facility,;, and each chemical released at that facility, k, a medium-specific subindex
 will be calculated.  These are the most elemental components of the index and can be
 summed in innumerable ways to view a desegregated TRI indicator to ease analysis and
 explanation of change.  The basic subindex calculation is:

 1.     Locate facility

             for direct  releases: locate TRI reporting facility
             for transfers: match TRI transfer to a receiving facility, then locate receiving
             facility

 2.     Match geographic and demographic features to location

             the key to this step will be the use of the BGREACH grid

 3.     Estimate environmental concentration

             the text of the report explains particular models and methods used for each
             pathway

 4.     Calculate dose, then assign exposure potential score based on dose

             exposure  potential scoring  system presented in report; it is  based  on
             calculated dose and uncertainty category

5.     Weight exposure potential by toririty and population scores

             toxicity and population scoring matrices presented in report
                                        G-3

-------
III.   PATHWAY BY PATHWAY ALGORITHMS


ATP PF1.FASFS

1. Locate facility

      •     Locate facility via longitude/latitude from TRI.

2. Match geographic and demographic features to location

      •     Match TRI facility location to BGREACH grid cell

3. Estimate population-weighted environmental concentration

      •     Convert Ibs/yr release estimate in TRI to grams/sec.
      •     Calculate concentration in the nearest 100  cells (10 km2) based on ISCLT
             equations for stack  or fugitive sources.
      •     Weight calculated concentrations by population in each cell to arrive at
             population-weighted average concentration.

4. Calculate dose, then assign exposure score.

      •     Convert concentration to  dose  using inhalation rate, body weight.  Assign
             score using matrix and uncertainty category A.

5. Multiply exposure potential by toricity score and population score

      •     Multiply exposure  score  by  population  (population of nearest 100 cells
             rounded to the nearest 1000;  if less than 1000, use  1000), adjusted  for
             uncertainty.

      •     Multiply result by toxicity score to arrive at final facility-chemical-air specific
             subindex
                                       G-4

-------
WATER RFTfFASES


1.    Locate facility

      •    Locate facility via longitude/latitude from TRI.

2.    Match geographic and demographic features to location

      •    Match TRI facility location to BGREACH grid cell

3.    Estimate population-weighted environmental concentration

      •    Determine initial concentration from reported TRI water discharge and water
            volume in cell.   If cell  contains no water volume information (e.g., cell
            contains no water body), find nearest cell with water body and assume facility
            releases at that point

      •    Calculate water concentration in each cell through which water body  flows
            (defined by NEXT,, values) using the decay equation and volume and speed
            information.   Using chemical-specific BCF values, also  calculate  the fish
            concentration in each cell.

4.    Calculate dose, then assign exposure score based on dose and uncertainty category
      A.

      For drinking water pathway:

      •    If cell contains a  drinking water intake,  convert water  contaminant
            concentration in cell to dose using drinking water intake rate

      •    Weight dose  in cell served by the size of the population served in the  cell

      •    Continue  traversing the water body through cells and checking for drinking
            water intakes, until water body is completely traversed  or contaminant is
            reduced to negligible levels

      •    Derive average dose by dividing the weighted doses by total population served
            by all cells with intakes
                                       G-5

-------
       For fish ingestion pathway:

       •     In all cells, convert fish contaminant concentration to dose using fish ingestion
             rate  and body weight

       •     Weight dose in cell by the number of persons living in the cell who fish

       •     Continue  traversing  the water body through  cells until  water  body is
             completely traversed or contaminant is reduced to negligible levels

       •     Derive average dose by dividing the weighted doses by total fishing population
             in all cells

       For drinking water  pathway, assign exposure score using matrix and uncertainty
       category B.  For fish ingestion pathway, assign exposure score  using matrix and
       uncertainty  category C.

5.      Weight exposure score by toxicity score and population score

       •     Multiply drinking water exposure score by population size (rounded to nearest
             1000), adjusted by uncertainty category B

       •     Multiply fish ingestion exposure score by population size (rounded to nearest
             1000), adjusted by uncertainty category C

       •     Multiply result by toxicity score to arrive at final facility-chemical-water
             specific subindex f-.± mm.
                                        G-6

-------
LAND RELEASES


1.    Locate facility

      •    Locate facility via longitude/latitude from TRI.

2.    Match geographic and demographic features to location

      •    Match TRI facility location to BGREACH grid cell

3.    Estimate environmental concentration

      •    Determine if site is regulated by RCRA. If form reports RCRA ID number,
            assume no exposure.

      •    If form does not report RCRA ID number, determine concentration in
            leachate based on equations in text

      •    Apply the  dilution  and attenuation  factor  (DAF)  to arrive  at well
            concentration.

4.    Calculate dose, then assign exposure score based on dose and uncertainty

      •    Convert concentration to dose using water ingestion rate, body weight, and
            uncertainty category C

5.    Weight exposure score by toxidty and population scores

      •    Using the WELL variable in the BGREACH file, estimate the number of well
            drinkers in the 4 nearest cells (2 km3); adjust by uncertainty category C and
            multiply result by the exposure score.

      •    Multiply this result by the  toxicity score to arrive at the farility-chemical-
            groundwater subindex, I.
                                      G-7

-------
POTW DISCHARGES

1.    Locate facility

      •     Match DCN (TRI Document Control  Number)  to  the POTW file  to
            determine the POTW rip code.

      •     Locate POTW on using the longitude and latitude of the center of the zip
            code areas in which the POTW is located.

2.    Match geographic and demographic features to location

      •     Match POTW facility location to BGREACH grid cell

3.    Estimate environmental concentration

      •     Determine, based on chemical specific removal rates, amount of contaminant
            removed by treatment at the POTW.

      •     Use the amount removed as a direct discharge to water in the surface water
            body receiving the POTWs effluent and follow procedure for water discharges
            above. If the POTWs cell does not contain a water body, find the nearest
            water body to the cell and assume POTW releases at that point

      •     From the amount not removed, use partition rates to determine amount of
            contaminant that volatilized anfi the am«nnt in shidge.
Step 4 (calculate dose, then assign exposure potential score based on dose) and step 5
(weight exposure potential by toxicity and population scores) are performed as appropriate,
depending on the environmental compartment into which the chemical partitions:

      •     Volatilized contaminant is modelled following the procedure for air releases
            above.

      •     Contaminated shidge is modelled by using methods appropriate to disposal
            practice (if such a match can be made) or by using a chemical-specific unit
            exposure from national assessment of exposures from disposal of municipal
            sludge.
                                      G-8

-------
 OFESITE TRANSFERS

 1.     Locate facility

       •     Match DCNXDocument Control Number) to the OFFSITE file to determine
             the off-site facility zipcode.

       •     Locate off -site facility by using the longitude and latitude of the center of the
             zipcode area.

 2.     Match geographic and demographic features to location

       •     Match location of off-site facility to BGREACH cell

 3.     Estimate environmental concentration

       •     Based on  the treatment  code reported by the faculty,  model  either
             incinerators or land disposal (underground injection?).  If transferred to a
             RCRA faculty, assume no risk. Otherwise:

       •     For incinerators, apply a chemical-specific incinerator efficiency and model
             remaining release following the procedure for direct air releases.
             Land disposal is modeled in the  same way as on-site lanHfiiiing with the
             exception of the addition of volatilized chemical consideration. Emission of
             volatilized chemicals will be estimated ««"g equations in Chapter 5, and then
             modelled following the procedure  for direct fugitive air releases.
Step 4 (calculate dose, then assign exposure potential score based on dose) and step 5
(weight exposure potential by toxitity and population scores) are performed as appropriate,
depending on the treatment method.

The results  of the incinerator results or the result of the sum of the groundwater and
volatilization results becomes the fatility-chemical-offsite subindicator, /JXOFFSITE-
                                        G-9

-------
 IV.    ADDING IT ALLUP



 A total score for the facility may be calculated by adding all of its submdfcator^fer- all

 chemicals it releases (K=l to n):
A total score for a chemical may be calculated by adding all subindicaiors .calculated for that

chemical at any releasing facility (J= 1 to m):


                      m

                 Af • E *a TRI INDICATOR
                                     G-10

-------